AUTODESK REVIT BUILDING 8.

1
®

Metric Tutorial

August 2005

Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state cation, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell ™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield ™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts ............................................................................................... 1
Understanding the Basics ................................................................................................................................. 2 Navigating the Revit Building User Interface ............................................................................................. 4

Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .................................................................................. 11
Creating Your First Building Model ............................................................................................................... 12 Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing ................................................................ 12 Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing ............................................................................................ 24 Dimensioning the Building Model ........................................................................................................... 32 Adding Doors and Windows ..................................................................................................................... 41 Adding Floors and Floor Openings ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding a Roof and Ceiling ........................................................................................................................ 74 Adding Multi-Level Stairs .......................................................................................................................... 80 Creating the East Wing and Passageway .................................................................................................. 87 Scheduling the Building Model .............................................................................................................. 100 Rendering the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 104 Documenting the Building Model .......................................................................................................... 106

Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .......................................................................... 113
Modifying System Settings ........................................................................................................................... 114 Modifying General System Options ........................................................................................................ 114 Specifying File Locations ......................................................................................................................... 115 Specifying Spelling Options .................................................................................................................... 117 Modifying Snap Settings ......................................................................................................................... 118 Modifying Project Settings ........................................................................................................................... 120 Creating and Applying Materials ............................................................................................................ 120 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns ........................................................................................................ 123 Controlling Object Styles ........................................................................................................................ 125 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles ........................................................................................................ 128 Modifying Annotations ........................................................................................................................... 131 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options ........................ 133 Modifying Project Browser Organization ............................................................................................... 134 Creating an Office Template ........................................................................................................................ 136 Choosing the Base Template ................................................................................................................... 137 Modifying Project Settings ...................................................................................................................... 137 Loading and Modifying Families and Groups ........................................................................................ 142 Modifying Views and View Templates ................................................................................................... 144 Modifying Render Scene Settings ........................................................................................................... 147 Modifying Import/Export Settings .......................................................................................................... 148 Setting up Shared and Project Parameters .............................................................................................. 149 Creating Named Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 151

Chapter 4 Ceilings ............................................................................................................................... 153
Creating Ceilings .......................................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Automatic Ceilings ................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Compound Ceilings ................................................................................................................. 156

Chapter 5 Openings ............................................................................................................................ 159
Cutting Roof Openings ................................................................................................................................ 160 Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof ..................................................................................................... 160 Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening ................................................................................................. 164

Contents | i

Creating a Vertical Roof Opening ........................................................................................................... 167 Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings ................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Floor ............................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling ............................................................................................................ 173 Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool .............................................................................................. 174

Chapter 6 Railings ............................................................................................................................... 177
Creating Railings .......................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating the Railing Layout .................................................................................................................... 178 Adjusting Railing Parameters .................................................................................................................. 180

Chapter 7 Roofs ................................................................................................................................... 185
Creating Roofs .............................................................................................................................................. 186 Creating an Extruded Roof ...................................................................................................................... 186 Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................. 190 Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint ............................................................... 192 Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint .................................................................................................... 194 Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................... 197 Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof ...................................................................................................... 199 Aligning Roof Eaves ................................................................................................................................ 201 Creating a Mansard Roof ........................................................................................................................ 202 Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits ............................................................................................................ 204 Creating Roof Fascia ................................................................................................................................ 204 Creating Gutters ...................................................................................................................................... 205 Creating Soffits ........................................................................................................................................ 206

Chapter 8 Stairs .................................................................................................................................. 209
Creating Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 210 Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run ........................................................................................................ 210 Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run ..................................................................................................... 215 Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs .......................................................................................... 221 Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings .................................................................................................... 224 Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run .................................................................................................. 231 Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run ............................................................................................ 236 Working with the Stair Calculator .......................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 9 Walls .................................................................................................................................. 247
Creating Walls .............................................................................................................................................. 248 Sketching Walls ....................................................................................................................................... 248 Working with Compound Walls ............................................................................................................ 258 Working with Vertically Compound Walls ............................................................................................ 266 Joining Walls to Floors ............................................................................................................................ 276 Working with Foundation Walls ............................................................................................................ 278 Working with Wall Wraps ...................................................................................................................... 281 Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments ....................................................................................... 283

Chapter 10 Curtain Systems ................................................................................................................ 287
Flat Curtain System ...................................................................................................................................... 288 Creating an Entrance .............................................................................................................................. 288 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System  ................................................................................................ 296 Curved Curtain System ................................................................................................................................ 299 Adding a Curved Curtain System  .......................................................................................................... 299 Adding a Custom Curtain Panel ............................................................................................................. 301 Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel  ...................................................................................... 304 Additional Curtain Systems ......................................................................................................................... 307 Sloped Glazings  ...................................................................................................................................... 307 Storefront System  ................................................................................................................................... 308 Curtain System by Lines  ........................................................................................................................ 311

Chapter 11 Creating Drawings ............................................................................................................ 315
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project ........................................................................................................... 316 Creating a Drawing Sheet ....................................................................................................................... 316 Adding a Sheet to the Project .................................................................................................................. 323 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet .......................................................................................... 324

ii | Contents

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets ..................................................................................................... 326 Using Legends .............................................................................................................................................. 333 Creating a Symbol Legend ...................................................................................................................... 333 Creating a Wall Type Legend .................................................................................................................. 335 Using a Legend View to Match Types ..................................................................................................... 337 Using Revision Tracking ............................................................................................................................... 339 Setting Up a Revision Table .................................................................................................................... 339 Sketching Revision Clouds ...................................................................................................................... 340 Tagging Revision Clouds ......................................................................................................................... 341 Working with Revisions .......................................................................................................................... 342

Chapter 12 Detailing ............................................................................................................................. 345
Creating a Detail from a Building Model ..................................................................................................... 346 Creating a Callout View .......................................................................................................................... 346 Detailing the View .................................................................................................................................. 350 Adding Detail Lines ................................................................................................................................. 356 Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation ................................................................................................... 359 Adding Break Lines ................................................................................................................................. 360 Adding Text Notes ................................................................................................................................... 363 Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views ......................................................... 364 Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View ............................................................................ 364 Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View ........................................................................................ 366 Creating a Drafted Detail ............................................................................................................................. 369 Creating a Drafting View ........................................................................................................................ 369 Creating a Detail in the Drafting View ................................................................................................... 369 Importing a Detail into a Drafting View ................................................................................................. 376 Creating a Reference Callout .................................................................................................................. 379

Chapter 13 Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 381
Creating Type and Instance Schedules ........................................................................................................ 382 Creating a Window Schedule .................................................................................................................. 382 Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Color Diagram ............................................................................................................ 394 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes ....................................................................................................... 396 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions ..................................................................... 396 Scheduling Shared Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 401 Creating a Multi-Category Schedule ....................................................................................................... 401 Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules ...................................................................................................... 406 Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter ............................................................................... 406 Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula ............................................................................ 408 Scheduling Project Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 409 Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters ............................................................................... 410 Exporting Project Information with ODBC ................................................................................................. 411 Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access ............................................................................ 411

Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning ......................................................................................... 413
Setting the Base Elevation of a Project ......................................................................................................... 414 Setting the Base Elevation of a House ..................................................................................................... 414 Dimensioning ............................................................................................................................................... 416 Creating Dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 417 Controlling Witness Line Location ........................................................................................................ 422 Modifying Dimension Properties ............................................................................................................ 425 Working with Alignments and Constraints ........................................................................................... 426 Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions ......................................................................................... 432 Annotating ................................................................................................................................................... 434 Creating Angular Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 434 Sequentially Tagging Rooms ................................................................................................................... 435 Tagging Doors and Windows .................................................................................................................. 437

Chapter 15 Viewing .............................................................................................................................. 441
Viewing a Building Model ............................................................................................................................ 442 Exploring the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 442 Creating a Perspective View with a Camera ........................................................................................... 445

Contents | iii

Creating a Section View .......................................................................................................................... 451 Creating Elevation Views ........................................................................................................................ 453 Controlling Fill Pattern Colors ..................................................................................................................... 455 Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material ..................................................................................... 455 Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type ................................................................... 457 Creating a View Plan Region ........................................................................................................................ 459 Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan ................................................................................................... 459

Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .............................................................. 463
Rendering an Exterior View ......................................................................................................................... 464 Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model ....................................................................... 464 Adding Trees to the Site .......................................................................................................................... 468 Creating a Perspective View .................................................................................................................... 470 Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View ............................................................................................. 473 Rendering an Interior View .......................................................................................................................... 476 Adding RPC People ................................................................................................................................. 476 Creating the Interior Perspective View ................................................................................................... 478 Creating a New Render Scene ................................................................................................................. 481 Defining Daylights and Rendering the View .......................................................................................... 482 Creating and Recording Walkthroughs ....................................................................................................... 484 Creating a Walkthrough ......................................................................................................................... 484 Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position ........................................................................ 487 Recording the Walkthrough ................................................................................................................... 489

Chapter 17 Presentation Views ........................................................................................................... 491
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique ............................................................................................... 492 Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique .............................................................................................. 492 Using Advanced Model Graphics ............................................................................................................ 494 Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet ............................................................................................................ 496 Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique .............................................................................................. 499 Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique ................................................................................... 500 Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet .......................................................... 502 Adding Section Views to the Analytique ..................................................................................................... 504 Preparing a Section View for the Analytique .......................................................................................... 505 Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View ............................................................................... 509 Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique ............................................................................... 510 Working with a Presentation View Template ......................................................................................... 514 Working in a Callout Analytique ............................................................................................................ 517 Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes .................................................................................................. 524 Creating Cutaway Isometric Views ......................................................................................................... 525 Creating Cutaway Perspective Views ...................................................................................................... 531 Annotating the Analytique ..................................................................................................................... 536

Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor ........................................................................... 539
Using Families and the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to Families ......................................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 542

Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .................................................................. 545
Creating a Door Family ................................................................................................................................ 546 Drawing the Door Plan View Components ............................................................................................ 546 Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry ................................................................................................. 550 Assigning Materials to the Door Components ....................................................................................... 553 Defining New Door Types ....................................................................................................................... 556 Creating a Window Family .......................................................................................................................... 558 Specifying the New Window Parameters ................................................................................................ 559 Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry ........................................................................................ 560 Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry ........................................................................................... 566 Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry .......................................................................................... 569 Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 574 Assigning Materials to the Window Components ................................................................................. 584 Defining New Window Types ................................................................................................................. 587 Creating a Furniture Family ......................................................................................................................... 591 Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters ......................................................................................... 592

iv | Contents

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 597 Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 600 Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry ..................................................................................................... 609 Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 614 Defining New Furniture Types ................................................................................................................ 617 Creating a Baluster Family ........................................................................................................................... 619 Drawing a Baluster .................................................................................................................................. 619 Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run .............................................................................................. 621 Creating Profile Families .............................................................................................................................. 623 Drawing a Sweep Profile .......................................................................................................................... 623 Drawing a Rail Profile ............................................................................................................................. 624 Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile ................................................................................................................ 624 Drawing a Reveal Profile ......................................................................................................................... 625 Drawing a Host Sweep Profile ................................................................................................................. 626 Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path ................................................................................................... 627 Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls .................................................................................................. 629 Creating a Room Tag .................................................................................................................................... 631 Specifying Room Tag Parameters ............................................................................................................ 631 Creating an Annotation Symbol .................................................................................................................. 633 Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol ............................................................................ 633 Adding the New North Arrow to a Project ............................................................................................. 636 Creating a Titleblock Family ........................................................................................................................ 636 Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet ............................................................................................... 637 Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock .............................................................................................. 640 Adding the Titleblock to a New Project .................................................................................................. 649 Creating In-Place Families ............................................................................................................................ 650 Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family ............................................................................................... 651 Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family .......................................................................................... 658

Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques ................................................................. 661
Planning a Parametric Component Family .................................................................................................. 662 Determining Component Needs ............................................................................................................. 662 Selecting the Family Template ................................................................................................................ 663 Creating the Component Skeleton .............................................................................................................. 665 Adding Reference Planes ......................................................................................................................... 666 Adding Dimensions and Constraints ...................................................................................................... 671 Creating New Length Parameters ........................................................................................................... 674 Flexing the Component Model ............................................................................................................... 678 Adding Solid Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 680 Creating Solid Extrusions ........................................................................................................................ 680 Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry ............................................................................................ 682 Creating Additional Solid Geometry ...................................................................................................... 685 Testing the Family in a Project ..................................................................................................................... 693 Loading a Family into a Project .............................................................................................................. 693 Testing a Family Instance in a Project .................................................................................................... 694 Working with Nested Subcomponents ........................................................................................................ 697 Adding a Nested Component ................................................................................................................. 698 Creating Formula-controlled Parameters ................................................................................................ 702 Arraying Nested Subcomponents ............................................................................................................ 706 Reloading a Family into a Project ........................................................................................................... 711 Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters ..................................................................................... 712 Creating and Applying Subcategories ..................................................................................................... 713 Creating Material Parameters .................................................................................................................. 717 Controlling Component Visibility ............................................................................................................... 719 Assigning Detail Level and View Controls .............................................................................................. 719 Creating Component Types ......................................................................................................................... 722 Creating Multiple Component Types ..................................................................................................... 722 Creating Conditional Formulas .............................................................................................................. 723

Chapter 21 Area Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 725
Using Area Analysis Tools ............................................................................................................................ 726 Creating Area Schemes and Plans ........................................................................................................... 726 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans ................................................................................. 732

Contents | v

Chapter 22 Massing ............................................................................................................................... 735
Using Massing Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 736 Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model ...................................................................................... 736 Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model .......................................................... 741 Using Mass Family Files in a Project  ........................................................................................................... 743 Creating New Mass Family Types  .......................................................................................................... 743 Loading and Placing New Mass Families ................................................................................................ 744 Joining Mass Elements ............................................................................................................................ 747 Using Mass Elements with Design Options ................................................................................................. 750 Mass Elements in Design Options .......................................................................................................... 750 Creating Building Components from Mass Elements ................................................................................. 752 Creating Walls by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 753 Creating Floors by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 755 Creating Roofs by Picking Faces .............................................................................................................. 759 Creating Curtain Systems  ...................................................................................................................... 761 Editing Elements Created from Massings ............................................................................................... 763 Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility ............................................................................................................ 768

Chapter 23 Site ..................................................................................................................................... 771
Using Site Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 772 Creating a Toposurface ........................................................................................................................... 772 Adding Property Lines ............................................................................................................................. 777 Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings ...................................................................................... 781 Creating Topographic Subregions ........................................................................................................... 783 Grading the Toposurface ......................................................................................................................... 788 Adding a Building Pad ............................................................................................................................ 793 Adding Site Components ........................................................................................................................ 795 Tagging Site and Parking Components .................................................................................................. 798 Creating Parking Space Schedules ........................................................................................................... 799

Chapter 24 Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 801
Creating Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 802 Creating a Group ..................................................................................................................................... 802 Placing a Group ....................................................................................................................................... 803 Modifying a Group .................................................................................................................................. 804 Creating Nested Groups ............................................................................................................................... 805 Creating a Nested Group ......................................................................................................................... 806 Modifying a Nested Group ...................................................................................................................... 807 Working with Groups .................................................................................................................................. 809 Duplicating a Group ............................................................................................................................... 809 Creating a Detail Group .......................................................................................................................... 812 Using Attached Detail Groups ................................................................................................................ 813 Saving and Loading Groups .................................................................................................................... 815 Automatically Creating a Group ............................................................................................................. 816

Chapter 25 Structural .......................................................................................................................... 819
Adding Structural Walls ............................................................................................................................... 820 Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay .............................................................................................. 820 Sketching Structural Walls ...................................................................................................................... 821 Dimensioning and Modifying Walls ...................................................................................................... 830 Adding Structural Columns and Beams ....................................................................................................... 833 Adding Structural Columns .................................................................................................................... 834 Adding Structural Beams and Girders ..................................................................................................... 838 Adding Joists and Purlins ........................................................................................................................ 848 Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels .................................................................................................. 854 Defining New Levels ............................................................................................................................... 855 Duplicating the Existing Design ............................................................................................................. 856 Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation ......................................................................................................... 858 Creating a Framing Elevation ................................................................................................................. 858 Adding Structural Braces ......................................................................................................................... 860

Chapter 26 Sharing Projects ................................................................................................................ 865
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 866

vi | Contents

Using Worksharing in a Project ................................................................................................................... 866 Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 866 Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets ................................................................................... 869 Working Individually with Worksets ..................................................................................................... 873 Using Worksets with Multiple Users ....................................................................................................... 876 Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users ......................................................................... 881

Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .................................................................................. 885
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project ............................................................................................ 886 Creating the Structural Design Options ................................................................................................. 886 Creating the Roof System Design Options ............................................................................................. 896 Managing Design Options ...................................................................................................................... 903

Chapter 28 Project Phasing ................................................................................................................. 909
Using Phasing ............................................................................................................................................... 910 Phasing Your Model ................................................................................................................................ 910 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags ............................................................................................................. 915

Chapter 29 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates ....................................................... 919
Linking Building Models .............................................................................................................................. 920 Linking Building Models from Different Project Files ............................................................................ 920 Repositioning Linked Building Models ................................................................................................... 928 Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility ........................................................................................ 931 Managing Linked Building Models ......................................................................................................... 933 Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models ........................................................................................... 935 Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates ................................................................................................... 935 Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates ........................................................................................ 937 Scheduling Components of Linked Files ................................................................................................ 941 Working with a Linked Building Model ................................................................................................. 943 Managing Shared Locations .................................................................................................................... 944

Contents | vii

viii | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit Building. You learn how Revit Building works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.

In the lesson that follows, you learn many of the important features in Revit Building that contribute to a user-friendly design environment, enhanced productivity, and faster construction documents. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Building is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to navigate the user interface.

1

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Building is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

What is Autodesk Revit Building?
The Revit Building platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Building model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Building collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Building parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Building provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Building: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Building coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Autodesk Revit Building keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Building immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Building uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Building uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum. This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Building elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Building. Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together. In Revit Building, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Autodesk Revit Building terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Building are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Building, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Building. The first term you need to know is "project." In Revit Building, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design,

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Building makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Another important term to understand is "level". Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

When creating your project, you add Revit Building parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Building classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements. A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model. Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Most families are component family files, which means you can load them into your project and create them from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Other families are called system families. These families, which include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Building predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Understanding the Basics | 3

Autodesk Revit Building terms

Navigating the Revit Building User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Building is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Building window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Building uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Building is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template that the project is based on.

The Menu Bar
3 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You then click the command name to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZX. While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.

There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar
5 On the Modelling menu, click Wall. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

Understanding the Basics | 5

The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 On the Modelling menu, click Door. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar, notice a door type is specified.

The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

8 On the Modelling menu, click Wall.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of walls that are available. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. For example, if you intend to add a door, the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Within the drawing area, you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.

The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu, click Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ ■ ■ ■

Basics tab—includes commands for creating most basic building model components. View tab—commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab—all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab—commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab—commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab—commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab—commands for executing conceptual massing commands Area Analysis tab—commands for making area schemes and plans Structural tab—commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab—includes commands for creating construction industry information

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

Understanding the Basics | 7

The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and groups of your current project. You can right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category (doors, walls, windows), and group name. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. To open a view, double-click the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is also dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

14 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box, click Cancel.

The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 17 Place your cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.

Understanding the Basics | 9

You can select a topic on the Contents tab. You can use this tri-pane. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. When you place the cursor over a component. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. If there is no Help button displayed. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. There are several tools that help you find information. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. You can also press SHIFT+F1. The Status Bar also provides information. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command.In the bottom left corner of the window. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. find a keyword on the Index tab. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. click . Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. It highlights when the cursor is over it." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. 20 Press TAB. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. 18 On the Design Bar. Click the Help button. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. In the Status Bar. In this case. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Building Help window. Autodesk Revit Building Help 21 On the Help menu. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. Windows: From any window. regarding selected components within a view. in conjunction with Tooltips. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. click Autodesk Revit Help. click Modify. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Building session.

including all windows. and fundamental concepts before creating your first building model. all views and schedules instantly update.Creating Your First Building Model 2 This tutorial is designed to familiarize you with the basic concepts and methods of creating a building model using Autodesk Revit Building. and then add the passageway between them. common terms. For training purposes. If you have not already done so. before proceeding further. As you make design changes throughout this tutorial. The building model you create consists of an east wing and a west wing joined by a curtain wall passageway. you create the shell of the west wing . this tutorial uses a diversity of methods whenever possible. the design process might differ in a real-world scenario. This tutorial is designed to teach concepts as well as methods. floors.mirror it to create the east wing. 11 . and a roof . You should understand the user interface. you learn about the Revit Building parametric capabilities and ease of use. Because the design process in Revit Building is extremely flexible. you can normally use various means to accomplish identical tasks. While creating your first building information model. Therefore. Understanding the Concepts. stairs. doors. For learning purposes. review the tutorial.

modify. You then apply the new wall type to the existing walls. expand Elevations. Using the mirror tool. Notice that Level 1 and Level 2 are already defined. click Level. Open m_First_Project. As you design the walls. After sketching the walls. NOTE The dataset for this tutorial was created using the default template. and apply new wall types. expand Views (all). You then add sketched components such as floors. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Minor modifications have been made for training purposes. 12 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and double-click North. you create. You can add and modify levels at any time during the design process. and a roof. you can assign the wall height to a level or a specific value. If you sketch the walls with the top constraint specifying a height. you can. click Open. You then sketch the exterior and interior walls of the west wing. you add and modify doors and windows. Add new levels 1 In the Project Browser. When you create walls. and then add the passageway between them. stairs. After adding dimensions. you sketch the exterior walls of the west wing. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create a new wall type with multiple wall sweeps and reveals. you define the levels first so that you can set the top constraint when you first create the walls. reassign the top constraint to a specific level. Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise.Creating Your First Building Model In this lesson. at a later time.rvt located in the Metric folder. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. you use the west wing to create the east wing. you render the model and document the project by adding schedules and views to sheets. you begin with a project file based on a simple template to which you add several new levels. ceilings. Finally.

■ ■ Enter 4000 mm for Offset. click Modify. ■ ■ 6 Click Level 3 to add Level 4. notice that a floor plan and ceiling plan have been created for Level 3. Verify that Make Plan View is selected 4 Move the cursor over Level 2 and notice the prospective new level displays above it. Creating Your First Building Model | 13 . it toggles to 2D. the level name and height value displays with the color blue. the datum is in model extent mode. This means that changes to the extents are applied only to the active view. When you select Level 4. it changes the extent of that datum in all other parallel views. The left and right extents of the new level are aligned and locked to the levels below. In this view. it terminates the command in progress. provided those datums also have the 3D model extent control. this indicates that you can select and edit the values. 8 Select Level 4. With the 3D designation. If you click the 3D control. notice the following: ■ There is a control titled 3D that displays at the ends of the datum. When you click Modify. You can also use the ESC key to accomplish this.3 On the Options Bar. ■ Select . This means that if you drag the control to resize the datum extent. 5 Click Level 2 to create level 3 at the designated offset above it. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This means that if you move the extents of one level line. This allows you to create a new level by picking an existing line and applying an offset. In the Project Browser. 9 Click directly on the Level 4 text. the extents of the other level lines adopt the same change.

you can take advantage of the parametric capabilities of Revit Building by designing the majority of the west wing. use the wheel on your mouse. notice that the name of the Level 4 floor plan is changed to Roof. double-click Level 1. a west wing. 11 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. West. you could begin the model by simply sketching the exterior walls and then continuing the design process from that point. you create the exterior walls of only the west wing. and a curtain glass passageway connecting the two wings. In this view. there are four elevation symbols. This process reduces the amount of repetitive work and ensures consistency between each wing. 14 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 12 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow. North. and South elevation views. Theoretically. because the east wing is a mirror image of the west wing. right-click in the drawing area and use the zoom tools on the context menu. Sketch the exterior walls 13 This building model consists of an east wing. tool on the toolbar. and then designing the passageway to connect the two. TIP The Level 4 ceiling plan view has also been renamed to Roof. the floor plan would resemble the following illustration. which define the East. You can use the zoom tools located on the View menu. However. or scroll the 10 Enter Roof and press ENTER. In such a case. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. mirroring it to create the east wing.TIP You may need to zoom in to accomplish this.

Creating Your First Building Model | 15 . You can activate the far clip plane in the element properties dialog box of each respective view.Brick on CMU. click the Elevation: West symbol. The drag handles control the left and right clip planes of the elevation view. and South elevation views are inactive. select Basic Wall: Exterior . TIP You can turn off the visibility of the elevation symbols by using the Visibility/Graphics command found on the View menu. A solid line with two drag handles displays on the West elevation symbol. The name of the elevation view is displayed in a tooltip or in the status bar at the bottom of the drawing window. click Wall. NOTE The far clip plane for the East. you use this command to modify the view. Do not click the symbol.15 Move the cursor over the left elevation symbol and then over the elevation arrow. Later in this tutorial. 18 In the Type Selector. West. This means that each view is infinite. 16 In the drawing area. For training purposes. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. do not turn on the far clip planes at this time. Make sure you click the arrow and not the round part of the symbol. North.

make sure you sketch the rectangle just to the right of the west elevation symbol. Because the west wing is later mirrored to the right. Click the arrows a second time to return the exterior face to the outside of the rectangle. specify the following options: ■ ■ Specify Roof for Height. and use the directional arrows on your keyboard to move them into position as shown above. ■ 20 Sketch the rectangle by clicking the upper left corner to specify the rectangle starting point. as shown. Temporary dimensions are primarily sketching aids. TIP From the Settings ➤ Temporary Dimensions menu. 16 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you can control the default witness line location for temporary dimensions and save the settings to the project. 23 Click the arrows once to set the exterior face of the wall on the inside of the rectangle. Move the cursor down and to the right until the rectangle is 12. You can click the temporary dimension value and modify it. 22 Select the left.19 In the Options Bar. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This is a temporary dimension. and flip arrows display on the exterior face of the wall. The selected wall is red. By clicking the arrows. click Modify. you can flip the wall orientation. Select the drawing tool.000 mm long. 24 On the View toolbar. vertical wall of the rectangle. and click to complete the rectangle. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. click .000 mm wide and 24. . Also notice the dimension that displays. TIP If necessary. select the four walls by dragging a selection box around them.

27 Click the temporary dimension value and reset the rectangle width to 12000 mm. you can enter 12000 and press ENTER.25 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right. Creating Your First Building Model | 17 . In addition. TIP When entering a value. Notice that temporary dimensions also display in 3D views. you do not need to type the metric suffix. The blue dots at the base of the wall are drag handles that allow you to modify the length of the wall. You do not need to enter 12000 mm. 26 Drag the wall to the right as shown and release the mouse button when the width of the rectangle is approximately double the original size. For example. you can use these handles to modify the height or depth of the wall. notice the shape handles (arrows) on top and bottom of the wall.

and click Shading with Edges. enter ZF. 32 On the keyboard. 30 On the Design Bar. 33 On the View Control Bar. and click Hidden Line. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. as shown. When a surface pattern becomes too dense. Notice that the brick surface pattern becomes solid fill after you zoom to fit. 29 Draw a region around the corner. Notice the wall remains selected. including the brick surface pattern displays. 31 On the View Control Bar located at the bottom-left corner of the frame. 18 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Modify. click the Model Graphics Style control. it is displayed as solid fill. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Zoom in Region.28 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area and. Notice the material settings. The brick surface pattern displays.

To accomplish this. 35 On the Options Bar. click . The lower half of the dialog box contains the instance parameters. you create a new wall type. and then apply it to the remaining walls. if you wanted to modify the wall structure. which control the selected component or components. For example. you can see the list of type parameters. If you change an instance parameter. If your intent is to modify only the structure of the selected component. it has no effect on components that are not selected. you should click Duplicate to create a new component type. you cannot modify them within this dialog box. if you changed the Top Offset of the wall. only the wall that you selected would change. modify it.Create and apply new wall type 34 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right as shown. You could then make changes to the wall structure as needed. The Element Properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected component. Although you can scroll through the list of type parameters. you would click Edit/New to access the type parameters. In the upper half of the dialog box. which control all components of the same type. Creating Your First Building Model | 19 . For example. In the steps that follow. You can then make changes to the type parameters without inadvertently modifying the components of the original type. you add horizontal sweeps of soldier course brick to the wall structure. However. any changes made to the type parameters would be applied to all components of the same type.

enter 13500 for Sample Height. You can specify the sample height to any value you want. Exterior . click Edit. enter the new wall name. the original wall type must remain unchanged. Therefore.36 In the Element Properties dialog box. under the Value column for Structure. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. and click OK. you must create a new wall type before altering the wall structure. 40 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. The sample height does not determine the height of any walls in the project. 41 In the lower left corner of the Edit Assembly dialog box. 38 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate. but you should specify a value high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. click Edit/New. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. The sample height is the height of the wall in the preview pane. For training purposes. click Preview. 20 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

43 Under Modify Vertical Structure. for View. 45 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box.Notice that the vertical structure tools are inactive. Creating Your First Building Model | 21 . 48 Draw a region around the soldier course. Click inside the Material field. the corresponding layer is highlighted in the preview area. and click OK. make the following modifications: ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 47 Right-click in the preview area and click Zoom in Region from the context menu. under Name. select layer 9. Verify that Base is selected for From. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. This should be the interior finish layer. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. This is because the preview is displaying a plan view. click Sweeps. ■ ■ ■ ■ 46 Click OK. select Section: Modify type attributes. click Add.0 mm for Offset. 49 Under Layers. 44 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. Enter -50. 42 Under the preview pane. Notice the vertical structure tools are now active.Brick Soldier Course. When you select a layer. select Masonry . Make sure the offset is a negative number. In the Materials dialog box.

Make sure it is a negative number. and click OK.Brick Soldier Course for Material. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Verify that the Offset is zero. 22 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Verify that Exterior is selected for Side.Add a second sweep 50 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. Verify that Base is selected for From. 58 Click Add. 57 Click Apply. modify the settings as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. Enter -50 mm for Offset. Verify that Base is selected for From. 51 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. Select Masonry . click Add. 53 Click OK. 55 In the Reveals dialog box. click Sweeps. click Reveals. click Add. Select Flip. 56 Specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. under Modify Vertical Structure. 52 For the second wall sweep. Add reveals 54 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. Enter 8000 mm for Distance.

61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click OK. Verify that the Offset is zero. This can be affected by the view scale for this particular view. Verify that Base is selected for From. Notice some of the line weights in this view are rather heavy. 62 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and draw a zoom region around the corner that includes one of the sweeps and a reveal. Creating Your First Building Model | 23 . click Modify.59 Specify the parameters for the second reveal: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 65 On the View menu. 64 On the Design Bar. click OK. 63 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. 66 On the View toolbar. click . Enter 8000 mm for Distance. 60 Click OK. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. You can also use the thin lines tool to temporarily apply thin lines globally to all views. Select Flip.

24 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. and click Save. When finished. 73 On the File menu. This indicates that thin lines will continue to be applied globally to the project. 72 On the Design Bar. 74 Navigate to your preferred directory. click Save As. click Modify. This turns off thin lines globally.Notice thin lines are applied to all the linework in this view. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. 71 In the Type Selector. the interior walls resemble the following illustration. name the file m_First_Project-in_progress. 68 Enter ZF. TIP To select multiple components. and click Shading with Edges. choose Basic Wall: Exterior . Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing. after the new wall type is applied.Brick on CMU. 67 On the View Control Bar. Notice that. They do not have sweeps or reveals.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you add the interior walls of the west wing. click . the corners of the sweeps and reveals wrap automatically. 70 Select the three walls that are still the original wall type. Exterior . press and hold the CTRL key while you select each component.rvt. Also notice the button remains activated. 69 On the View toolbar. click the Model Graphics Style control.

rvt. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. place the cursor over the north wall.135mm Partition (2-hr). Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. double-click Level 1. 3 In the Type Selector. click Wall. m_First_Project-in_progress. 4 In the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ Verify that Level 2 is selected for Height. Sketch the main corridor 1 In the Project Browser. 5000 mm from the centerline of the west exterior wall. Select the Line sketching tool. Creating Your First Building Model | 25 . and click. select Basic Wall: Interior . under Views (all). 6 Move the cursor down. . ■ 5 Using the following illustration as a guide.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans.

26 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . press and hold CTRL. If you zoom into the model. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. 8 Move the cursor down. click Modify. Draw a crossing pick from the upper-right to the lower-left that crosses both interior walls.7 Move the cursor over the north exterior wall and 2500 mm to the right of the wall you added in the previous step. TIP The temporary dimension snap values are dependent on your zoom settings. the snap values decrease. ■ Draw a pick box from the upper-left to lower-right that includes both interior walls in their entirety. Click to specify the wall start point. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 Select both interior walls using one of the following three methods: ■ ■ Select one of the interior walls. and select the second interior wall.

Notice that temporary dimensions do not display automatically when multiple components are selected. This allows you to analyze their location in relationship to each other and modify the location of both walls at the same time. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add remaining interior walls 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.79mm Partition (1-hr). click the Graphics tab. On the Settings menu. 16 Add four horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the left exterior wall to the centerline of the left wall of the corridor. and enter 4750 mm. and under Colors. select Basic Wall: Interior . they display as red. TIP You can change the selection color by modifying the system settings. click Activate Dimensions. This places both interior walls 4750 mm from the centerline of the closest exterior wall. click a temporary dimension value. Creating Your First Building Model | 27 . click Wall. 15 In the Type Selector. Each wall should be 4800 mm from the previous wall. specify the selection color. as shown. The temporary dimensions are displayed for both walls.After the walls are selected. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Options.

Use the dimensions shown in the following illustration when adding the walls. as shown. modify temporary dimension values to obtain exact placement. Dimension lines have been added for training purposes. The dimension lines have been provided for training purposes. 18 Add the final four interior walls in each corner of the right side of the building model. If necessary. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .17 Add five horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the right wall of the corridor to the centerline of the right exterior wall.

24 Click to split the wall. click . there is no immediate and obvious indication of the split location. As you move the cursor over the wall. 23 In the drawing area. notice the exact placement of the cursor and the location of the proposed wall split. you can activate it by opening the Windows menu and clicking Toolbar  ➤ Tools. a thin line appears at the tip of the cursor. This places the view in thin lines mode. click the tool a second time to turn thin lines mode off. TIP If the lines within the floor plan display too thick. 21 Sketch a zoom region around the upper-right quadrant of the building model. The cursor displays as a cutting tool. you can click on the View toolbar. place the cursor over the intersection of the right wall of the corridor and the short horizontal wall that intersects it as shown. This is the shortcut key for Zoom in Region. 20 Enter ZR. NOTE If the Tools toolbar is not available. In the above illustration and callout. click Modify.Use split tool to modify walls 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This line represents where the underlying object is to be split. When you are finished splitting the walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 29 . 22 On the Tools toolbar. After splitting the wall. and you can now split walls and lines.

This is the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit.26 Select the short wall segment that you split from the right wall of the corridor. split the right corridor wall. click . 30 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Modify. 30 Enter ZF. zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model. 28 Using the same techniques learned in previous steps. and delete the segment. 27 On the Standard toolbar. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

NOTE Arrows have been added at the location of the two splits. 35 On the View toolbar. select Delete Inner Segment. 37 Press and hold SHIFT and spin the building model by dragging one of the corners in any direction. click 36 On the View toolbar. Zoom in as necessary. split the right wall of the corridor at the intersection of the two center horizontal interior walls. This tool allow you to spin the model in any direction. 33 Using the following illustration as a guide. 32 On the Options Bar. 34 Press ESC to end the Split command. . Creating Your First Building Model | 31 . click . click . After the second split. Notice the interior walls that you added and split. 31 On the Tools toolbar. the inner segment is deleted automatically.There are two remaining splits to make.

Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. If the geometry referenced by a permanent dimension is not selected for modification. This is the aligned dimension option. 5 On the Options Bar. select Linear Dimension Style: Diagonal . ■ ■ For Prefer. Permanent dimensions can appear in two different states: modifiable and non-modifiable. the dimension value displays in blue and can be modified directly by clicking the value. specify the following dimension parameters: ■ Click . and click OK. click Save. both permanent dimensions and temporary dimensions display. Level 1 .rvt. enter Level 1 . the dimension value is displayed at its true size and is not selectable for modification. click Rename. select Wall centerlines. Dimensioning the Building Model. For Pick. The floor plan. right-click Level 1. you add dimension lines to the building model. The dimension styles available in the Type Selector are dependent on the type of dimension selected on the Options Bar. When you duplicate a view. you constrain the building model using equality and locking constraints. In the final section of this exercise. A permanent dimension is considered modifiable when one or more of the components that it references is selected for modification. 2 In the Project Browser. Add a dimension line between two walls 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ready for modification. m_First_Project-in_progress. select Individual References. and click Duplicate. Dimensioning the Building Model In this exercise. 6 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. click Dimension. you add a multi-segmented dimension string to modify the witness lines.Dimensioned and Annotated. under Views (all). When geometry is selected for modification. You create a dimension by selecting the dimension type. and components that require dimensioning. In that case. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. it opens automatically in the Project Browser. Create and rename copy of Level 1 1 In the Project Browser.38 On the File menu. should be open.5mm Arial. under Floor Plans. Next. right-click Copy of Level 1. options. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and in the context menu. 3 In the Rename View dialog box.2. You begin by adding a simple dimension between two walls.Dimensioned and Annotated.

Click in the empty space of the drawing area to place the dimension line. 9 Move the cursor just above the north wall. When a dashed line is displayed on the wall centerline. click Modify. When a dashed line displays on the wall centerline. move the cursor over the left exterior wall as shown. click to select it. click to select it. Creating Your First Building Model | 33 .7 In the drawing area. 10 On the Design Bar. 8 Move the cursor over the right exterior wall as shown.

This is one of the ways in which a permanent dimension differs from a temporary dimension. change it to 4750. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice the dimension value turns blue. In its current state. and press ENTER. indicating that the control moves the witness line. 13 Place the cursor over the blue control in the center of the left witness line. 14 Click the control once and the witness line moves to the interior face of the wall. These controls allow you to modify and constrain the dimension. 16 Click the permanent dimension value. and draw a zoom region around the north exterior wall and dimension line. change it to 15000. Notice that the dimension line and value displays as red. Notice that the dimension value is not blue. and press ENTER. or in the status bar of the drawing window. 12 Select the dimension line.11 Enter the keyboard shortcut ZR for Zoom In Region. 17 Click the temporary dimension value. the dimension value displays as modifiable. the value is not available for modification. Click the control a second time and the witness line moves to the exterior face. Notice that a temporary dimension also displays. This means you can modify the value by clicking it. 15 Select the vertical exterior wall on the left. This behavior is similar to the witness line control on temporary dimensions. Information is displayed in a tooltip. Controls display on the value. When you select a component referenced by a dimension witness line. Notice the selected wall moved to the left. and a blue padlock displays. Click it a third time to return the witness line to the wall centerline. The control at the bottom of each witness line controls the gap between the end of the witness line and the component it references. on each witness line.

22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Prefer.18 Place the cursor over the dimension symbol located beneath the temporary dimension value. Click Options. and click OK. vertical. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Pick. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click the symbol to make the temporary dimension permanent. Add a multi-segmented dimension 20 Using one of the zoom methods learned previously. select Entire Walls. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. 23 Select the left. select Wall centerlines. and click to place the dimension as shown. move the cursor to the left. click Dimension. zoom out until you can see the entire building model. exterior wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 35 . select Intersecting Walls. click Modify.

click Modify. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 26 Using the following illustration as a guide.24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Delete Witness Line. NOTE Make sure you right-click the blue control and not the dimension line. right-click the blue control on the witness line second from the top. Modify witness lines 25 Select the multi-segmented dimension you added in the previous steps.

WARNING Do not right-click a witness line. click Edit Witness Lines. 28 Select the centerline of the interior wall where you previously deleted the witness line. Creating Your First Building Model | 37 . it provides a different set of options on the context menu. and in the context menu.27 Right-click the dimension line.

NOTE There are two alternative ways of ending the dimension edit process: You can click Modify on the Design Bar. Create constraints 30 Select the second interior wall from the top to the left of the corridor.29 After selecting the wall. or press ESC on the keyboard. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click in the empty space of the drawing area to complete the editing process.

Creating Your First Building Model | 39 . 31 Drag the wall downward until the distance between it and the wall below it is approximately 2400 mm.Notice that the dimension values become modifiable on each side of the witness line that refers to the selected wall.

34 Select the same wall you moved previously and drag it upward approximately 1200 mm as shown. The relationship between these components is constrained. Notice that the dimension value for the locked segment remains unchanged as you move the wall. You can turn the lock on and off by clicking the lock symbol. Notice a lock displays for each segment. 36 Click the lock symbol on the 2400 mm segment to remove the constraint between the two walls. if you move one component. 35 Select the multi-segmented dimension. the other moves with it and maintains the locked dimension value. 33 Click the lock on the 2400 mm segment of the dimension.32 Select the multi-segmented dimension line. Lock symbols offer the opportunity to constrain the building model by locking a dimension value or an alignment. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This dimension does not need to be precise.

you use the Paste Aligned tool to copy the Level 1 windows to Levels 2 and 3. under Other. under Floor Plans. Next. This is an equality constraint that makes all dimension segments equal. In the final section of the exercise. under Views (all). Creating Your First Building Model | 41 . 41 On the File menu. you load multiple new door types and add them to the building model. select Value for Equality Display. select Save. You then add windows and use the mirror and array tools to save time and ensure consistency. Adding Doors and Windows In this exercise. You begin by adding single flush doors. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that each segment is now equally spaced and the dimension values display EQ. 40 In the Project Browser. you add doors and windows to the building model. 37 Click the equality constraint to activate it. and click OK. click . 38 On the Options Bar. Notice that each segment displays an equal value. double-click Level 1. Adding Doors and Windows. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box.Notice an EQ symbol displays with a slash through it.

click Door. the initial opening is based on the wall face from which the cursor approaches. Add single flush doors to the building model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. A door symbol displays when the cursor is over the wall.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . In addition. When you add a door. m_First_Project-in_progress. the door resides on a level line. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. You can offset the door from the level. you can flip the door opening immediately after placing it. This is the mechanical room.rvt. 3 In the north side of the building model. doors snap automatically to the closest available level. This is most evident when you add a door in an elevation or 3D view. Doors are wall-hosted families and can only be added to a wall. place the cursor over the right corridor for the room shown in the following illustration. 4 Approach the same corridor wall from inside the room. however. Regardless of the initial placement. Do not click at this time.

Do not be concerned with exact placement. Notice the blue controls that display. and press ENTER. The precise dimensions are not important.5 Press the Spacebar once to flip the door hand. When you are finished. 7 Click each control to familiarize yourself with how the door controls work. and modify temporary dimensions as shown. You can use this to flip from left to right hand opening. use the flip controls to adjust the opening. These control the door opening direction and the hand of the door (left or right). 6 Click to add the door with the opening inside the room. Creating Your First Building Model | 43 . 8 Click the temporary dimension value between the door centerline and the lower horizontal wall. specify a value of 600 mm. 9 Add an additional door of the same type to the small room above door number 1 as shown. After you add door number 2. Press the Spacebar a second time. return the door to the position shown in the following illustration.

All Revit Building families have an . Notice that a preview image of the selected door displays in the upper right corner of the dialog box. 15 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. as shown. and select M_Double-Flush. click Training Files.rfa extension. click Load. Load and apply new door types 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rfa.rfa. 16 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Doors folder. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and set the temporary dimensions. to zoom to fit. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. ZF. Flip the door. click Door. 17 Press and hold CTRL.10 Zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model and add a door of the same type to the room as shown. 11 On the Design Bar. and select M_Double-Glass 2. 12 Enter the keyboard shortcut.

When more than one family is selected. 21 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. TIP Zoom in and out as necessary. The distance between the door centerline and nearest wall centerline should be 600mm. add a door to each of the five rooms to the left of the corridor.You can load multiple families at the same time. 18 Press and hold CTRL. 19 Click Open to load all three door families into the project.rfa. These door families are now available in the Type Selector drop-down list. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm. as shown. and select M_Single-Flush Vision. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0864 x 2032mm. 22 In the Type Selector. Creating Your First Building Model | 45 . a preview image does not display. 20 In the Type Selector. Each door should open into the room.

This is door number 14 in the following illustration. 24 Zoom in around the lower-right corner of the building model and add doors 11 and 12 as shown. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select M_Double-Flush: 1730 x 2134mm. 25 Add the final M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm door in the center of the building model and to the right of the corridor as shown. 26 In the Type Selector. The arrow has been added for training purposes. This is door number 13 in the following illustration. 27 Add a door to the right exterior wall opposite of door number 1.23 Zoom in around the upper-right corner of the building model and add doors 9 and 10 as shown.

select Visibility/Graphics. 32 Expand the Walls category. Creating Your First Building Model | 47 . If your view displays solid fill. Although there is no technical reason you cannot add a door in this view. and scroll down to Walls. NOTE The display of a surface pattern is zoom dependent. 31 Click the Model Categories tab. Notice that the brick surface pattern displays as you zoom into this view. under Views (all).Add a door in elevation view 28 In the Project Browser. it would be easier if the visibility of the wall surface pattern was turned off. zoom in until the brick pattern displays. and clear Surface Pattern. double-click North. 29 Zoom around the building model and level heads. under Elevations. 30 On the View menu.

Notice that the double doors on the north wall display without a tag. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. then Level 2. and down to Level 1. the wall surface pattern will remain visible in all other views. under Floor Plans. it has two basic requirements: it must be hosted by a wall and it must be associated with a level. NOTE The temporary dimensions refer to interior walls. Tag a door in plan view 38 In the Project Browser. select M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm.33 Click OK. double-click Level 1. 37 Add a double-glass door centered on Level 1. You can apply an offset if required. click Door. When adding a door. 35 In the Type Selector. In this case. Notice the door snaps to each level. as shown. 36 Move the cursor over the wall at Level 3. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Changes to Visibility/Graphics are applied only to the open view.

verify that M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm is selected. click Door. 45 Add the final door centered on the lower exterior wall. 41 On the upper exterior wall. This should be door number 15. 43 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. TIP For each component type. a tag did not display when you added the door in the North elevation view. Creating Your First Building Model | 49 .Components are tagged in the view in which they are placed. click the double doors to add a tag. 44 In the Type Selector. NOTE Because the default door tag was not designed to display in an elevation view. the Type Selector and Options Bar remember the last settings used for that component. clear Leader. as shown. 39 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 42 Zoom in to the lower exterior wall. click Tag.

47 On the View toolbar. the window displays at the cursor. 50 On the File menu. 52 Zoom in on the upper exterior wall. and notice the doors you added. click Modify. double-click Level 1. The window exterior is placed on the wall face closest to the cursor. Windows are wall-hosted components. click Window. . select M_Andersen 400 C35: C35. click Save. click 48 On the View toolbar. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click . just like doors. 54 In the Type Selector. you can flip the window after placement. under Floor Plans. 53 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. As you move the cursor over a wall.46 On the Design Bar. Like doors. Add windows to the building model 51 In the Project Browser. 49 Spin the model.

63 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 55 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the left side of the upper exterior wall. 66 Add two C35 windows to the right of the exterior double door. click Modify. click . IMPORTANT  If necessary. elevation.You can add windows in plan. the designer creates the instance and type parameters that control geometry. For more information on creating and loading annotation tags. 60 Make sure the distance between the window centerline and the left wall centerline is 1400 mm. 59 Zoom around the window. as shown. and select it. You can load and assign tags that display the specific information you need in the format you prefer. The designer can also create a window with few modifiable parameters. click to place it as shown. 56 When the window displays at the tip of the cursor. If you want to modify a window in a specific way but an instance or type parameter is not available to accomplish the task. When you add a window in a plan view. 58 On the View toolbar. There should be a 1950 mm distance between the centerlines of the two windows. 57 On the Design Bar. In the family editor. click the temporary dimension value and specify the correct distance. click Window. go to Help. click . 62 In the Element Properties dialog box. the window is using a type tag that displays the window type number rather than the window mark. 64 Add a window to the right of the existing window as shown. modify it. and 3D views. Notice the list of instance parameters available for modification. 65 Zoom out so you can see the right side of the upper exterior wall. In this project. click Cancel. you can edit the family in place or open the window in the family editor. Creating Your First Building Model | 51 . materials. The list of parameters can vary depending on the window family design. and reload it into the project. 61 On the Options Bar. the default head or sill height is used to set the initial height of the window. and visibility.

73 When the triangular midpoint symbol displays on the exterior face of the wall.67 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. indicating that the midpoint of that component is ready to be selected. In this case. click to select it. click Mirror. 72 Place the cursor over the middle of the exterior face of the right exterior wall. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . A tooltip is displayed. 69 Select one of the windows on the upper exterior wall. and select the three remaining windows. When you mirror a component or components. 71 On the Options Bar. and make sure Copy is selected. the selected windows are to be mirrored across a horizontal axis residing on the midpoint of the east exterior wall. click Modify. 70 On the Edit menu. Mirror the windows 68 Zoom out until the building model fits within the view. 74 Move the cursor to the left. The copy option is selected by default. you can pick or draw the mirror axis. click . and click to set the mirror axis. You also have the option to mirror a copy rather than the selected component(s). press and hold CTRL.

click Window. at the dimensions shown. 76 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 53 . Notice that the mirrored windows are not tagged.The windows are mirrored immediately after you specify the mirror axis. You tag the windows later in the exercise. Add and array windows 75 Zoom in to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 77 Add two windows to the left exterior wall.

You first click a point to specify the array start point. 80 Select the two windows that you just added on the left exterior wall. 83 Move the cursor over the intersection of the left exterior wall and the intersecting interior wall shown below. Enter 5 for Number. Rather than manually add the rest of the windows on the left exterior wall. Because all of the rooms on this side of the building model are equally spaced. 82 On the Options Bar. For Move To. and click to set the array end point. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that is selected for a linear array. Select Constrain. Creating an array is a three-step process. 79 Zoom out in the upper left corner so you can see the two rooms with doors 4 and 5. Clear Group And Associate. click Array. 81 On the Edit menu. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you can use the array tool to finish the job. it is an ideal situation to use an array. select 2nd. click Modify. You then move the array to the second or last location. and click to set the array start point.78 On the Design Bar.

86 On the bottom-right side of the building model. any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array continues down the wall. Notice the arrayed windows are not tagged. NOTE It is extremely important to make sure the new array is centered between the walls of the next room. If you make a mistake placing the array. and click the similar intersection shown below to set the array end point. as shown.84 Move the cursor down until the arrayed window group is centered in the room below the starting point. Because the rooms on the left side of the building model are of equal size. undo the step and try again. add the final window to the right exterior wall and centered in the second room from the bottom. Creating Your First Building Model | 55 . click Window. Add remaining level 1 window 85 On the Design Bar.

Paste align windows to Levels 2 and 3 91 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. drag a selection box around the entire building model. turn it off by clicking 88 On the View toolbar. . 90 Spin the model. and notice the windows you added. click 89 On the View toolbar. you can use the paste-align tool to accomplish the same goal significantly faster. 92 In the 3D Drawing area.87 If you are still using Thin Lines mode. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . on the View toolbar. Rather than use the same methods to add similar windows to levels 2 and 3. click . click Modify.

notice the wall surface pattern displays. click Window. under Elevations. clear Tag on Placement. 95 On the Edit menu. click Copy to Clipboard. Don’t be concerned with precise placement or spacing between the windows and doors. 94 In the Filter dialog box. press and hold CTRL. 101 On the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 57 . under Elevations. double-click South. click Window. 93 On the Options Bar. 102 Add a C35 window in the center of Level 2 and Level 3 as shown below. 103 In the Project Browser. 97 In the Select Levels dialog box. 105 Add C35 windows to the center of Levels 2 and 3 as you did in the previous steps. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. The spacing will be modified in a later dataset. This leaves only the windows selected within the 3D view. such as equality constraints. In this view. This is because the changes you made to the Visibility/Graphics of the North elevation view were applied only to that view. select Level 2. clear walls and doors from the selection. click Modify. 96 On the Edit menu. click . and click OK. 104 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 99 In the Project Browser. 100 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.This selects every component in the building model. double-click North. notice that windows need to be added above the double doors on the north and south walls. After the windows are added to Level 2 and Level 3. the window snaps to the default sill height which displays as a green dashed line. 98 On the Design Bar. Notice that when you add a window in elevation view. The spacing can be manipulated using some of the dimensioning tools you learned earlier. select Level 3.

In this exercise. Floors. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Like walls. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you can select walls to define the border of the component. You add a more complex floor type to levels 2 and 3. you add floors and floor openings to the building model. under Floor Plans. and ceilings are examples of sketched components. the respective layers interact according to the functional assignment within the Edit Assembly dialog box. click 2 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 107 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. you begin by adding a floor slab Level 1. 109 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box.106 In the Project Browser. Add a floor slab to Level 1 1 On the View toolbar. click Save. and all require their borders to be sketched. or ceiling. where three openings are required for the stairs and elevators. You can also select or draw lines. 111 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Floors and Floor Openings. select Window Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. m_First_Project-in_progress. click . Notice that all the windows in the view are tagged. 3 Spin the model and observe that floors are needed throughout the building model. roof. When sketching these components. 110 On the File menu. roofs. 108 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. . Adding Floors and Floor Openings In this exercise.rvt. When walls intersect a floor. each of these components can have a compound structure. double-click Level 1. You also add elevators and plumbing components to the building model.

7 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. You can click the flip arrows to move the floor boundary to either the interior or exterior face of a wall. verify that Pick Walls is selected.4 In the Project Browser. you must either finish or quit in order to access other design modes. click Finish Sketch. 6 On the Design Bar. 9 If the magenta line is not on the exterior face of the north exterior wall. 12 Select Concrete . A magenta line displays with flip arrows. click Floor Properties. and click OK. 14 On the View toolbar. You are in sketch mode. Notice the floor on Level 1 that extends to the exterior face of the walls. When in sketch mode. In addition.300mm for Type. The Design Bar now has only one tab. the building model becomes unavailable for modification until you finish the floor sketch. click the flip arrows to flip the line. 11 On the Design Bar. click Floor. clear Extend into wall (to core). Sketch. 8 Click the upper exterior wall. double-click Level 1. 10 Select the three remaining exterior walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 59 . 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click .

press TAB. double-click Level 2. the interior walls on Level 1 display as an underlay. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the location of the magenta line. 19 Zoom in to the upper exterior wall. 17 On the Options Bar. 18 Place the cursor over the upper exterior wall and. When the chain of walls highlights. The windows are not tagged because you did not add them within this view. click Floor. 60 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click to select it. In this view. when it highlights under the cursor.Add a floor to Level 2 15 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. You can use TAB to select a chain of walls or lines at any time.

click 28 On the View toolbar. 27 On the View toolbar. you add elevators and plumbing components on Level 1. . click Floor Properties. 31 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the elevator into position. under Floor Plans. 25 Click Yes to attach the wall tops to the floor. Attaching the walls ensures that if you change the floor elevation. A message displays asking if you want the walls that go up to this floor to attach to it. and click OK. click . 22 On the Design Bar. This occurs because the structural layers of the floor must cut through the interior finish layer of the wall in order to extend to the wall core. Creating Your First Building Model | 61 . 33 Add two elevators in the center room on the right side of the building model. as shown. the walls remain attached. and click to place it. click Component. After you add these components. select M_Elevator Center: 2032mm x 1295mm. indicating that they are not attached to the floor. 24 Click Finish Sketch. The interior walls of the building model are displayed in red. 21 Use the flip arrows to place the magenta line on the exterior face of the core. Add elevators and bathroom components 30 In the Project Browser. A message displays asking if you want to join geometry and cut the overlapping volume out of the walls. 29 Spin the model and observe the new floor on Level 2. These elevators are wall-hosted components. The line chain flips to each face of the core rather than the interior and exterior wall face.20 Click the flip arrows. To do this. position the cursor on the wall. 23 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. 32 In the Type Selector. you paste-align the level 1 interior walls and components to level 2 before adding the level 3 floor. Next. double-click Level 1. 26 Click Yes to join geometry and cut out the overlapping volume.

as shown. 37 In the Type Selector.TIP After adding the elevators. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 35 Zoom in to the upper right corner of the building model. select each one. select M_Pedestal Sink-3D: Pedestal Sink. and specify the dimension 1150 mm as shown above. 36 On the Design Bar. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. click Modify. 38 Add the sink to the center of the room. toggle the temporary dimension witness line to the interior face of the adjacent wall.

establish the direction of the rotation. Listening dimensions react to cursor movements and keyboard entries. Creating Your First Building Model | 63 . an angular value displays that responds to keyboard entries. 43 Move the cursor 90 degrees to the left and click to set the rotation end point. enter 90 on the keyboard and press Enter.39 On the Design Bar. In this case. The component will rotate to the value. 40 Select the sink. 41 On the Edit menu. 42 Place the cursor directly above the sink and click to set the rotation start point as shown. click Modify. when you sketch a wall. when rotating the component. the second click specifies the rotation end point. click Rotate. Rotating an object requires two clicks. you can use the listening dimension to accurately rotate the component. The first click specifies the rotation start point. TIP Although you can manually rotate the component. For example. you can type the wall length and press Enter rather than setting the wall end point. When rotating.

click Component. 45 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .44 Drag the sink until it snaps to the center of the left wall face. 46 In the Type Selector. select M_Toilet-Commercial-Wall-3D: 480mm Seat Height. 48 Use the same procedure to add a toilet and sink in the similar room at the lower right corner of the building model. 47 Add the toilet on the right wall. as shown.

and components. 55 On the Edit menu. clear Door Tags. the interior walls. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. elevators. Creating Your First Building Model | 65 . doors. (Do not include the exterior walls in the selection. and click OK. and click Zoom To Fit. doors. Depending on the exact placement of the windows you added in the north and south elevation views. In addition.Before adding the final floor. and plumbing fixtures can be paste aligned to Levels 2 and 3. click Modify. 54 On the Edit menu. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. a message might be displayed stating that the new walls conflict with an existing insert. right-click. 56 Select Level 2.) This captures all the internal walls. click . you must add the openings for the stairwells and the elevators. Paste align interior walls 49 In an empty space within the drawing area. 51 Draw a crossing pick box beginning inside the upper-right corner of the building model and extending to the inside of the lower-left corner. 53 In the Filter dialog box. 52 On the Options Bar.

61 On the View toolbar. Therefore. If you know the source of the problem. If you received this error. under Floor Plans. The message disappears once you click in the drawing area. 58 If you received the conflict message. 60 Check the lower exterior wall for the same problem and correct it. click 62 On the View toolbar.These conflict warnings alert you to problems in your layout. When you add a model opening. Ignore the warning and proceed with the next step. it is often a good idea to create a view that makes the selection process more precise. you add floor openings to accommodate the elevators and stairs. you can click the controls on the side of the dialog box. you can continue working and the warning dialog box closes automatically. You can drag the window or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the window to a location that does not conflict with the interior wall. roof. . For more information regarding the warning. zoom in to the upper exterior wall and notice that the center window conflicts with the left wall of the corridor. or ceiling in which you want the opening. 63 Spin the model so you can see the interior walls and components on level 2. double-click Level 2. 57 In the Project Browser. if necessary. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you are prompted to select the floor. 59 Correct the problem by moving the window away from the corridor wall. In the steps that follow. click . it is most likely because the center window intersects the corridor wall on Levels 2 and 3.

67 Place the cursor over the upper right corner of the building model. 69 Click the flip arrows to change the direction of the view towards the interior. 65 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. 68 Click the section line. click Section. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the building model and set the depth just past the bathroom wall. 66 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 67 . move the cursor down and click just below the south exterior wall. The first click specifies the section head. and the second click specifies the section tail. and click Zoom To Fit.Create a section view 64 In the Project Browser. After you add the section. you can flip the view direction and modify the extents of the view. double-click Level 1. as shown. 70 Using the shape handles. under Floor Plans. click to set the start point. Adding a section is a two-click process.

This view offers easy accessibility to all floors as well as the stairwells on the left and right. 72 Double-click the section head. floor. click Modify. and click OK. 74 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. or ceiling and cut vertically. just as the level heads do in an elevation view. select Pick a roof. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . The section head is displayed in blue. the referenced view opens.71 On the Design Bar. Similarly. select it. click Opening. 75 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. the section heads are linked directly to the view so when you double-click the section head. when it highlights. Create a floor opening 73 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

select Floor Plan: Level 2. select the rectangle drawing tool. these constraints ensure that the opening adapts to any changes in the associated walls. 78 On the Design Bar. 81 Click each of the four padlocks to lock them. When locked. 77 Zoom around the stairwell in the lower right corner. the Go to View dialog box displays and offers you a selection of views to choose from.Because you must be in a view parallel to the screen in order to edit a sketch. 79 On the Options Bar. 76 In the Go to View dialog box. 80 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell as shown below. Notice the locking constraints that display. Creating Your First Building Model | 69 . click Lines. and click Open View. In the following illustration. the sketch lines have been enhanced for training purposes.

floor. 92 Click Finish Sketch. or ceiling and cut vertically. it is often easier to add the stairs first and then modify the opening precisely to the location of the stairs. double-click Section 1. 87 In the Go to View dialog box. Add a second opening 84 On the Design Bar. click Lines. select Floor Plan: Level 2. select the rectangle drawing tool. and click OK. 85 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. select Pick a roof. 86 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and when it highlights. under Sections (Building Section). click Finish Sketch. 89 On the Design Bar. The modification of the opening is done for you in a dataset used later in this tutorial. click Opening. 90 On the Options Bar. 91 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell and lock the lines as shown. select it.NOTE Although the opening could account for the stair landings at this point. 83 In the Project Browser. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 82 On the Design Bar. 88 Zoom to the stairwell in the upper right corner. and click Open View.

102 Click Finish Sketch. 96 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. click 104 On the View toolbar. You have completed the three openings required for this level. select Floor Plan: Level 2. double-click Section 1.Add an opening for the elevators 93 In the Project Browser. click . 103 On the View toolbar. you paste align these openings rather than sketch them again. and click OK. click Lines. 97 In the Go to View dialog box. 94 On the Design Bar. After adding a floor to Level 3. select the rectangle drawing tool. select Pick a roof. under Sections (Building Section). and click Open View. 98 Zoom in to the elevators. Creating Your First Building Model | 71 . 100 On the Options Bar. 99 On the Design Bar. select it. floor. click Opening. 105 Spin the model so that you can see the vertical penetrations on level 2. 101 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the elevator shaft and lock the lines as shown. . when it highlights. or ceiling and cut vertically. 95 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box.

113 Click Yes to join geometry and cut volume. 110 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls and. 112 Click Yes to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor. click Copy to Clipboard. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 3. and. 108 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. when the chain of walls highlights. under Views (all). 111 On the Design Bar. 109 On the Options Bar. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 119 On the Edit menu. click Finish Sketch. click to select it. press TAB. 117 In the Filter dialog box. Make sure you do not select Floors. 120 Select Level 3 and click OK. click Floor. clear everything except Floors (Floor opening cut). double-click Section 1. 107 Right-click. click . when the wall highlights under the cursor.Add a floor to Level 3 106 In the Project Browser. 116 On the Options Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). The floor type you assigned to Level 2 is used for Level 3. 118 On the Edit menu. Copy floor openings to Level 3 114 In the Project Browser. and click Zoom To Fit. and click OK. 115 Draw a pick box around Level 2 so that you capture the three openings you created previously. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

and click Zoom To Fit. Paste-align components to Level 3 122 In the Project Browser. The only remaining task in this exercise is to paste-align the Level 2 interior walls. Do not include the exterior walls. 123 Right-click. 125 Draw a crossing pick box beginning just inside the upper right corner and extending to the lower left corner. double-click Level 2. 124 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.121 On the View toolbar. click . and components to Level 3. under Views (all). The vertical penetrations extend through Levels 2 and 3. doors. click Modify. under Floor Plans. Creating Your First Building Model | 73 .

clear Floors and Floors (Floor opening cut). Reposition one or both of the windows that may be intersecting the corridor wall. you add a gable roof and ceiling to the west wing of the building model.TIP If you miss a component. 126 On the Options Bar. Adding a Roof and Ceiling In this exercise. 131 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click . NOTE If you receive a warning that a conflict exists with an insert. 128 On the Edit menu. hold the CTRL key down and select it. this removes it from the selection set. hold the SHIFT key down and select the component. click Copy to Clipboard. 127 In the Filter dialog box. click OK and go to the Level 3 floor plan. 133 Proceed to the next exercise. If you accidently select a component that does not belong in the selection set. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. Adding a Roof and Ceiling. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 129 On the Edit menu. 130 Select Level 3 and click OK. click Save. click . 132 On the File menu.

Creating a footprint roof is very similar to creating a floor. Creating Your First Building Model | 75 . 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the left exterior wall so that the sketch line is left of the wall. Both are sketched components and require you to define the border of the component. m_First_Project-in_progress.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 6 Select the right exterior wall so that the sketch line is right of the wall. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. clear Defines slope. select Defines slope. Verify that Extend to wall core is clear. under Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. If the sketch lines are on the interior side of the exterior walls. 8 Select the upper exterior wall and the lower exterior wall. click the flip arrows to move the lines outside of the exterior walls. double-click Roof. 4 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. Add a gable roof to the building model 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Design Bar.

click Roof Properties. 76 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select Warm Roof . 14 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 12 On the View toolbar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click 13 On the View toolbar. 15 Move the cursor over the gable end wall until it is preselected. 11 On the Design Bar.Timber for Type. Notice the exterior walls are not connected to the roof. click . 16 Press TAB to preselect the chain of exterior walls. and click OK.9 On the Design Bar. . click Finish Roof.

The exterior wall chain displays as solid red. 21 On the Design Bar. Notice the drag handle on the roof ridge. Modify the roof 22 Select the roof. for Top/Base. 20 Select the roof. 23 Drag the roof ridge control upward to a point where the pitch is approximately doubled. The exterior walls attach to the roof. Creating Your First Building Model | 77 . 19 On the Options Bar.17 Click to select the entire chain of exterior walls. select Attach. for Attach Wall. click Modify. 18 On the Options Bar. select Top.

24 Release the drag handle at the new position. There are two methods to create a ceiling: ■ Using Auto Ceiling. the ceiling is normally outside the view range and is not visible after you add it. 25 On the Design Bar. This returns the roof to its original position. you will use the auto ceiling method. 26 On the Edit menu. click inside the room to add a ceiling as shown. under Ceiling Plans. Notice the exterior walls adjust to the new roof pitch. under Views (all). you can sketch the perimeter of a ceiling using the same pick and draw techniques learned when you added the floors and roof. Add a ceiling to Level 3 27 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 3. 29 In the Type Selector. 28 On the Modeling tab of the Design Bar. 30 In the upper-left corner of the building model. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 600mm grid. click Undo Move. Using the sketch method. and then click inside highlighted rooms to add a ceiling. TIP Although you can add a ceiling in a floor plan view. you select a ceiling type from the Type Selector. click Modify. ■ In this case. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Ceiling.

31 Add a ceiling of the same type in the remaining rooms on the left side of the corridor and in both bathrooms. Creating Your First Building Model | 79 . 32 In the Type Selector. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 1200mm grid. as shown. 33 Click within the main corridor and each stairwell to add a ceiling in each.

and from the context menu. you modify the original stairwell to be a multistory stair and mirror a copy to the other stairwell. click Save. 36 On the Design Bar.34 In the Type Selector. enter 3900 mm for Height Offset From Level. Adding Multi-Level Stairs. click the Model Graphics Style control. Rather than repetitively creating the same stairs on each level and in each stairwell. 37 In the drawing area. 38 On the View Control Bar. double-click the section head. under Constraints. you begin by creating a set of stairs from Level 1 to Level 2. 35 Add a ceiling to the three remaining rooms on the right side of the corridor. click Properties. 80 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 39 Right-click the ceiling over the elevator shaft on Level 3. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. 41 On the File menu. Adding Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. click Modify. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. and select Shading with Edges. select Compound Ceiling: Plain.

you create a set of U-shaped stairs similar to those in the following illustration.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you first add temporary model lines that provide an underlay to trace over. click Lines. 4 In the Type Selector. m_First_Project-in_progress. In order to sketch the stairs accurately. 5 Add the three lines as shown. In the steps that follow. select Wide Lines. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell in the lower right corner of the building model. the permanent dimension lines have been added as a training aid and the section line has been hidden temporarily.rvt. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. Creating Your First Building Model | 81 . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add stairs between Level 1 and 2 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). and use the temporary dimensions to specify the values shown in the following image. In the image below.

The dimensions have been predetermined. for example: 550 mm. not to the centerline. you sketch the stair run and trace the run over the two vertical lines. 7 Sketch the first half of the run by clicking on the bottom endpoint of the right vertical line. Click on the temporary dimension witness line control until it moves to the interior face of the wall. and then specify the value. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . In the steps that follow. 8 Sketch the second half of the run by clicking on the top endpoint of the left vertical line. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You are in sketch mode. and then clicking the bottom endpoint of the same line.NOTE It is important to dimension the lines to the interior face of the walls. the Run tool is active. and then clicking the top endpoint of the same line. By default. click Stairs.

The stair run is complete. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. select 900mm Pipe. click Railings Type. 10 In the Railings Type dialog box. Specify railing type 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Creating Your First Building Model | 83 .

This makes the model lines more apparent. 13 On the View Control Bar. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click the Hide/Isolate control. and select Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 12 Select the stairs. 14 Select the three model lines.Notice that the model lines still display. click the Hide/Isolate control. 15 Delete the three model lines. 16 On the View Control Bar. and select Hide Object.

17 In the Project Browser. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. IMPORTANT Be careful not to select the railings. Modify stairs 18 Select the stairs. under Views (all). under Constraints. and click OK. as needed. 19 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Use TAB or zoom in. under Sections (Building Section). click . 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. Creating Your First Building Model | 85 .

click Mirror. you could modify the floor openings to accommodate the stair landings. 27 Move the cursor upward and perpendicular to the floor.NOTE At this time. SM. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click . Do not select the railings. 26 Place the cursor over the center of bottom edge of the Level 1 floor. and select Copy. 25 Enter the keyboard shortcut. Copy west stairs to east stairwell 22 Select the stairs created in the previous steps. When the midpoint symbol and tooltip displays. as shown. and click to set the mirror axis endpoint. 23 On the Edit menu. 24 On the Options Bar. click to specify the start point of the mirror axis. This is done in the next exercise using a new dataset. The cursor now snaps only to midpoints.

click 30 On the File menu. Creating the East Wing and Passageway. click Modify. a new dataset is supplied with the building model saved at this point. . Creating the East Wing and Passageway In this exercise. NOTE Beginning with the next exercise. It has been modified slightly for training purposes. 31 On the File menu. click Close. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 29 On the View toolbar. Creating Your First Building Model | 87 . You add a curtain wall passageway between the wings with a suspended walkway between each of the upper floors. click Save.28 On the Design Bar. you create the east wing of the building model by mirroring the west wing.

You use this plane later as the mirror axis. If necessary. and double-click 3D Southwest Isometric.rvt file located in the Metric folder. under Views (all). 2 Draw a vertical reference plane 12000 mm from the exterior face of the right exterior wall as shown. NOTE It is important to capture every component within this building model.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. Additional 3D views were added. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Floor openings were modified to create stair landings. 4 Draw a pick box around the entire building model. zoom out before making the selection. The following modifications have been made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wall inserts on the north and south walls were evenly spaced. Mirror the west wing 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. This dataset is essentially the same dataset you saved at the end of the last exercise. Open the m_First_Project-West_Wing. click Ref Plane. 3 In the Project Browser. Stair railings on Level 3 were added. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

click Mirror. under Floor Plans.The entire model displays as selected. 8 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT Components selected in one view remain selected when you switch views. 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Press and hold CTRL. click and verify that Copy is selected. Creating Your First Building Model | 89 . and select the section line to add it to the selection set. 9 Select the vertical reference plane you added previously. 7 On the Edit menu. double-click Level 1.

zoom out to see both wings of the building model. 14 On the View toolbar. If necessary. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 20 On the Options Bar. In addition. click 15 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. a progress bar displays on the status bar as the mirrored copy is generated. select Curtain Wall: Exterior Glazing. 10 After the mirrored copy displays. select Roof for Height. click the flip arrows to ensure the exterior face of the curtain wall is facing the outside. 19 In the Type Selector. click Modify on the Design Bar. click Wall. 16 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. The new components are numbered sequentially. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. as shown. 13 On the Edit menu. 11 If necessary. Notice that the new wing is a mirror image of the original. 21 Sketch the two curtain walls between the wings. double-click Level 1. click . 12 Select the reference plane. . click Delete. Add the passageway walls between wings 17 In the Project Browser.After you specify the mirror axis. notice that a new section view exists in the Project Browser.

23 On the Tools menu. split the same exterior wall at the intersection of the exterior face of the wall hosting door 13 as shown. When splitting the wall. 25 Split the face of the exterior brick wall at the intersection with the curtain wall. 24 On the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 91 . click Split Walls and Lines. zoom into the intersection and make sure you split the wall where it intersects the exterior face of the elevator shaft wall. click .Split and delete exterior wall faces of each wing 22 On the View toolbar. as shown below. 26 Using the same technique. select Delete Inner Segment.

27 Enter ZF to Zoom to Fit. verify that Delete Inner Segment is selected. you can use the Align tool to clean up the intersection. 29 On the Tools menu. click Split Walls and Lines. Notice the segment between the splits has been deleted. 30 On the Options Bar. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 28 Zoom in to the intersection of the passageway and the exterior wall of the right wing. TIP If the split does not line up perfectly with the intersecting wall.

click Modify. 32 On the Design Bar. click 34 On the View toolbar. 39 Select both curtain walls so that the floor offset is on the exterior side of each wall. 33 On the View toolbar.31 Using the technique learned previously. Creating Your First Building Model | 93 . 38 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add a floor to the Level 1 passageway 36 Adjust your zoom settings until you can see the perimeter of the entire passageway. click Floor. click . 35 In the Project Browser. Arrows refer to each split location. to turn off thin lines mode. double-click Level 1. split the face of the exterior brick wall at the similar intersections shown below. under Floor Plans. enter 150 for Offset. and clear Extend into wall (to core).

42 Select the edge of the floor on both the west and east wings. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 45 Continue cleaning up the intersections using this method. 41 On the Options Bar. click the rectangle drawing tool. In this case. 44 Select the center of the left vertical line. and then select the center of the top horizontal line. 48 Click Finish Sketch. 53 Sketch a rectangle with the vertical lines attached to the level 2 floor of each wing and each horizontal line 1500 mm from the inner face of the curtain wall. 52 On the Options Bar. click and Lock. click Lines. click Lines. and click OK. click Trim/Extend. under Floor Plans. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. there are two general rules that must be applied: You must have a closed loop and there cannot be intersecting lines. click Floor Properties. 51 On the Design Bar.40 On the Design Bar. 43 On the Tools menu. When sketching. When finished. NOTE In the following image. double-click Level 2. Add walkway to Level 2 49 In the Project Browser. dimensions have been added for training purposes. 47 Select Concrete 300mm for Type. In the following illustration. the sketch line weight has been increased for training purposes. click Floor. the sketch should be a single closed loop as shown. . 46 On the Design Bar. The general rule is that you should click the section of the line that you wish to keep. notice the overlapping intersections that must be cleaned up before the sketch can be finished.

Creating Your First Building Model | 95 . 56 Click Finish Sketch. 59 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 55 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. 66 Select the railing. click Lines. 63 On the Design Bar. click Railing. 62 Draw two short lines to close the gap between the walkway and where it intersects each wing. click and . zoom in when selecting the walkway edge to make sure the offset is correct. click Floor Properties. 58 On the Design Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. click . 65 On the Design Bar. use the trim tool to make the sketch a single line.54 On the Design Bar. 64 In the Element Properties dialog box. as shown. you can use the SPACEBAR to toggle the offset. If necessary. TIP When sketching. click Railing Properties. 60 Select the line at the top edge of the walkway so that the sketch line is offset inside the walkway. If they do. 61 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. Add railings to Level 2 walkway 57 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. TIP Make sure the line intersections do not overlap. select 1100mm for Type.

74 Double-click the section head you created in the previous step. only midpoints will be snapped to. 69 Enter SM. click Modify.67 On the Edit menu. it is faster to mirror it. 73 On the Design Bar. Add a new section view 71 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and modify the direction and shape handles. move the cursor to the right. as shown. TIP Press and hold CTRL while making multiple selections. 68 On the Options Bar. For the next mouse click. however. click Mirror. select both railings and the walkway on Level 2. and click to set the mirror axis. 72 Add a section view to the center of the passageway. 75 In the section view. It should be noted that the reason both railings weren’t sketched at the same time is because a railing sketch has to be a single. You could create another railing on the other side of the walkway. continuous line. 70 Click at the midpoint of the walkway for the mirror axis start point. click Section. click and Copy.

select Level 3. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. click . double-click Roof. The only remaining task is to add a roof to the passageway. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. 81 Using the zoom commands. 77 On the Edit menu. 84 Select each curtain wall so that the offset is outside the curtain wall as shown. 78 In the Select Levels dialog box. 82 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. zoom in until you can see the railings and walkways. click Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. If necessary. adjust the view so you can see the entire passageway. Creating Your First Building Model | 97 . check Defines slope. under Floor Plans. 79 On the View toolbar. Add roof to passageway 80 In the Project Browser. 83 On the Options Bar.76 On the Edit menu.

90 On the Design Bar. 89 Using the techniques you learned earlier. 91 On the View toolbar. as shown. 86 On the Options Bar. Exact dimensions are not important. click Lines. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Finish Roof. click Trim/Extend. as shown. 87 Sketch two vertical lines that intersect the horizontal lines. click . clear Defines slope. 88 On the Tools menu.85 On the Design Bar. click the center of each roof line to clean up each corner.

and click Hidden Line. Second. 93 On the Tools menu. Joining a roof is a two-click procedure. For training purposes. The two roofs are joined. click Join/Unjoin Roof. First. In this case. 95 Click the outer edge of the main roof. you select the edge of the roof or wall that you want it joined to. you select the edge of the passageway roof. and then the outer edge of the corresponding wing roof. 94 Click the left edge of the passageway roof. Join the roofs 92 On the View Control Bar. it is easier to demonstrate the roof joins in hidden line mode. Creating Your First Building Model | 99 .Notice that the passageway roof needs to be joined to each wing. click the Model Graphics Style control. you click the edge of the roof that you want to join.

click .rvt 100 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Join/Unjoin Roof. 99 Join the passageway roof and the roof of the other wing using the same technique learned in the previous steps. Scheduling the Building Model. click the Model Graphics Style control. Scheduling the Building Model In this exercise. Finally. you duplicate the schedule twice. 102 Navigate to your preferred directory. The initial schedule contains all doors in the building model. After creating the schedule. you modify it to filter by level. 97 Spin the model so that you have access to the unjoined end of the passageway roof and the east wing roof. and click Save. 103 Proceed to the next exercise. 100 On the View Control Bar. click Save As. and select Shading with Edges. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. 98 On the Tools menu. you create and modify a door schedule. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. name the file First Project-Dual Wings-in progress.96 On the View toolbar. 101 On the File menu.rvt. and change the filtering so each level has a unique door schedule. rename each schedule.

3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Under Parameter Data. You can add custom fields and make them either type or instance parameters. 4 From the Available Fields list. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Instance. select Project parameter. TIP You can also double-click an available field to add it to the scheduled fields. enter Hardware for Name. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Text for Type.Create a door schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not visible. right-click on the Design Bar and click View. 8 Under Scheduled fields (in order). 9 Move Hardware so that it is directly below Family and Type. select Family and Type under Available Fields. on the Fields tab. add the following as scheduled fields: ■ ■ ■ Level Mark Cost Notice that there is not an available field for Hardware. and click Add. 5 Click Add Parameter. select Doors for category. 7 Click OK. Creating Your First Building Model | 101 . and click OK. select Mark and click Move up until it displays at the top of the list. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. Select Other for Group parameter under. 10 Move Cost below Hardware. click Schedule/Quantities. Select Common for Discipline.

16 Click the Formatting tab. select Family and Type. select Cost. On the schedule. select Header and select Footer.11 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and under Field Formatting. 13 Under Sort by. 24 Select Bold for Header text. 22 Under Field formatting. Door Type will display as the column heading rather than Family and Type. select Level. The door schedule displays. You can hide this field because you are sorting and grouping by level. 17 Under Fields. 15 Select Mark for Then by. 21 Under Fields. 23 Click the Appearance tab. 25 Click OK. 18 Enter Door Type for Heading. 20 Select Right for Alignment. the column is redundant. select Calculate totals. 26 In the door schedule. 12 Select Level for Sort by. select Grand totals and select Itemize every instance. 14 At the bottom of the tab. Modifications to the schedule appearance display only when the schedule is added to a sheet. Therefore. select the column grip between Door Type and Hardware and move the grip to the right until the door types display in their entirety. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select Hidden field. 19 Under Fields.

31 Repeat the previous step to create a second copy of the door schedule. any changes made to column size are not retained when the schedule is added to a sheet. and click OK. right-click Door Schedule-Level 1. right-click Door Schedule. and click Duplicate. 29 Click in the Hardware field for door mark number 1. under Schedules/Quantities. 28 Click OK. Cost is a type parameter. under Other. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Schedules/Quantities. each door is allowed a different value. Duplicate and filter door schedules 30 In the Project Browser. specify Level equals Level 1 for Filter by. Because you created the hardware parameter as an instance parameter. and click Properties. and click OK. enter 500. and click Rename. each schedule still lists all the doors for each level. enter Door Schedule-Level 1. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 32 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Rename View dialog box. 34 Repeat the process to rename the remaining copies to Door Schedule-Level 2 and Door Schedule-Level 3. However. expand Schedules/Quantities. Modify the schedule 27 Click in the Cost field for door mark number 1. This is because for this door type.TIP In this view. You now have a separate schedule for each level. Creating Your First Building Model | 103 . and press ENTER. A message displays indicating that this change must be applied to all elements of the same type. enter Brass. right-click Door Schedule. click Edit for the Filter value. and press ENTER. 35 In the Project Browser.

click Save. click OK. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Rendering the Building Model. click . and then render a 3D view using that scene. double-click each door schedule. Create the exterior scene 1 On the View toolbar. 4 Click OK. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. modify the settings. click Settings. Rendering the Building Model In this exercise. After rendering. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select New. 39 Repeat the previous four steps for Door Schedule Level 2 and Door Schedule Level 3. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box.38 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice that the information is now filtered for each level. Enter Exterior Scene for Name.rvt. Filter each schedule by their respective level. 40 In the Project Browser. you create an exterior scene. under Schedules/Quantities. you capture the image and save it within the project. select Exterior. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. Under Type. 41 On the File menu.

Specify scene settings 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. The raytrace process begins and a progress bar displays on the status bar. 14 Click OK. under Scene Settings. This is a white background color. under Background Color. A color bar displays. click Region Raytrace. click the Bars tab. 17 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Environment dialog box. 9 Specify a value of 250 for the R. 11 In the Environment dialog box. click Environment. 10 Click OK. click OK. 7 Click the color bar. When the rendering process is complete. and select Blurry Reflections and Blurry Transparency. click . 8 In the Color Picker dialog box. 15 On the View toolbar. 18 Drag a box around the building model as shown. select Good for Quality. the building model should resemble the following illustration. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. Creating Your First Building Model | 105 . and B settings. 12 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. under Scene Settings. 13 Under Raytrace Settings. select Solid Color. 16 Spin the building model until it resembles the following illustration. G. This is the background color for the scene.

22 On the File menu. click Capture Rendering. An expandable branch called Renderings is added to the Project Browser. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. and double-click {3D}. Documenting the Building Model In this exercise. you add two sheets with titleblocks to the project. 20 On the Design Bar.19 On the Design Bar. you add this to a sheet. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt 106 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 21 In the Project Browser. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. you add a rendered view and an elevation view. click Display Model. In the next exercise. click Save. This is the captured rendering from the previous steps. On the second sheet. Documenting the Building Model. You add a floor plan and schedule to the first sheet. expand Renderings.

Creating Your First Building Model | 107 . 8 Select the titleblock and zoom in to the lower right corner. The creator of this titleblock family did not want this text to be modifiable in the project environment. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 Click Cancel. click OK to use the loaded titleblock. click Sheet. click Load. The text is not selectable by design. The titleblocks that are listed are loaded into the project. Notice that several titleblocks are installed with the software.Add a sheet and titleblock to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The blue text is text that you can modify. 4 Double-click the Titleblocks folder. You can create a titleblock family and load it into the project or navigate to it from this dialog box. You are prompted to select a titleblock. click Metric Library. 7 Try to select the logo in the upper right corner. enter your name. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and press ENTER. 9 Click Owner. Titleblocks are a family just like any other component.

the label displays As Indicated. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Project Information. Notice that your name is displayed for Client Name. 14 In the Views dialog box. In this case. referring the reader to the view titles. click Add View. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 Move the cursor to the center of the titleblock and click. the next sheet and titleblock will be A102. 11 Enter First Building Model for Project Name. and click OK.10 On the Settings menu. and click Add View to Sheet. select Floor Plan: Level 1. Add a view to the titleblock 12 Zoom out until you can see the entire sheet. If you add views of different scales. The Scale is blank and is filled in when a view is added to the titleblock. Titleblock numbering is sequential and automatic.

17 Right-click the view. You can work on the building model within this view. 20 Under Visibility. 21 Right-click the view. clear Elevations. The titleblock becomes an underlay and the view becomes active. Relocate the view title 22 Drag the view title under the view. click Visibility/Graphics. However. you activated the view specifically to turn off the elevation symbol visibility. 23 Select the view. and on the context menu. 18 On the View menu. click Modify. Creating Your First Building Model | 109 . Notice the elevation symbols display. 24 Adjust the view title length by dragging the shape handles under the extents of the view. and on the context menu. 25 Drag the view to the lower left corner of the titleblock as shown. click Deactivate View. click Activate View. 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Notice drag handles display on the ends of the view title. and click OK.16 On the Design Bar.

drag Door Schedule-Level 1 onto the upper right corner of the titleblock. under Schedules/Quantities. 110 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice that the scale value has updated.26 Zoom in to the lower right corner. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Zoom out until the titleblock fits within the drawing area.

30 Using the column drag handles. 31 Zoom out and move the schedule into the upper right corner of the titleblock. adjust each column width so no text wrapping occurs.29 Zoom in to the top of the schedule. Creating Your First Building Model | 111 .

If you click this. You have completed your first building model. click OK to use the default titleblock. 35 In the Project Browser. drag {3D} to the upper right corner of the new titleblock. click Sheet. You can adjust the lengths of each section after the break. click Close. 36 On the File menu. the Scale label displays As Indicated. drag North to the lower left corner of sheet A102. 33 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Save.TIP When the schedule is selected. notice the z symbol in the center edge. the schedule breaks in half. If necessary. 34 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). modify the location and width of the view titles. under Renderings. 112 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 37 On the File menu. Because these two views have different view scales. Add various views to a second sheet 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Finally. you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Building working environment. you create an office template. you modify the system environment. In the first lesson. In the second lesson. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. and set it as your default template. which is independent of the project settings. 113 .Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial.

16 Click OK. 4 Under Colors. 8 Select m_Tutorial_Default. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. click Wall. 6 In the New Project dialog box. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Building. and your username when using worksets. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects.rte in the Metric folder. click Modify. select yellow. selection default options. 13 In the Color dialog box. 10 On the Settings menu. click Training Files. click Browse. 11 In the Options dialog box. notification preferences. and click OK. 3 In the Options dialog box. and select the wall. click the value for Selection Color. Select None for Tooltip Assistance. 19 On the Design Bar. under Template file. 2 On the Settings menu. the elements causing the error display using this color. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click Open. These settings control the graphics. click the Graphics tab. 12 Under Colors. journal cleanup options. 14 Click the General tab. click Options. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. specify the following options: ■ ■ Select One hour for Save Reminder interval. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Building working environment. click Close to close all open projects.Modifying System Settings In this lesson. and click OK. click Options. select Invert background color. Set graphics settings 1 On the File menu. click the Graphics tab. 15 Under Notifications. 9 In the New Project dialog box. click OK. they are not saved to project or template files. When an error occurs. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. Notice that the drawing area is black. 5 On the File menu.

29 In the Options dialog box. do not save the changes. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. click Options. 31 Click OK. 24 When prompted to save. Under Username. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). These files are used primarily in the software support process. clear Invert background color. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Modify. click Close. Select Red for Selection Color. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. If prompted. the family libraries.Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. Specifying File Locations. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. 27 Open the m_Settings. you specify your default file locations. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Building session. 28 On the Settings menu. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. click No. 25 On the File menu. Modifying System Settings | 115 . Your login name displays by default. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. the family template files. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. 23 On the File menu. 32 On the File menu. click Open. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 30 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ ■ Under Notifications. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 20 On the Design Bar. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. enter the name you want to use during worksharing.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon. click Close. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Building sessions. Under Journal File Cleanup. as well as the material and rendering libraries. These settings control location of important Revit Building files such as your default project template.

architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 7 In the Options dialog box. 3 Under Default template file. notice the list of library names. under Default path for family template files. In the following illustration. Save. and change the name to My Library. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. TIP To view a template.Set file locations 1 On the Settings menu. select the folder to save your files to by default. and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the field. click Browse. you can start a new project with that template. and click OK. click Browse. click Options. 8 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files. 2 In the Options dialog box. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog box. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog box. When you are opening. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog box. You can modify the existing library names and path. or loading a Revit Building file. such as in a large. choose New  ➤ Project. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog box. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. click Browse. saving. and Import dialog boxes. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. 10 Under Libraries. click the File Locations tab. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. and you can create new libraries. centralized. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Load. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click . under Libraries. However. Each library path points Revit Building to a folder of families or training files. On the File menu. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 4 Click Cancel. 12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click Browse to select a template. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library.

click the My Library icon. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. 18 Click Cancel. click Options. and click OK. Specifying Spelling Options. 14 Under Library Name. click Open. This path is determined during installation. The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box. Modifying System Settings | 117 . 15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list. view the current path. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Click OK. 19 On the Settings menu. If you work in a large office. Load. 24 Under AccuRender resource location. Notice that Revit Building navigates directly to the library path. and select it as the library path. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 16 On the File menu. and Import dialog boxes. templates. 21 Under Libraries. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Save. select My Library. specify the new location here. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. click My Library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. and click OK. Specify rendering settings 23 Click the Rendering tab. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Building. If you want to relocate this path. This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. or families.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Building projects. 22 Click to delete the library. 20 Click the File Locations tab.

click Exit. click Save. Modifying Snap Settings. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Restore Defaults. 19 In the Options dialog box. click Browse. In this exercise. work with snapping turned off. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. If prompted. click Options. you modify snap settings. scroll down the list of building industry terms. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 18 On the Settings menu. click Modify. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. You can turn snap settings on and off. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 9 In the text editor.Modify spelling settings 1 On the Settings menu.rte in the Metric folder. 23 On the File menu of the text editor. click Text. click Edit. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Options. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 16 On the Tools menu. click Spelling. 4 Select m_Tutorial_Default. click Close. enter sheetmtl-Cu. delete sheetmtl-CU. under Template file. click OK. 11 In the Options dialog box. 6 On the File menu. 25 On the File menu. 7 On the File menu. click OK. click Edit. click Training Files. 2 In the Options dialog box. 10 On the File menu. 5 In the New Project dialog box. do not save the changes. click Exit. click to open a new Revit Building project using the default template. click Edit. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 17 Click OK. and click Open. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click in the drawing area. 20 Under Settings. and then click File  ➤ Exit. 4 Under Personal dictionary. 5 In the text editor. click the Spelling tab. click the Spelling tab. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 24 In the Options dialog box. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 22 In the text editor. Modify snap increments 1 On the File menu. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click OK. click Save. 3 Under Settings. you modify snap increments. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project.

Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Revit Building uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint.. While sketching. 10 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 Under Object Snaps. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. For example. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. and move the cursor to the right. click Snaps. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. zoom out until it does so. If you do not have a wheel button. This dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries. use the wheel button on your mouse. click OK. This is the increment that you added previously. and enter 500 . 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 9 In the Snaps dialog box. notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 7 Under Dimension Snaps. As you zoom in and out within a view. Modifying System Settings | 119 . click Wall. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. If it does not. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments.6 On the Settings menu. snapping reverts to the system default settings. After you click to place the object at the midpoint.

lines. Finally. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. If you move the cursor along the wall. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. and the wall edges. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. click Close. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. Using these options. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and delete the value 500 . and object styles. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. and click Wall. Modifying Project Settings. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 24 Click OK.. Notice that snapping is once again active. Do not set the wall end point. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. annotations. save the project file with a unique name. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. click Modify. the midpoint. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. fill patterns. and specify the wall endpoint. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and use it to complete the exercises. click Snaps. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. and do not save the file. 25 On the File menu.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. it will snap to the endpoints. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 21 Move the cursor downward. You create and modify materials. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and move the cursor to the right. When you apply a material to a component. 18 Enter SM. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 22 On the Settings menu.

click Open. When a model component is loaded into a project. This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. enter Masonry . Notice that there is no Surface Pattern applied to this material. 4 In the New Material dialog box. nor is there an AccuRender texture applied.Stone for Name. and select Masonry . 3 Click Duplicate.In the steps that follow. Modifying Project Settings | 121 . This list includes all materials required by loaded model components. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog box. you render a region to observe the changes. However. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. 2 Scroll down. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. and click OK. Create a new material 1 On the Settings menu. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. this material provides a good foundation for the new material. Masonry-Fieldstone. Open m_Settings.Fieldstone. In the steps that follow. click Materials. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls.rvt located in the Metric folder.

Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library.Modify material settings 5 Under AccuRender. expand Views (all). click OK. 12 In the Material Editor dialog box. enter Masonry . 21 In the Value field for Structure. The upper wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it. 10 In the Image Mapping dialog box. click OK. select user from the list of libraries. click New  ➤ Use Current Material as Template. 11 Under Offset.Fieldstone for Name. 15 Click OK. click the Maps tab. 24 In the Materials dialog box. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\. 22 Click in the Material field for layer #1. The AccuRender texture Masonry . and double-click Level 1. 26 Select the right exterior wall. 25 Click OK three times. 9 Select the entry under Image Mapping. and click Edit. notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank. and select the remaining two unchanged walls. 23 On the right side of the Material field. click Edit/New. click the Orientation tab. 8 In the Material Editor dialog box. 14 In the Material Library dialog box. select Masonry . you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . enter 0. and click OK. 19 Click Duplicate.Fieldstone for the name. click to select a texture. and click OK. and click OK. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 20 Enter the new wall name. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click This is the material you created previously. 7 In the Material Library dialog box. 17 Select the upper exterior wall. 27 Press CTRL. click Edit. By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . . It is currently assigned the material Masonry . expand Floor Plans. and click . 28 In the Type Selector. on the Material menu.Brick. Apply the new material 16 In the Project Browser. and select Stone82. 13 In the Save Material As dialog box. In the next exercise. Fieldstone on CMU.75 for X and Y. you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns within the rendering.Fieldstone material. Before closing the Materials dialog box.

This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. Modifying Project Settings | 123 . and click Rendering. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. 31 In the drawing area. When finished. 32 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render. click . you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this. In the following exercise. right-click the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. Zoom into the model. select Region Raytrace. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. click Region Raytrace. TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. the rendering process begins. After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model. Notice the roof did not render. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. the fieldstone material that you created is displayed. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. In the exercise. Controlling Object Styles. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. 33 On the File menu.29 On the View Toolbar. click Display Model. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. 30 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. drag a rectangle around the 3D image. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Save As.rvt.

click Fill Patterns. 5 Click New. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Custom. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. and double-click East. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 9 Select Fieldstone_Model. Apply the fieldstone pattern 13 Select the east exterior wall. 7 Under Custom. 2 On the Settings menu. expand Elevations. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog box. such as steel. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. 11 Enter Fieldstone for Name. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. and click OK. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 10 Under Custom. select fldstn. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit Building\Training. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog box. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and click Open. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Building software. choose Model. TIP Typically.rvt.56 for Import scale. click Import. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall.pat from the Common folder.There are two types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. and enter . Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. Drafting pattern density is fixed. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress. 12 Click OK. 3 Under Pattern Type.

Fieldstone material. adjust your zoom settings as needed. notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry . 27 On the File menu. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. select Model. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. click . 26 On the View Toolbar. you can set the window frame material to “By Category. click Edit. click Edit/New. In the Materials dialog box. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Modifying Project Settings | 125 . click . For example. click Modify. click Save. Object Styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. TIP If the pattern does not display. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall.Fieldstone. 18 On the right side of the Materials field. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. click to select a fill pattern. 25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. Object Styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. under Pattern Type. 22 In the Materials dialog box.14 On the Options Bar. click . 23 Click OK three times. 21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. Controlling Object Styles. click in the Material field for layer #1. 16 In the Value field for Structure. 24 On the Design Bar. there are often multiple window types within a project. 20 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. and click OK. 19 Under Surface Pattern. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. The east wall of the building displays as solid fill.” You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog box and apply it to all window types. Controlling Object Styles You can use Object Styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents.

expand 3D Views. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the keyboard.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three left windows facing you. and double-click 3D Model View. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. m_Settings-in progress.rvt.

click Edit/New. click OK. click OK. Modifying Project Settings | 127 . 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 18 On the Design Bar.3 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. and select 15 In the Materials dialog box. click the Trim Exterior value. . 4 Select one of the windows. click the Trim Exterior Material value. under Other. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. and select the circular window on the second level. and select 8 In the Materials dialog box. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. and click Shading with Edges. click . click . under Other. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. click By Category. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click By Category. . click Edit/New. click Modify. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 Zoom out. 5 On the Options Bar. click OK.

Notice that the external window frames are now white. 21 Under Category. expand Windows. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. select Trim . Notice that the material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles. and click in the Material field. click 29 On the File menu. specify Trim . click . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 23 On the right side of the Material field. 20 In the Object Styles dialog box. select Trim. 25 In the Object Styles dialog box. 22 Under the Windows category. 27 Under Category. expand Windows. click Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. 26 On the Settings menu. click Object Styles.19 On the Settings menu. 28 On the View Toolbar.rvt. 24 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. click Save. and click OK.White for Trim material. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. and click OK twice. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Settings-in progress. click Object Styles. 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . .Granite for name.

4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog box. 2 On the Settings menu. click New. 10 Select Red for Line Color. You have created a new line pattern. The line style is applied to the roof in all views. 11 Click OK. 7 On the View Control Bar.Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. click Line Patterns. There are two ways to apply the line style to the roof. is open with the 3D view active. and click Hidden Line. 9 In the Object Styles dialog box. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. Modifying Project Settings | 129 . under Category. 8 On the Settings menu. and select Roof Line for Line Pattern. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. now you must apply it. m_Settings-in progress. click Object Styles. click Model Graphics Style.rvt. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog box. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. select Roofs. enter Roof Line for Name.

19 Click the Model Categories tab. under Modify Subcategories. 18 On the View menu. click Object Styles. under 3D Views. Create a new line style 23 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 20 Click Override for Line Style Projection. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 25 In the Line Styles dialog box. and click OK. click Line Styles. click New. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 13 On the View Control Bar. 16 Select Solid for Line Pattern. under Category. 14 On the Settings menu. Select Blue for Line Color. click Model Graphics Style. Select Roof Line for Line Pattern. 24 On the Settings menu. double-click 3D Model View. 17 Click OK. This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. and select Roofs for Visibility. 15 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click Hidden Line. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 5 for Line Weight.12 In the Project Browser. 26 Enter Zoning Setback for Name. click Visibility/Graphics. select Roofs. 21 In the Select Line Style dialog box. under Floor Plans. and select Black for Line Color. 22 Click OK twice. Notice that the line style displays in this view also.

select Zoning Setback.27 For the Zoning Setback category. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type number. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the property lines. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.) Click . 42 On the File menu. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight Projection. expand Lines. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. click Visibility/Graphics. 40 Click OK. click . expand Lines. The -3000mm offset displays inside the property lines. 31 In the Options Bar. ■ 32 Click the upper-left corner of the property line to begin the rectangle. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. Notice that the line style has not been applied to the roof in this view because you applied the override to the 3D Model View only. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. 28 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . 36 Click OK. under Floor Plans. 35 On the Model Categories tab. Select Red for Line Color. click Visibility/Graphics. click . 39 On the Model Categories tab. Enter -3000 mm for Offset. double-click Level 1 Annotated. (Make sure you specify a negative value. 34 On the View menu. Modifying Annotations. 37 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Type Selector. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 38 On the View menu. click Save. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. Notice the Zoning Setback lines appear in this view. specify the following: ■ ■ Click . 41 On the View Toolbar. click Lines. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. and clear Zoning Setback. 33 On the View Toolbar. and clear Zoning Setback.

You have created a new dimension style.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and that the tag displays the window type number rather than the window instance number. 5 Under Text. m_Settings-in progress. navigate to the Annotations/Architectural folder of the Metric Library. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. 4 Enter the name Linear . 11 Select any window in the east or west wall. 17 Click Load. 2 On the Settings menu. click the default value for Units Format. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. is open with the 3D View active. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Number. 15 On the Settings menu. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. scroll down to Windows. In the Type Selector. In the steps that follow. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. Load a new window tag 10 In the Project Browser. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. double-click Level 1 Annotated.Imperial and click OK. 7 Click OK twice. click Modify. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. and select M_Window Tag . under Category. Notice that the windows on the east and west walls are tagged.Imperial dimension available. 6 In the Format dialog box: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 18 In the Open dialog box. 14 Click Cancel. click Duplicate. click Dimension.rvt. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type number.rvt. 16 In the Tags dialog box. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. notice that there is a Linear . m_Settings-in progress. 3 In the Type Properties dialog box. click .

25 On the left side of the north wall. 24 On the Options Bar. notice Window Tags appears twice. and click OK. click Modify. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.Number. 30 In the Type Selector. notice that the label displays 1i. and Detail Level Options. clear Leader. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. verify that Create is clear. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. M_Window Tag . 31 On the Design Bar. 27 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. A window instance tag displays on each selected window. click Save. In the first section. m_Settings-in progress. the other displays the instance value. Unless overridden. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. click 33 On the File menu. 21 Under Loaded Tags. click Tag. Specifying Units of Measurement.Number is now the assigned tag. you modify the detail level assignments. click M_Window Tag . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 19 Click Open. 22 Click OK. select one of the window tags that displays the type value.In the preview image. select M_Window Tag . TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. dimension values display using this setting. 20 In the Tags dialog box. click the three left-most windows. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 29 On the east wall. Specifying Units of Measurement. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. and select the drop-down arrow that displays.Number. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Notice that both window tag types can coexist within the same view. Temporary Dimensions. click Tag All Not Tagged. you modify three settings that have a broad impact on the project. 26 On the Design Bar. In the second section.Number as the assigned tag. Leave M_Window Tag . In the final section. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. . Temporary Dimensions. you specify the project units of measurements.Number. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . 28 Under Leader. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. 32 On the View Toolbar.rvt. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. Under Category.

dimensions use these project settings.Set units of measurement 1 On the Settings menu. click the default value for Format. and click OK. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 On the Settings menu. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 9 Under Doors and Windows. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. and click OK. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. click Detail Level. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. Unless overridden. 14 On the File menu. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. 12 Click OK. 6 Click OK. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Views (all). select meters squared for Unit suffix. and expand 3D Views. In this table. click . Open c_Project_Browser. You do not select a view scale to move it. 8 Under Walls. click Save. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. select Faces. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. In this project. click Close. Specify detail levels 10 On the Settings menu. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. select Openings. select To the nearest 100 for Rounding. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. 5 In the Format dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. click Project Units. click the Training Files icon. Modifying Project Browser Organization. click the default value for Format. 3 In the Format dialog box. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. In this exercise. click Temporary Dimensions. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. under Area.rvt from the Common folder. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. under Length. 13 On the File menu.

Phase 2-Structure West Wing . click Browser Organization. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 8 Select Phase. 5 On the Views tab. expand each view type. under Sheets.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . and click OK. and click OK. and click Apply. notice that Views are grouped based on Phase. 4 On the Settings menu. expand Sheets (all). and click OK. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 On the Settings menu. 14 In the Project Browser. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. select Discipline. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. On the Project Browser. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . expand each sheet set. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. In the Project Browser. click Browser Organization.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. click Browser Organization. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . 12 Click the Sheets tab. select Type/Discipline.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog box. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. 7 On the Settings menu. 10 In the Project Browser.

21 In the Project Browser. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. It is mostly conceptual and designed as a road map with options for your consideration. In the lesson that follows. under Views. View Type (Family and Type). This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your office template. expand 3D Views. and click OK. dimensions styles. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. enter a unique file name. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. and expand both Architectural and Structural. and click New. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. You can also save these settings in a template file. click Browser Organization. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. and click OK. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog box. When you create new projects. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. named print settings. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. click Close. 22 On the File menu. navigate to your preferred directory. and Discipline. you create a Revit Building template file and set it as your default template. you create an office template. Proceed to the next lesson. 16 Click the Views tab. and click OK.Create a new browser organization name 15 On the Settings menu. click the Folders tab. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . In this lesson. and render scenes in a template. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. Although Revit Building provides many templates to choose from. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. levels. and view names. Creating an Office Template. expand Complete. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. If you want to save this file.

5 Click OK. for instance. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can select it now. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. Whenever you create a new project or template.Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you select the starting point for your office template. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. 10 On the File menu. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. and double-click North. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. click Browse. Modifying Project Settings. For example. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. If you want to use a template other than the default. 12 Under Template File. expand Views. you modify the project settings for your new template. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. and click Open. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. each is modified in a way to make it useful to the applicable industry. 3 Under Template File. select Project for Create new. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click New  ➤ Project. Other templates. structural or construction. in the drawing area. When you create a new template based on an existing template. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. Creating an Office Template | 137 . These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 11 Under Create New. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. when you create a new project. 8 In the Project Browser. click New ➤ Project. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. 9 On the File menu. such as the structural template. select Project Template. For example. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. Review existing templates 1 On the File menu. 13 Select the default template. When you create the material. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. If you have additional projects open. expand Elevations. and click OK. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. In that case. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. the same rules apply. 7 On the View menu. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. click Browse. 14 Click Open. 6 In the Project Browser. Other than the default template.rte template. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. drag a zoom region around the level heads. close them. click Close.

The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. or modify existing patterns. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. You may want to save the material to a library located on a network path. During this exercise. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. and create the AccuRender material. 2 Scroll down the Name list. line colors. 7 Create new fill patterns as needed. be aware that access to the original material library may be necessary at some point. specific modifications are not dictated. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. line patterns. Specify object styles 9 On the Settings menu. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. 3 Under AccuRender. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. In the Object Styles dialog box. and move model patterns. Choose the appropriate option. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Create and modify materials 1 On the Settings menu. For more details on modifying these settings. see the previous lesson. If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template. click Materials. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. create and modify them as needed. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings for more information on creating new fill patterns. weights. 8 Click OK when finished. click to access the AccuRender Material Library. Create and modify fill patterns 5 On the Settings menu. rotate.In this exercise. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. Observe the materials that are already defined. Modifying System Settings or refer to the Help documentation. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. 6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. you can do so by going to the Material menu and selecting New. When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template. you can set line weights. You can align. you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. click Object Styles. RELATED See Modifying System Settings for more information on creating new AccuRender materials. If you create or modify new materials. You can do this by setting the AccuRender Texture. click Fill Patterns. 4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialog boxes.

You can add and delete view scales. select it. 23 Add and delete view scales as needed. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective views. create new subcategories. click Line Weights. 31 To modify a line pattern. Modify line weights 20 On the Settings menu. one for perspective model line styles. 24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. Modify line patterns 29 On the Settings menu. 25 Modify existing line weights as needed. line color. modify the line weight. and one for annotation symbol line styles. 18 If necessary. 32 Add and delete line patterns as needed. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 27 Modify existing line weights as needed.TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. and create new subcategories as needed. 30 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components. 14 Modify categories. create new line subcategories. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. 12 If necessary. or line pattern as needed. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. and scroll through the list of categories. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for six different drawing scales. 28 Click OK. 33 Click OK. Modify line styles 16 On the Settings menu. there are three tabs: one for model component line styles. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. click Line Styles. 13 Click the Annotation Objects tab. Creating an Office Template | 139 . 17 For existing line categories. click Line Patterns. and click Edit. 26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog box. such as section lines and dimension lines. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. such as walls and windows in orthographic views. In the dialog box. 19 Click OK. 21 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 10 Click the Model Objects tab.

click Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. Linear. and Angle settings. click Load. On the Settings menu. 39 Click OK. For example. Modify Dimension Styles 40 On the Settings menu. Specify project units 51 On the Settings menu. 36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 45 Click OK. 44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. click Duplicate. click Format. 46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions. select it from this list. The tag assignments in this dialog box dictate the default tag for each category. 49 To load new annotation tags. ■ ■ On the Settings menu. and specify the properties.Modify arrowheads 34 On the Settings menu. 41 Select the Type drop-down list. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 54 Click OK. In the Tags dialog box. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog box. 38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. when you add a door with the tag option selected. The arrowheads configured within this dialog box can be applied to text notes. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Angular. 35 Select the Type drop-down list. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 55 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. Modify loaded tags 47 On the Settings menu. 52 Under Length. 53 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 57 Click OK. To see the details of a particular style. 42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. and choose a decimal symbol. and specify the properties. 48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 56 Specify the Slope option. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. name the style. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. tags. select it from this list. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Radial. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. 37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. click Project Units. 50 After you have loaded the necessary tags. angular. and radial dimensions are modified separately. and click OK. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. name the style. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. and dimensions. Volume. To see the details of a particular style. click Duplicate.

Rename. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. For example. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. 64 Click OK. click Temporary Dimensions. TIP In the drawing area. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. Creating an Office Template | 141 . click Detail Level. and move view scales as needed. see Modifying Project Browser Organization. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. 66 In the Browser Organization dialog box. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. The detail level is based on view scale. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. create new browser organization types. Medium. When you create a new view. or Fine. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. click the Views tab. 59 Under Walls. In such a case. Modify project browser organization 65 On the Settings menu. Specify detail levels 62 On the Settings menu. 71 If necessary. create new browser organization types. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. Additional project settings 73 On the Settings menu. 61 Click OK. 67 Delete. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog box. Although these settings can be saved within a template. Rename.Specify temporary dimensions 58 On the Settings menu. or Edit existing organization types. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. or Edit existing organization types. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. 60 Under Doors and Windows. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 69 Click the Sheets tab. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. 63 Review the table. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. To move the view scales. 68 If necessary. click Browser Organization. However. Using the arrows between the columns. click the arrows between columns. 72 Click OK. In a typical project. 70 Delete.

do so before starting this exercise. or modify a door. modify. You can load any family or group into a template. and make modifications in each area as necessary. You can find additional information in Help. you may want to delete. and the poche depth. If necessary. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. you could load detail components. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups. you can create scene settings and save them to the template. you can create and modify area schemes if there are default settings applicable to most projects. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. titleblocks. Each command is available on the Settings menu. If necessary. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. phase filters. and click Open. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Although the options are endless. If necessary. For example. Use the table below as a checklist. In addition. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. there are some important thoughts to consider. you do both. Use the instructions in the table below to load. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. and electrical fixtures. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Select it. Modify door type 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . For example. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. See Modifying Render Scene Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings Render Scene If necessary. Obviously. However. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you changed a window within a project. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. See Modifying Views and View Templates. you can move onto the next component type. In the Element Properties dialog box. In the steps that follow. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. furniture. create. select Edit/New. Although this is possible. 2 In the Type Selector. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. Site Settings If necessary. or electrical fixtures. If you have not completed the previous exercise. notice the list of doors already loaded. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. 3 To modify. select from the Options Bar. Make modifications. create. you can set up the phases. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. or add to this selection. Links to associated tutorials are provided. or load a new door type. If this selection is satisfactory. This could be useful for things such as hardware. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. select Load. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. and click OK. if you loaded every window type you could find. Depending on the intended use of this template. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. or use the Project Browser. 74 Proceed to the next exercise. you can set the default contour line interval. the section cut material. Phases Project Phasing Area Settings Area Analysis View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. click Door.Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials.

and select the titleblock type. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. expand Families. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. and click OK. Creating an Office Template | 143 . Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. Enter Name. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. select Edit/New. and click OK. click Load from Library. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Press ESC twice to return to the template. Notice that each family category is listed. Modify type properties. 4 Click OK.Goal: Create new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 On the File menu.) 9 Expand the titleblock. Click Duplicate.

To load a titleblock. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. In addition. load. RELATED For more information. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. View Range. Detail Level. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. Discipline. This titleblock is currently part of the template. Create and modify view templates 1 On the Settings menu.10 On the Options Bar. Modifying Views and View Templates. 12 Click OK. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. you create the views required for your template. create. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. Notice it has Revit Building in the upper-right corner. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. click Load. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. you will first modify view templates. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. click 11 Click <<Preview. 2 Select Architectural Plan for Name. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. In addition. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. you can apply a view template to any view. . and click Delete. click View Templates. To do so. see Creating a Titleblock Family. right-click the component. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. In this exercise. In this exercise. you created new projects using different templates. At any time.

and. click Apply. the view is not linked to the template in any way. Rename. Upon the application of the view template. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 15 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View menu. 21 In the Project Browser. in the context menu. In addition. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. and apply the appropriate template. right-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 20 In the Project Browser. and click OK. If necessary. select Make Plan View. under Floor Plans. under Elevations. You can also duplicate or delete the view. 27 Recreate additional levels as needed. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 8 On the View menu. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. double-click South. This options means that every time a new plan view is created. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. or delete them as needed. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. open the view from the Project Browser. Notice the level names. double-click Site. Black level heads have no associated views. 16 On the View menu. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. duplicate. or delete this view. notice that you have the option to rename. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. expand Views. 12 In the Project Browser. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. Blue level heads have associated plan views.By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 24 In the Options Bar. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. click Apply. duplicate. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. select Site Plan. 6 Click OK. click Apply View Template. and click OK. 11 Click Apply. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. 22 In the Project Browser. 18 If you modified any other view templates. under Floor Plans. click Apply View Template. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. click Apply View Template. 23 To add additional levels to the template. expand Floor Plans. 4 If necessary. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. double-click Level 2. review the existing floor plans. and double-click Level 1. After applying the template. Creating an Office Template | 145 . Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view. ceiling plans. review the floor plans. you can rename this view according to your preference. and then click OK. and elevations. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view.

You can use this tool. 32 To create additional 3D views. On the Formatting tab. If you have already loaded your office titleblocks into the template. right-click {3D}. On the Filter tab. click Schedule/Quantities. click Sheet. and click OK. 38 If you want to add schedules to your template. select and order required fields. and click OK. 36 To save the view. Dynamically Modify View. You are prompted to select a titleblock. You can add schedules to a template. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click . select one. supply a view name. on the View toolbar. modify settings as needed. go to the View menu. To do so. 31 Rename the 3D View. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. 34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog box. select the category type. 40 Click OK.Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . assign filters. click 33 On the View toolbar. expand 3D Views. and click OK. 41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. click . under 3D Views. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views  ➤ 3D Views. click 29 In the Project Browser. If necessary. and select Rename. modify settings as needed. 39 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. to orient and save the view. on the View toolbar. Create and modify schedules 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. modify settings as needed. This can save significant time and ensure office standards are maintained. On the Appearance tab. Add sheets to the template 42 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target. and modify their properties accordingly. and click View Properties. 30 In the Project Browser.

To later add a titleblock to a sheet. select the default titleblock. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. 7 Click OK. under Scene Settings. Modifying Render Scene Settings You can create interior and exterior scene settings and save them within the template. jpeg. for example. Be sure that you have installed this software. click Sun. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. By adding a default interior and exterior rendered scene setting to the template. settings. click Environment. if not. and provide a name for the scene. To do so. you could render basic scenes much faster and with greater consistency without the need to spend time modifying these settings. 8 Under Scene Settings. go to the View menu. and click New  ➤ Place Titleblock. click Render Scene. 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors. and then click OK. Background images are available from the AccuRender software. and a Clouds tab appears. choose the appropriate season for plant rendering. You can still add views to the sheet. place. select the Clouds option. and click Rename. 3 Click OK. which is included on the Revit Building CD. 9 Specify the date and time. or targa.TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. while in winter. tiff. and changes the color automatically depending on the sun and sky conditions. Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view. for example. you can install AccuRender by running the install program on the Revit Building CD. Choose from bitmap. it is completely bare. select the titleblock and delete it. ■ ■ ■ 6 Specify the Advanced features: TIP As you select options. 10 Under Plant Season. 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors. ■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. 45 Create new sheets as needed. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. After the sheet is created. Create and modify an exterior scene 1 On the Settings menu. 44 To rename or renumber the sheet. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering. Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering. the relevant tab appears. 43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. a deciduous tree in summer appears in full bloom with leaves. for example. Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog. Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information). and colors. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can also save and load environmental settings. Creating an Office Template | 147 . exterior-default. ■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky. Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background. 5 Specify the background color. if one exists. select Exterior. 2 Under Type. Modifying Render Scene Settings. and click OK.

17 Click OK when finished. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time.11 Specify Culling options: ■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. 15 Provide a name for the new interior scene. and click OK. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 On the File menu. Medium. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. Higher values cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface. This works on opaque faces only. The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflections or transparencies are permitted. Better. Back face culling decreases rendering time and space. ■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. such as jaggy shadows or light leaks.Default. Draft provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. ■ Set values for Reflection and Transparency bounces. This setting is effective for region raytraces. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts. 16 Repeat the steps you performed when creating an exterior scene. Meaningful values are between 0 and 1. This value is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar. Medium. when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts. ■ 13 Specify Raytrace Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft. however. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. but also increases the solution time. Good. Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. This is a very time consuming operation but. but provides the highest quality. the quality also is lower. Best is the slowest. Shadows based on the size of the light source are calculated. ■ ■ ■ Create and modify an interior scene 14 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. These scenes are now part of the template and will provide users with two basic rendering scenes. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. Higher values cause longer rendering times. Modifying Import/Export Settings. Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass. click New. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. Good. for example Interior . 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass. Best. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Best. ■ 12 Specify the Radiosity Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the solution. Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better resolve the value of the pixel. Better. Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess.

select Save As. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. project parameters. Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. Modify export layers for DGN 4 On the File menu. When you create a multi-category schedule. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with Shared Parameters).The Export Layers command maps Revit Building categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. you could use Shared Parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. In this exercise. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Building program installation directory.txt for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. For example.txt for MicroStation). see Scheduling Shared Parameters or Scheduling Project Parameters. These settings are retained within the project template. for example. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. and click Save. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. 9 Select Save As. Revit Building presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. and they become the set mappings for the project. and click Save. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. windows. They cannot be shared with other projects. name the file. 2 For each category. and click Save. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. doors. select Save As. project parameters. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. therefore. When you import a DWG or DXF file. When scheduling. name the file. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. Creating an Office Template | 149 . Modify import line weights 7 On the File menu. and so on. 8 In the dialog box. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. Using Shared Parameters. TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog box corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. name the file. 5 For each category. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Creating Named Print Settings. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. and so on. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Building line weight. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. You can save these mappings to a text file. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs.

20 Select the element categories this parameter applies to. 9 Name the Parameter. Set up project parameters 13 On the Settings menu. 19 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 18 Under Type. 2 Click Create. you can load them into the template. and click OK when finished. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. or use the Help documentation for assistance. 30 On the File menu. you can begin creating parameter groups. 23 To add a shared project parameter. 6 Create as many groups as needed. click Load from Library  ➤ Load Family. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. If a file already exists. 31 Navigate to the directory. and click Open. add required parameters. 21 Click OK. click Project Parameters. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. For information on creating multi-category tags. 5 Enter the group name. 7 Under Parameter group. and specify the Type. For each parameter group. select Project parameter. select the tag. click New. 25 Click OK. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and assign which categories this parameter applies to. click Add. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. The tag is now part of the template. click Shared Parameters. select a parameter value type. 17 Under Discipline. and click OK. 26 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. you can create a list of parameters. select a group that you want to add parameters to. select a parameter discipline type. under Groups. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. click New. enter a parameter name. and choose a shared parameter. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 14 Click Add. 24 Click Select. 150 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . This allows you to name the external parameter file. 10 Click OK. 11 For each parameter group. and select Shared Parameter. After the file is named. 3 Name and save the file. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. 27 Click OK. 8 Under Parameters. you may want to save the file to a network location. 16 Under Name.Set up shared parameters 1 On the File menu. 22 Add project parameters as needed. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise.

and click OK. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. Save the template 12 On the File menu. select a different printer. Creating an Office Template | 151 . you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 15 Name the template. 34 Under Name. 14 Under Save as type. click OK. you can select the printer for each set of named settings within the Print Setup dialog box. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 5 In the New dialog box. click Save. 11 Click OK when finished. For each printer. click Setup. and create new settings for this printer. and the percent of actual size. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. you can set options such as sheet sizes. By going first to the Print command. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. save the file as a template. The only remaining task is to save it. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings.rte). Depending on your office environment. 6 Modify the printer settings. Creating Named Print Settings. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. you should save it to a network path. Create named print settings 1 On the File menu. click Schedule/Quantities. 3 Under Settings. If you need to share this file with others. 9 In the Print dialog box. you need only select a setting. click Setup. and make it your default template file. 2 Under Name. click Print. click New. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. and print. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. you create named print settings. Your template is complete. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. and create additional settings as needed. enter a name for the schedule. and click Save. By creating named settings within the template. 36 When you have completed the schedule. select Template Files (*. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 4 Click Save As. paper placement. make minor modifications if necessary.Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and click Open. In this lesson. 152 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 Select the template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. you could delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. By investing the time to individualize your template. You can also set this template as your default template. This can provide a good starting point for a template. and click Open. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 22 Next to Default template file. select it. Set the template as your default template file 20 On the Settings menu. 23 Navigate to the template location. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. 24 Click OK. loaded components. and click New  ➤ Project. go to the File menu. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. If you have a project. In addition. you modified settings. click Options. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. and saved them to a template. 17 Select Browse. 19 Click OK. In addition. click Browse. 21 Click the File Locations tab.Use the template 16 To use the template.

you learn how to create automatic ceilings in Revit Building.Ceilings 4 In this tutorial. For more information. 153 . You also learn how to change the surface pattern of a ceiling grid. You can also create ceilings by sketching them. You learn how to add ceilings by selecting room boundaries to automatically place the type of ceiling that you select. and how to create a compound ceiling. see the online Help.

After you add ceilings to the model. you learn how to add ceilings to an RCP view of a simple building model.Creating Ceilings In this lesson. You can create automatic ceilings in an RCP (reflected ceiling plan) view of the building model. expand Ceiling Plans. Open c_Ceiling. 154 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You also learn how to create and add a compound ceiling to the building model. you can change the surface pattern of the ceiling grids. The ceiling is displayed. when the room boundary highlights. click Open. Creating Automatic Ceilings In this exercise. you learn how to create ceilings with the AutoCeiling command. and then change the surface pattern of one of the ceiling grids. and double-click Level 1. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 Move your cursor into the upper center room and. You add four different types of ceilings. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Common folder. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 1200mm grid. select it. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Ceiling. Create automatic ceilings 1 In the Project Browser.

When selected. select Finishes . under Materials and Finishes. it displays in the Type Selector. click OK. and click OK. and then click . click in the Material type parameter Value field. NOTE You select one of the grids or the entire ceiling using the TAB key. select it.5 Select the lower center room and. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar.Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. under Name. click Edit/New.Interior . 13 In the Name dialog box. The new ceiling material is applied to the ceiling. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 600mm grid. 15 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. click Duplicate. 6 In the Type Selector. click . Change the ceiling grid surface pattern of room on the left 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 Select the 600 x 600mm ceiling grid located in the room on the left. when the room boundary highlights. Creating Ceilings | 155 . enter Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. 7 Select the room on the left and the room on the right. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. expand Views (all). and then add the ceiling to the building model. You create a new ceiling type. expand Ceiling Plans. 156 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . Close the exercise file without saving your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Create a new ceiling type 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE This common dataset is used in several imperial and metric datasets. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.18 If you want to save your changes. Open c_Condominium. click Open. Creating Compound Ceilings In this exercise. you change the project to Metric. The original project units are imperial. In the steps that follow. you learn how to create a compound ceiling. click the Training Files icon. add layers of material to the ceiling type.rvt located in the Common folder. and double-click First Floor. click Save As. on the File menu.

5 In the Project Units dialog box. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Metal . select Compound Ceiling: Ceiling 1. under Thickness. 8 On the Options Bar. under Material. Add the compound ceiling 19 Move your cursor into the common area of the model and click to insert the Gypsum board on metal furring channels ceiling. specify Millimeters for units.Specify metric project units 2 On the Settings menu. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 12 mm 16 Click OK. under Thickness. click . 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. 3 In the Project Units dialog box. click Project Units. enter 45 mm Layer 3: Structure [1]. 4 In the Format dialog box. click OK. click OK. 13 In the Edit Assembly dialog box.Cold Rolled Channel. click OK. under Thickness. select Finishes . under Layers. Creating Ceilings | 157 . click Insert twice to add two new layers. click Edit for the Structure type parameter value. 15 Define the five layers as follows and in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Layer 1: Core Boundary Layer 2: Structure [1]. click Preview to display the current layers. and click OK. click Edit/New. and click OK. 11 In the Name dialog box. enter 20 mm Layer 4: Core Boundary Layer 5: Structure [1]. click Ceiling.Gypsum Wall Board. under Material. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Metal . enter Gypsum board on metal furring. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box.Interior . 17 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. under Material.Furring. 7 In the Type Selector. click the format button for length. 14 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. under Construction.

21 On the View Control Bar. 158 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . You can also apply thin lines from the View menu. expand Sections (Type 1). click Save As. and double-click Section 1. on the File menu.View the compound ceiling in a section view 20 In the Project Browser under Views (all). and save the exercise file with a unique name. 22 The compound ceiling is visible in the section view of the first floor. TIP You can use the zoom commands to zoom into the ceiling. 23 If you want to save your changes. and click Fine. click the Detail Level control. Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

In addition.Openings 5 You can cut openings through roofs. or ceilings using the Opening command. floor. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and a vertical cut. you cut floor and ceiling openings that expose the stairs beneath them. When creating a hosted opening. In the exercises that follow. floors. and you can create an opening in a roof specifically for a dormer. you have the option to cut perpendicularly through the face of a roof. roof. You can cut vertically through a selected floor. 159 . or ceiling. or ceiling.

View current dormer construction 1 In the current 3D View.rvt located in the Metric folder. notice the existing dormer. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and you should create a view where you can see the dormer geometry. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Cutting Roof Openings In this lesson. In this case. This allows you to precisely define the borders of the opening. the view range of a wireframe view was modified to display the entire dormer roof. To use the Opening tool to cut a dormer opening. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and vertical cut. 160 | Chapter 5 Openings . the project must have an existing dormer. click Open. Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. you cut an opening in a roof with an existing dormer. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings.

6 Move the cursor over the main roof. The display is wireframe so each dormer component can be seen and selected when defining the borders of the opening.2 In the Project Browser. The dormer windows are above the roof so they do not display. click Opening. The view range was modified so the cut plane captured the entire dormer. select Pick a roof to be cut by a dormer opening. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Modelling. expand 3D Views. WARNING Do not select the dormer roof. and. This is an interior 3D view. Select the main roof to be cut. Notice no opening exists in the roof for the dormer. This view has been set up specifically for the dormer. click to select it. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand Floor Plans. when the edges of the roof highlight. expand Views (all).Dormer. right-click the Design Bar. The camera is located in the attic and is pointing to the dormer interior. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. and click OK. You need to cut an opening in the roof to accommodate the dormer. and double-click Attic View. and double-click Roof . Cutting Roof Openings | 161 . Create the dormer opening 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all).

when it highlights. a side face of a wall. a bottom face of a floor. 8 Zoom in around the dormer. select it. or a model line on the face of the roof to be cut. you define the boundary of the dormer opening. an edge of the roof to be cut. Sketch lines display along the border between the dormer roof and the selected roof. 7 Place the cursor over the dormer.Next. Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face. 162 | Chapter 5 Openings . and. and select the exterior face of the three walls that define the dormer.

14 In the Project Browser. and the horizontal line on the bottom dormer wall does not extend to the corners. Although the overlapping lines are not a problem. the gaps in the bottom sketch line need to be closed. 13 Zoom out to see the entire plan view. 10 Select the lower sketch line. under 3D Views. 9 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Boundary. click Modify. The dormer opening in the roof is apparent. and notice the drag controls on each end. 11 Drag each control to the corner until it intersects with the vertical sketch line on that side. Cutting Roof Openings | 163 . double-click Attic View.Notice the sketch lines overlap in places.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box.15 On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening In this exercise. 164 | Chapter 5 Openings . Create a perpendicular opening 1 On the View toolbar. click . click Close. click Open. 2 Using the spin function. NOTE If you want to save this file.rvt located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. select Save As from the File menu. you create a roof opening that is perpendicular to the roof face.

when it highlights. click Modify. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the main roof. or ceiling and cut perpendicular to face. and. the opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. Cutting Roof Openings | 165 . 7 On the Options Bar. and click Modelling. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. which is the side of the roof without a dormer. right-click the Design Bar.3 On the Design Bar. 8 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof. click Opening. floor. and click OK. click . select Pick a face of a roof. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. The opening on the right is cut vertically. select it. In the following illustration.

166 | Chapter 5 Openings .9 On the Design Bar. and. click Finish Sketch. when it highlights. 10 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. select it.

NOTE If you want to save this file. click Open. Create a vertically cut opening 1 On the View toolbar. and constrain it like any other element. You can move it. dimension it. 2 Using the spin function. Creating a Vertical Roof Opening In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click 12 On the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings.The opening is an element independent of the roof. click Close. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. and click Finish Sketch. Cutting Roof Openings | 167 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. . spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. change the shape. notice the tool displays. you create a roof opening that is cut vertically through the roof. select Save As from the File menu. click . 11 On the Options Bar.

and click Modelling. or ceiling and cut vertically. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. select it. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. floor.3 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. In the following illustration. when it highlights. click Opening. and. select Pick a roof. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular. 6 Click OK. 168 | Chapter 5 Openings . click Modify. right-click the Design Bar. 7 Move the cursor over the main roof.

click Lines. 14 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. and double-click Roof . click Finish Sketch. 13 On the View Toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. click .Because the cut is vertical. Cutting Roof Openings | 169 . it is easier to sketch the boundary on a plan view. expand Views (all). 11 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof on the side without the dormer. and. select it. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. click .Dormer. when it highlights. expand Floor Plans.

You can move it. dimension it. 170 | Chapter 5 Openings .rvt located in the Metric folder. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. and double-click Section 1. notice the tool. change the shape. click Close. select Save As from the File menu. you cut openings in a floor to accommodate a set of stairs that are already in place. 15 On the Options Bar. and constrain it like any other element. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. . you cut an opening on the second level of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs. click 16 On the File menu. NOTE If you want to save this file. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). and click Finish Sketch. Cut a floor opening 1 In the Project Browser. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. The exercises in this lesson must be done sequentially. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings In this lesson. expand Views (all). click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Cutting an Opening in a Floor In this exercise. click Open.The opening is an element independent of the roof. In this exercise. you created a roof opening that was cut vertically through the roof.

the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. or ceiling and cut vertically. However. floor. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 171 . TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. The first click specifies the start point. right-click the Design Bar. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. and click OK. and the level 1 and 2 lines. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. This is useful when sketching the opening in a plan view.Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. In the following illustration. click Opening. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. select Pick a roof. When cutting a floor or ceiling for a stairway. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Modelling. Before cutting the floor opening. a section view provides an excellent vantage point to select faces or planes to cut. click Ref Plane. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom.

under Views (all). Otherwise. click Model Graphics Style. under Sections (Filled Arrow). 9 On the Design Bar. 172 | Chapter 5 Openings . Notice the new floor opening. 11 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. click Finish Sketch. NOTE The next exercise requires this project in its current state. and click Wireframe. you may close the project with or without saving it. You are prompted to select a view. and the reference plane you added previously. 12 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. click Lines. 10 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1. do so now. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 8 On the View Control bar. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. If you intend to complete the next exercise. the stairs.6 Select the floor on Level 2. click .

8 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. click .Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling In this exercise. select Pick a roof. 5 On the Options Bar. you cut a ceiling opening for the stairwell. under Views (all). Dataset Continue using the dataset you were using in the previous exercise. click Finish Sketch. Notice the new ceiling opening. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 173 . under Views (all). Cut a ceiling opening. and click OK. and click Open View. 3 Select the ceiling below level 2. under Sections (Filled Arrow). 2 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. and click Modelling. the interior face of the wall. Use the following illustration as a guide. 9 In the Project Browser. floor. or ceiling and cut vertically. select Reflected Ceiling Plan: Level 1. 4 In the Go To View dialog box. and the right and lower border of the stairs and floor you added in the previous exercise. double-click Level 1 Interior View. click Opening. double-click Section 1. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Sketch a rectangle that borders the reference plane. right-click the Design Bar.

rvt located in the Metric folder. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. and the level 1 and 2 lines. and double-click Section 1. Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool In this exercise. click Ref Plane. you must sketch in a plan view. NOTE If you want to save this file. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. When using the shaft tool to cut an opening. Before cutting the opening. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. however. you cut an opening through several levels of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs and to account for the possibility of extending the stairs up another level. However. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Open. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). select Save As from the File menu.10 On the File menu. 174 | Chapter 5 Openings . expand Views (all). and the second click specifies the end of the plane. click Close. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. Add a reference plane 1 In the Project Browser. The first click specifies the start point.

select Floor Plan: Level 2. 7 On the View Control bar. 16 In the Project Browser. Entering a value for base offset ensures that the shaft opening does not cut through the floor at level 1. This accounts for the possibility of extending the existing stairs up another level. and click OK. click Opening. the ceiling of level 1 would remain intact. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Create shaft opening. 9 On the Options Bar.4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. and click Wireframe. click Finish Sketch. under Sections (Filled Arrow). the stairs. 15 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 14 Click OK. click Lines. click Properties. right-click the Design Bar. 11 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. Enter 3400 for Base Offset. 12 On the Design Bar. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. double-click Section 1. and click Modelling. ■ ■ Select Up to level: Roof for Top Constraint. click Model Graphics Style. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 175 . click . If you selected level 2 for the base constraint. 10 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. but does cut the ceiling of level 1. and click Open View. and the reference plane you added previously. under Views (all). 6 In the Go To View dialog box. under Constraints. specify the following parameters: ■ Select Level 1 for Base Constraint.

Notice the shaft opening that cuts through several levels. and roof that interferes with the defined volume of the opening. 176 | Chapter 5 Openings . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. ceiling. you can cut a single opening through every floor. Using the shaft tool.

balusters.Railings 6 In this tutorial. posts. you learn how to create a railing and customize it using design information for rails. 177 . and panels.

Before you lay out the railing. click New ➤ Project. 7 On the Options Bar.rfa. M_Baluster .Creating Railings In this lesson. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 2 In the New Project dialog box.rfa. and click Open. and M_Post . press the CTRL key. 8 Draw a 4300 mm vertical line from bottom to top as shown. Creating the Railing Layout In this exercise.Newel. M_Baluster Panel 1. you create a railing and add components to it. The railing layout in this exercise is based on these custom components. verify that DefaultMetric. Open five component families 1 On the File menu. 6 On the Design Bar. 178 | Chapter 6 Railings .rfa. you learn how to create and place a railing using design information such as the shape and finish material of the rails. 3 On the File menu. click Railing. and click OK. M_Post . 4 In the Open dialog box. Project is selected under Create new. click Lines. select M_Baluster . select Chain. you need to load railing components from the library provided in the drawing template. between the balusters.rfa .rfa.rte is selected as the Template file from the Metric Templates folder.Square w Ball.Custom4. Make certain that you draw the line from bottom to top because these starting and ending points are used to justify the railing later. such as panels. Sketch a plan view of two railing lines 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You also learn how to use a pattern editor to place balusters and posts and how to customize the railing with additional components.Custom3. navigate to Metric Library/Balusters.

Matte for Name. and then click . click in the Material field. click Insert. TIP You may need to zoom in until the angular dimension increments by a single degree. select Metal . and then click 17 In the Materials dialog box. click Edit/New. 16 In row 1. In row 2. enter -25 mm for Offset. and click OK. and then do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In row 1. select M_Rectangular Handrail : 50 x 50 mm for Profile. Matte for Name. In row 2.Paint Finish .Paint Finish . click Duplicate. click Edit for Rail Structure. . click Railing Properties.9 Draw a second 4300 mm line at an angle of 37 degrees as shown. select Metal . click in the Material field. and click OK. In row 2. 19 In the Materials dialog box. enter Railing with Glass Panel for Name. enter 300 mm for Height. In row 2. Creating Railings | 179 . 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box.Dark Gray. Specify the railing parameters 10 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 In the Name dialog box. 15 In the Edit Rails dialog box.Dark Gray. enter Top for Name. enter Bottom for Name. and click OK. 18 In the Edit Rails dialog box. in row 2.

you change the pattern of balusters and posts with the pattern editor to show different design options for the railing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select M_Baluster . 180 | Chapter 6 Railings . 30 Click OK three times. click Edit for Baluster Placement. Adjusting Railing Parameters In this exercise. 24 In row 3.Glass for Baluster Family. from previous.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. from previous. Adjusting Railing Parameters. 23 In row 2. Select M_Baluster Panel 1: 600mm . Enter 380 mm for Dist. Select Bottom for Base.rvt. under Construction. select M_Post. click Shading with Edges.20 In the Edit Rails dialog box. 26 Select Beginning for Justify. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 In row 2. and then click Duplicate. 29 In row 3.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. click . in row 1. under Main pattern. 34 On the File menu. enter 230 mm for Dist. 25 In row 4. A new row is displayed. Lay out the post pattern 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click OK. 33 On the View menu. select M_Post. IMPORTANT Completing this tutorial is required to successfully complete some exercises in the tutorial on Stairs.Square w Ball : 60mm for Baluster Family and enter 50 mm for Top offset. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. click Finish Sketch. from previous. 31 On the Design Bar. select M_Post . Lay out the main baluster pattern 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Posts. Enter 380 mm for Dist. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Glass Panel for Name. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. click on row 2.Custom 3 : 25mm for Baluster Family. Select Bottom for Base. 32 On the Toolbar.

4 On the Options Bar. click Modify and select the railing. click .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. View the beginning justification option 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click . 7 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Construction. 17 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. expand Views (all). View the spread pattern to fit option 14 On the Options Bar.rvt. Training_Railing. click Edit/New. under Construction. The railing layout reflects the assigned center justification option. expand Elevations. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. View the center justification option 9 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. Creating Railings | 181 . click Edit for Baluster Placement. View the end justification option 3 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Main pattern. 12 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 18 Click OK three times. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the railing. The railing layout reflects the assigned end justification option. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 Click OK three times. click . select End for Justify. select Center for Justify. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. click Edit/New. 8 Click OK three times. The railing layout reflects the beginning justification option that you assigned in the previous exercise. under Main pattern. under Main pattern. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. and double-click East. click Edit for Baluster Placement. under Construction.

View post options 29 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. 33 Under Posts. select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. View the custom baluster with specified spacing excess length fill option 24 On the Options Bar. under Main pattern. click . under Construction. click Edit for Baluster Placement. select Angles Greater Than for Corner Posts At. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . click Edit for Baluster Placement. and enter 150 mm for Spacing.The railing layout reflects the assigned spread pattern to fit justification option. click Edit/New. 26 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Construction. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Construction. click Edit/New. and select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill.Custom3 : 25mm for Excess Length Fill. 35 On the Toolbar. Observe that the balusters that occur in the excess length fill area extend below the bottom rail. click . 34 Click OK three times. You cannot assign base top and bottom offset parameters to excess length fill balusters. enter 54 degrees for Angle. select Beginning for Justify. 23 Click OK three times. 182 | Chapter 6 Railings . 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 28 Click OK three times. select M_Baluster . click Edit/New. under Main pattern. custom baluster excess length fill. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification. 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. View the truncate pattern excess length fill option 19 On the Options Bar. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification and truncated excess length fill options. 32 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Main pattern. and spacing options. click .

Since the angle is less than 54 degrees. double-click East. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In row 2. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. click Edit/New. Specify the final railing layout 36 On the Design Bar. 44 On the File menu. click Modify and select the railing. enter 0 mm for Dist.The railing layout reflects the assigned minimum angle limit for the corner post option. 37 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating Railings | 183 . from previous. select Each Segment End for Corner Posts At. click . a corner post does not occur. In row 4.rvt. 41 Under Posts. click Edit for Baluster Placement. Select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. 43 In the Project Browser. 42 Click OK three times. from previous. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Main pattern. enter 380 mm for Dist. under Construction. The railing layout reflects the assigned distance and justification options.

184 | Chapter 6 Railings .

Roofs 7 In this tutorial. you learn how to add fascia. and soffits to the roofs that you create. gutters. In addition. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Building. 185 .

expand Floor Plans. Open m_Roofs. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. and double-click Level 1. 5 In the Go To View dialog box. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Before you can sketch the roof profile. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. expand Views (all). 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box. and mansard roofs. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. You create roofs from footprints and by extrusion: the two roof creation methods in Revit Building. you learn to create several different types of roofs. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You do not need to create the work plane. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. 186 | Chapter 7 Roofs . gable.Creating Roofs In this lesson. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 4 Click OK. including hip. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. click Open. and click OK. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. shed. select Name. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof.rvt located in the Metric folder. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that Section: Section1 is selected.

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. click Ref Plane. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions.Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating Roofs | 187 .

12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. select Chain. click Lines. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 188 | Chapter 7 Roofs . sketch the roof profile. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. Next. 13 On the Options Bar. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. 18 Select the edge of the roof. and select the second wall. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 19 On the Tools toolbar. Next. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click . Creating Roofs | 189 . and then select the exterior face of the wall. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and double-click Section 1. click to display the model. press TAB.16 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 21 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. expand Sections (Type 1). click . and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. press CTRL. The roof should resemble the following illustration. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway.

click Attach for Top/Base. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. 190 | Chapter 7 Roofs .24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.

clear Defines slope. 13 When you see the informational dialog box. 6 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. click . Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. select both slope definition lines. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. 5 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 Press CTRL. By default. 7 On the Options Bar. verify that Floor Plan: Garage Roof is selected. click Finish Roof. m_Roofs. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Next. verify that Defines slope is selected. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Next. sketch the roof footprint. 8 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. Creating Roofs | 191 . 2 In the Go To View dialog box. under Dimensions. click Pick Walls.rvt. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. and click Open View. click Modify.

clear Defines slope. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. When you complete the roof. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. press TAB. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Roofs.rvt. and double-click Level 3. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint.14 On the View toolbar. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 192 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 3 On the Options Bar. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model.

Creating Roofs | 193 . 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. select Defines Slope. 10 On the View menu. 17 When you see the informational dialog box. sketch the chimney opening. 15 On the Options bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click . 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. click Modify.6 Click to select all the walls. 13 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Next. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. add new slope lines to the roof. 8 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan.

5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. click to view the new roof in the model. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. m_Roofs.18 On the View toolbar. select Defines slope. and double-click Level 2. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 194 | Chapter 7 Roofs . click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls.rvt. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint.

and click . select the left vertical slope definition line. close the roof sketch. click . verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. clear Defines Slope. click Lines. Creating Roofs | 195 . Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 9 On the Tools toolbar. using the following illustration for guidance. 10 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 7 On the Options Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 11 To trim the first line segment.Next. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.

20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. Next. 14 Under Constraints. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. 16 On the View toolbar. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. and click OK. click Finish Roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click Modify. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house.Next. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. click 17 Click to display the model. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 196 | Chapter 7 Roofs .

Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint. click . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. clear Defines Slope.23 On the Tools toolbar. and enter 300 for Overhang. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Roofs | 197 . m_Roofs. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof.

and click OK. 16 Under Constraints. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls. 198 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 19 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 13 On the Options Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. you add a slope-defining line. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Modify. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. and press ENTER. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click . 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. press TAB. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. enter 0 for Overhang. 10 To trim the first line segment. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. select Defines slope. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 6 On the Options Bar. select the left vertical roof line. click Roof Properties.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way.

Creating Roofs | 199 . 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. To help locate the position of each split. click . you need to add two reference planes. expand 3D Views. and double-click 3D. expand Views (all). click to activate the roof footprint sketch. 7 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. click Split Walls and Lines. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. and enter 600 for Offset.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Before you can add slope arrows. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. expand Floor Plans.20 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. and double-click Level 2. 4 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 9 On the Tools menu. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. m_Roofs.

Next. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. click Modify. 12 On the Options Bar. . Aligning Roof Eaves. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. verify is selected. and click 19 Under Constraints. 200 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 18 Press CTRL. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. Next. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 11 On the Design Bar. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line.15 to add the second slope arrow. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 Under Dimensions. click Slope Arrow. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. add two new slope arrows. and move the cursor to rotate the arrow. select Slope for Specify. and then click OK. select both slope arrows. clear Defines Slope.

13 On the View toolbar. When aligning eaves. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 3 On the Options Bar. click . 10 On the Options Bar. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. When you sketch a hip roof. the adjacent eave heights must align. select Defines Slope. expand Floor Plans. click to display the model. under Dimensions. on the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. The eave lines display with a dimension. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 5 On the Options Bar. click . enter 800 mm for Rise/1000.rvt. click Align Eaves. 12 On the Design Bar. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. When eave heights differ. expand Views (all). select a method to align the eaves. Next. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. and click OK. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. Creating Roofs | 201 . and double-click Garage Roof.Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. click Finish Roof. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 6 With the two gable end lines selected. m_Roofs.

on the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. under Constraints. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. click Open. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 202 | Chapter 7 Roofs . and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating a Mansard Roof. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click the Training Files icon. expand Elevations. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. click Modify. Open m_Mansard_Roof. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Select the roof and. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. click . on the Options Bar. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. and double-click North. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box.14 If you want to save your changes. click Save As.

click to display the model. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 7 In the Project Browser. click . 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and then select Defines slope. click Finish Roof. press TAB. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. and double-click Level 3. and select the remaining three lines. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating Roofs | 203 . 17 On the View toolbar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Lines. Next. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. expand Floor Plans. under Dimensions. click . 14 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff.6 On the View toolbar.

click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and soffits. 8 In the Name dialog box. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK. Open c_Condominium. and click OK twice. on the File menu. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. and open the Roofs folder. gutters. and click Open. 5 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. open the Profiles folder. Creating Fascia. click the Training Files icon. Gutters. 3 Press CTRL. you can easily create its fascia. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box.rvt located in the Common folder. enter Built-up Fascia. under Construction. click Save As. 2 In the Open dialog box.rfa. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. and soffits in Revit Building. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 204 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 1 On the File menu. click Open. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. open the Metric Library folder.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. and Soffits In this lesson. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. gutters. After you create a roof. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile.18 If you want to save your changes. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. you learn how to create roof fascia.

Creating Gutters In this exercise. Gutters. Creating Gutters. and Soffits | 205 .11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. Creating Fascia. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.

3 In the Properties dialog box. Creating Soffits. and then click . Creating Soffits In this exercise. and click OK.rvt. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to place a roof soffit. click Edit/New. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. under Construction. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 10 Click to place the gutter.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK three times. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 2 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 206 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. click in the Value field for Material. 8 In the Materials dialog box. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. c_Condominium.

Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 5 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. expand Views.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). 4 Select the roof. expand 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Gutters. click Pick Roofs. 3 On the Design Bar. c_Condominium. 6 In the Project Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. expand Floor Plans. Creating Fascia.rvt. and double-click 3D. and Soffits | 207 .

and then select the soffit to join them. 9 If you want to save your changes. 208 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 8 Select the roof. click Save As. on the File menu.7 On the Tools menu. click Join Geometry. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

and work with a stair calculator. 209 . you learn how to create and modify straight. add railings to your landings. u-shaped.Stairs 8 In this tutorial. You learn to create special feature stairs. and semi-circular runs of stairs.

rvt file located in the Metric folder. risers and stringers. Open the m_Stair_Exercise. expand Views (all). Draw a straight stair run 5 Zoom in on the entry way. click Stairs. such as treads. 210 | Chapter 8 Stairs . click Open. The outline of the level 2 floors and wall display as an underlay. add. select Level 2 for Underlay. If you add stairs to a drawing in plan view. railings from another project. You learn to work with different stair components. The level where the stairs originate displays as your current working level. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create and align a straight run of stairs to provide access from the first level to the second level of the building model. you can display both of the levels that you are working with. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1. 7 Using the following illustration as a guide. The level where the stairs end displays as a screened background after you select it as an underlay. you learn how to create runs of typical and special feature stairs with the stairs aligned correctly between the levels in your project. 4 Click OK. 2 On the View menu. View the first level lobby and second level underlay 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Stairs In this lesson. under Graphics. Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. specify the start point for the stair run. click the Training Files icon. click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. use the Stair Calculator to add a straight run of stairs to your drawing. and then modify.

click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Design Bar. Creating Stairs | 211 .8 Specify the stair run endpoint as shown.

212 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 13 Select the top edge of the stair run as the entity to align as shown.Align the top edge of the stair run with the front edge of the second level 10 Zoom in on the top of the stair run. click . 12 Select the front edge of the second level as the alignment line as shown. 11 On the Toolbar. The top edge of the stair run is now aligned with the front edge of the second level.

Align the stair run centerline with the wall centerline
14 Select the wall centerline as the alignment line as shown. TIP On the Options Bar, click Wall centerlines on the Prefer menu.

15 Select the stair run centerline as the entity to align as shown.

The stair run centerline is now aligned with the wall centerline.

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view.

Creating Stairs | 213

Specify new main lobby stair parameters
17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections, and double-click Stair Section. 18 On the View menu, click Thin Lines.

TIP Hold the cursor over the stairs to see the risers and treads. 19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 20 On the Options Bar, click .

21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 22 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 23 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Main Stairs for Name, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 8 Stairs

24 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Treads, enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. Under Treads, select Stair Nosing - Radius : 20 mm for Nosing Profile. Under Treads, enter 50 mm for Tread Thickness. Under Risers, clear End with Riser. Under Risers, select Straight for Riser Type. Under Risers, enter 20 mm for Riser Thickness. Under Risers, select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. Under Stringers, select Match Level for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, enter 305 mm for Stringer Height. Under Stringers, enter 65 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers, enter 180 mm for Landing Carriage Height. .

25 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value box for Tread Material, and click

26 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 27 Click in the Value box for Riser Material, and click .

28 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 29 Click in the Value box for Stringer Material, and click .

30 In the Materials dialog box, select Wood - Cherry for Name, and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. Because you specified ending the stair run with a tread instead of a riser, a warning dialog box displays, telling you that the actual number of risers is different from the desired number of risers. 32 Click OK to ignore this warning message. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width. 34 Click OK.

The stair section reflects the new assigned parameters. 35 On the File menu, click Save As, and save this exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 36 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run.

Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run
In this exercise, you use design information about a railing from another project and create special feature stairs with concave stringers from the straight run of stairs you completed in the previous exercise.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Changing the railing type
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view. 2 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select both railings. 3 In the Type Selector, select Railing : Railing with Glass Panel.

Creating Stairs | 215

NOTE If the panels do not display in the railings, go to the Type Properties of the railing. Click Edit next to the Baluster Placement parameter. If selected, clear the check box for the User Baluster Per Tread on Stairs option. Notice that the railing start post is offset above the level of the floor.

Adjust the railing start post offset
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select one of the railings. 5 On the Options Bar, click .

6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 8 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 1, enter -200 mm for Base offset. 9 Click OK three times. 10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

The railing start post is now at floor level.

Change the stair shape in plan view
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 12 Zoom in on the stair run. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 15 Press and hold CTRL, select the left and right stair run boundary lines, and delete them.

216 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Draw the left boundary arc
16 On the Design Bar, click Boundary. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 Specify the intersection of the bottom riser and inside wall face as the arc start point as shown.

19 Specify the left end of the top riser as the arc endpoint.

Creating Stairs | 217

20 Specify a point to the left of the stair run for the arc midpoint approximately as shown.

Mirror the left boundary arc
21 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left boundary arc. 22 On the Toolbar, click .

23 Select the stair run centerline as the mirror axis.

Draw the new first riser
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the first riser and delete it.

218 | Chapter 8 Stairs

25 On the Design Bar, click Riser. 26 On the Options Bar, click .

27 Specify the lower end of the left boundary arc as the arc start point as shown.

28 Specify the lower end of the right boundary arc as the arc endpoint as shown.

29 Specify the intersection of the front wall edge and the stair run centerline as the arc midpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 219

30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

31 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click lobby stair view.

The stair run from the first floor main lobby is now complete. 32 On the File menu, click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs.

220 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs
In this exercise, you create and align runs of side stairs with railings.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Specify the lobby side stair run parameters
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the View menu, click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Level 3 for Underlay, and click OK.

4 Zoom in on the upper left of the lobby area. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs, and then click Stairs Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Lobby Main Stairs for Type, and click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Side Stairs for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Risers, select End with Riser. Under Risers, select None for Riser Type. Under Construction, enter -300 mm for Extend Below Base. Under Stringers, select Do not trim for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, select None for Right Stringer. Under Stringers, select None for Left Stringer. Under Stringers, select 1 for Middle Stringers. Under Stringers, enter 100 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Treads, select Front, Left and Right for Apply Nosing Profile.

10 Click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width, and click OK.

Creating Stairs | 221

Place the lobby side stair run
12 Specify a point near the left edge of the landing for the stair run start point, and then specify a point to the left for the stair endpoint. NOTE The exact location of the stair run is not critical. You specify its final location in subsequent steps. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Move the stair run into the corner of the level 2 opening
14 Zoom in on the upper left side of the stair run. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, hold down CTRL, and select the stair run and both railings. 16 On the Toolbar, click .

17 Specify the upper left endpoint of the railing as the move start point as shown.

18 Specify the upper left corner of the level 2 opening as the move endpoint as shown.

The top of the stair run is now positioned in the corner of the level 2 opening.

222 | Chapter 8 Stairs

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Specify a new side stair run railing type
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 21 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe. Notice that both railings are on the outside of the treads. This is because the original stairs that you duplicated, the main lobby stairs, have left and right stringers that hosted the railings. Because the lobby side stairs have only a center stringer, you need to flip the railings so they rest on the stair treads. 22 Select each railing, right-click, and click Flip Orientation.

Mirror the lobby side stair run
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the side stair run and both railings. 25 On the Toolbar, click .

26 Specify the main lobby stair run centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

Creating Stairs | 223

The lobby side stair run is mirrored to the right side of the lobby.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The lobby side stairs and railings are now complete. 28 On the File menu, click Save. 29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings.

Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings
In this exercise, you create and modify railings for a landing and then extend the railings from the side stairs in the previous exercise to the railing on the landing.

224 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Sketch the left side level 2 landing railing path
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom in on the level 2 landing. 3 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left main stair railing. 4 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 7 Click to specify the sketch line start point approximately as shown.

8 Move the cursor down and specify the next sketch point as shown.

9 Move the cursor to the right and specify the sketch endpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 225

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left railing sketch line of the main stairs. 11 Select the endpoint of the sketch line for the railing as shown.

12 Drag the arc sketch line endpoint up to the right end of the new horizontal sketch line as shown.

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Level 2 Landing.

226 | Chapter 8 Stairs

15 Zoom in and on the View toolbar, click

to reorient the view to look as shown.

Create the right side level 2 landing railing
16 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 17 Select the right lobby main stair railing and delete it. 18 Select the left lobby main stair railing. 19 On the Toolbar, click .

20 Specify the lobby main stair centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

The new lobby main stair and level 2 landing railing layout is mirrored to the right side of the stair run.

21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Level 2 Landing.

Creating Stairs | 227

Extend the lobby side stair railing onto the landing
22 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 23 Zoom in on the left side of the level 2 landing. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper lobby side stair railing.

25 On Options Bar, click Edit. 26 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 27 Click to specify the right endpoint of the railing sketch line for the line start point as shown.

28 Move the cursor 440 mm to the right and specify the sketch line endpoint as shown.

228 | Chapter 8 Stairs

29 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} and zoom in on the railing extension.

The railing now extends onto the landing.

Modify the railing extension parameters
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select No Connector for Tangent Joins. 35 Click OK twice.

Creating Stairs | 229

36 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 37 On the Options Bar, click .

38 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Add Vertical/Horizontal Segments for Tangent Joins, and click Edit for Baluster Placement. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 2, select None for Baluster Family. 41 Click OK three times.

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 43 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 44 Select the 440 mm railing extension sketch line segment. 45 On the Options Bar, select Custom for Height Correction and enter 170 mm. 46 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

230 | Chapter 8 Stairs

47 On the File menu, click Save. 48 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run.

Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run
In this exercise, you create a u-shaped run of stairs in plan view, and then add a railing and extend the stairs to another level in a three-dimensional (3D) view. When you are adding stairs that turn corners in plan view, it is easier to align the stairs if you mark the edge of the landing with a reference plane first.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset from the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Draw a reference plane
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on the stairwell on the left side of the building.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options Bar, click and enter 528 mm for Offset.

5 Move your cursor over the left edge of the exterior wall and place a vertical reference plane to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

Creating Stairs | 231

7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the Name dialog box. 18 Click OK three times. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. Dark Gray Matte for Name.The new reference plane. enter Exit Stairs for Name. 20 Move the cursor up 2040 mm and specify the stair run next point as shown. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. select Metal . and then click Edit/New. select Finishes . 8 Under Dimensions. 232 | Chapter 8 Stairs .Paint Finish. and then click Stairs Properties. 16 Under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. click Stairs. select for Tread Material Value. and click OK. Specify the exit stairs parameters 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the Materials dialog box. select for Stringer Material Value. under Treads. 15 In the Materials dialog box. enter 915 mm for Width. Dark Gray Matte for Name. 13 In the Materials dialog box. select for Riser Material Value.5 mm as indicated by the temporary dimension. and click OK.Exterior: Precast Concrete Panels for Name. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type.Paint Finish. click Duplicate. Draw the exit stairs 19 Click to specify the midpoint of the landing edge as the stair run start point as shown. is at 864. enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 14 Under Materials and Finishes. measured from the exterior wall centerline. select Metal .

22 Drag the cursor down and specify the intersection of the landing edge and the reference plane as the stair run endpoint as shown. The exit stair run layout is complete.21 Move the cursor to the right and specify the intersection of the next-to-last riser line and the reference plane as the stair run next point as shown. Creating Stairs | 233 .

View the exit stairs 24 In the Project Browser.23 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 26 Hold CTRL and select two of the exterior walls of the exit stairwell. 234 | Chapter 8 Stairs . and double-click Exit Stairs. 25 Zoom in on the exit stairwell. and the exit door. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all).

32 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating Stairs | 235 . in row 2. click . hold down CTRL. click Edit/New. 35 Click OK three times. The selected objects are hidden. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Object. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Construction. 30 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar. Specify a new railing type 28 Zoom in on the stair run.Round1 : 25mm for Baluster Family. under Posts. select M_Baluster . and the exit stairs are visible. 31 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select Railing : 900mm Pipe. click Edit for Baluster Placement.27 On the View Control Bar. 34 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. and select both railings.

click Modify. 236 | Chapter 8 Stairs . under Constraints. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run In this exercise.Add another exit stairs flight 36 On the Design Bar. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. 40 On the File menu. 37 On the Options Bar. Turn on the display of the exit stairwell exterior walls and exit door 39 On the View Control Bar. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. click . and click OK. and select the exit stairs. you create a semi-circular run of stairs and then modify the winders and the railing. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.

Under Risers. select Concrete . Training_Stairs. for Tread Material Value. 6 In the name dialog box. expand Floor Plans. click OK. select 16 for Desired Number of Risers. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Construction. 16 Click to specify the midpoint of the concrete slab edge as the stair run center point as shown. and click OK. click .rvt. and double-click Level 1. enter 0 mm for Nosing Length. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 Under Materials and Finishes. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. select for Monolithic Material Value. and click Edit/New. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. Under Construction. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. Under Treads. enter 1 mm for Tread Thickness. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box under Dimensions. Under Stringers. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. select Monolithic Stairs.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 1300 mm for Width. click Run.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. enter Semicircular Stairs for Name. enter 5 mm for Riser Thickness. select 9 In the Materials dialog box. Specify the semi-circular stair run parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. and click OK. enter 200 mm for Landing Carriage Height. 11 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. Under Treads. and then click Stairs Properties. click Duplicate. 2 Zoom in on the exterior concrete pad above the north exterior wall of the building. Creating Stairs | 237 . TIP You can use the shortcut key SM to snap only to midpoints. Under Risers. and click OK. click Stairs. select Concrete . 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. Draw the semi-circular stair run 14 On the Design Bar. Under Stringers. enter 200 mm for Maximum Riser Height. enter 0 mm for Landing Overlap. Under Risers. enter 300 mm for Stringer Carriage Height.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name.

and press ENTER. 19 Move the cursor counterclockwise until the display indicates that there are 0 risers remaining. as shown. 18 On the keyboard. enter 1310 for Radius as shown. and click to specify the arc end point. 238 | Chapter 8 Stairs .17 Drag the cursor to the right along the slab edge. The semi-circular stair run is complete.

TIP You may need to select the outer railing and flip its orientation to align it to the pad. expand 3D Views. and double-click Exterior Stairs. Modify the semi-circular stair run parameters 21 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. Creating Stairs | 239 . expand Views (all).20 On the Design Bar.

The underside of winder parameter is smooth. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Stepped for Underside of Winder. 26 Click OK twice.

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with no overlap. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 28 On the Options Bar, click .

29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, enter 300 mm for Landing Overlap. 31 Click OK twice.

240 | Chapter 8 Stairs

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with a 300 mm overlap.

Specify new semi-circular stair run railing parameters
32 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 33 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe.

34 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save. 35 On the File menu, click Close.

Working with the Stair Calculator
In this exercise, you create two sets of stairs side by side within a new project. The first set of stairs uses the default settings to calculate the slope. The second set of stairs uses the stair calculator to calculate the slope of the stairs. After creating both stairs, you add dimensions to them to see how the tread depth and stair slope adjust based on the changes made in the stair calculator.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤  Project. In the New Project dialog box, under Template File, click Browse. Open the DefaultMetric.rte file located in the Metric Templates folder.

Creating Stairs | 241

Create a set of stairs using the default settings
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 2 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click OK. 4 In the center of the Level 1 Floor Plan, click to specify the stair run start point, move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete, and click to specify the end of the stair run.

5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 6 On the View Toolbar, click .

When you created these stairs, the slope was calculated automatically. In the steps that follow, you create a set of stairs using the stair calculator to define the stair slope.

242 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Create a set of stairs using the stair calculator
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 9 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog box, enter Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope, and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Calculation Rules. 14 In the Stair Calculator dialog box, select Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation. The Stair Calculator computes actual tread depth using the following Calculation Rule equation: X * Rise + Y * Depth = Z X is the value to multiply the actual riser height indicated by the stair properties; Y is the value to multiply the actual tread depth, and Z is the result that lies within threshold minimum and maximum values range based on either design standards or building codes. 15 Enter 680.0 mm for Z, enter 695.0 mm for Maximum Result for Stair Calculator, and enter 670.0 mm for Minimum Result for Stair Calculator. 16 Click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 19 To the right of the stairs you created previously, click to specify the stair run start point, and move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete. NOTE When specifying the stair run starting point, try to align it with the bottom of the stairs you created previously. This allows you to make a better comparison of the slope when you view the stairs together in a 3D view at the end of the exercise.

20 After all the risers have been created, click to specify the stair run end point. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Notice the stairs created using the stair calculator have a longer run than the first set of stairs you created. 22 On the View menu, click Zoom  ➤  Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around both sets of stairs. 23 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 24 On both sets of stairs, add dimensions to the bottom tread and the stair run as shown.

Creating Stairs | 243

25 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 26 Select the right stair run, Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog box, notice the Actual Tread Depth is 332.2 mm. Within this project, the project units are set to display length dimension values on screen rounded to the nearest 1 mm. Even more exact dimension values are displayed to the nearest .1 mm where appropriate in the Element Properties dialog box. In this case, the actual tread depth dimension is 332.2 mm; it becomes 332 mm when rounded to the nearest 1 mm in the drawing area. The actual tread depth is determined by using the following Calculation Rule equation derivation: Tread = (Z - X * Riser) / Y Substituting with the current values (X = 2, Y = 1, Z = 680 mm and Riser = 173.9 mm) yields: Tread = (680 - (2 * 173.9))/1 Tread = (680 - 347.8) Tread = 332.2 mm 29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 30 On the View Toolbar, click 31 On the View Toolbar, click . and spin the model as shown.

244 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Notice the difference between the slope of the two stairs. 32 On the File menu, click Close. You can close the project file without saving your changes. This completes the Working with the Stair Calculator exercise. This also completes the Stairs lesson.

Creating Stairs | 245

246 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Walls

9

247

Creating Walls
In this lesson, you learn about walls. Sketch wall segments, work with compound walls, and create new wall types. Create curtain and foundation walls, join walls to floors, and assign wall top and bottom attachments.

Sketching Walls
In this exercise, you use sketching tools to draw and modify straight and arc wall segments, and then add a floor with an opening.

Draw the first exterior wall segment
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
■ ■ ■ ■

In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click the training files icon. Select the m_Tutorial_Default.rte file located in the Metric folder, and click Open. In the New Project dialog box, click OK.

2 Zoom in on the center of the viewing window. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 Specify the wall segment start point, and drag the cursor to the right 2900 mm.

5 Click to specify the wall segment endpoint and select the dimension. 6 Enter 3000 mm for the new horizontal dimension.

7 Press ENTER.

The wall segment length is updated with the new dimension.

Draw the second exterior wall segment
8 Specify the right endpoint of the first wall segment as the second wall segment start point.

9 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the wall segment endpoint.

Both vertical and horizontal dimensions display.

248 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the third and fourth exterior wall segments
10 Specify the lower end of the second wall segment as the third wall segment start point. 11 Press and hold SHIFT, drag the cursor to the right 2400 mm, and click to specify the third wall segment endpoint.

NOTE Hold down SHIFT as you drag the cursor to constrain your drawing direction orthogonally. 12 Specify the right end of the third wall segment as the fourth wall segment start point. 13 Hold down SHIFT, drag the cursor up 2100 mm, and click to specify the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Stretch the fourth exterior wall segment
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Select the fourth wall segment and select the upper drag control.

Observe that the first wall segment has an assigned lock icon that references the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint. 16 Drag the cursor up to 3600 mm.

Only the fourth wall segment is stretched. 17 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor down to 2100 mm. 18 Click the first wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Creating Walls | 249

19 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor up to 2900 mm.

Observe that the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint maintain their alignment. The second wall segment stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the first wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw the fifth and sixth exterior wall segments
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 21 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 22 Specify the upper end of the fourth wall segment as the fifth wall segment start point. 23 Drag the cursor to the right 5500 mm, and click to specify the fifth wall segment endpoint.

24 Drag the cursor down 5500 mm, and click to specify the sixth wall segment endpoint.

250 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the seventh, eighth, and ninth exterior wall segments
25 Drag the cursor to the left 7000 mm, and click to specify the seventh wall segment endpoint.

26 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the eighth wall segment endpoint.

27 Drag the cursor to the left 3900 mm, and click to specify the ninth wall segment endpoint.

Move the eighth wall segment
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the eighth wall segment. 29 Drag the cursor to the right until the centerline of the eighth wall segment aligns with the fourth wall segment centerline.

Creating Walls | 251

30 Click the eighth wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline. 31 Select the eighth wall segment, and drag the cursor to the right 2100 mm to specify the new wall segment location

Observe that the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline maintain their alignment. The third, fifth, seventh, and ninth wall segments are stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the eighth wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw an arc wall segment
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 33 On the Options Bar, click .

34 Specify the left end of the ninth wall segment as the arc start point.

252 | Chapter 9 Walls

35 Specify the left end of the first wall segment as the arc endpoint. NOTE Do not snap the cursor to 180 degrees.

36 Move the cursor along the preview arc wall, and click to place the arc wall. 37 Select the radius value, and enter 4900 mm.

38 Press ENTER.

Creating Walls | 253

Move wall segments by modifying dimensions
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the fourth wall segment. 40 Select the 3200 mm dimension value, and enter 4000.

41 Press ENTER.

254 | Chapter 9 Walls

Both the fourth and eighth wall segments are shifted 800 mm to the right.

Draw a diagonal exterior wall segment
42 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 43 Specify the midpoint of the fifth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment start point.

44 Specify the midpoint of the sixth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment endpoint.

45 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 46 On the Toolbar, click .

47 Select the left side of the fifth wall segment as the first wall segment to trim.

48 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to. 49 Select the lower side of the sixth wall segment as the next wall segment to trim.

Creating Walls | 255

50 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to.

Draw a floor by picking walls
51 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor, and then click Pick Walls. 52 Place the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB, and click to select the entire chain of walls.

All of the wall segments are highlighted. 53 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch a rectangular floor cutout
54 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening. 55 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box, select the first option, and click OK. 56 Place the cursor over the edge of the floor until it highlights, and click.

256 | Chapter 9 Walls

57 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 Using the following illustration as a guide, specify an approximate location for the first corner of the rectangular floor opening.

60 Specify the second corner of the rectangular floor opening, creating a 1800 mm X 3000 mm floor opening.

TIP The cursor snaps to dimension values based on the zoom of the view. To get the rectangle to the exact dimensions, you may need to zoom in. 61 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 62 On the Toolbar, click .

63 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 64 On the Toolbar, click .

65 In the Dynamic View dialog box, select Spin, and then, while holding the left mouse button down, move the cursor in the viewing window to orient the view as shown.

Creating Walls | 257

This completes the Sketching Walls exercise.

Working with Compound Walls
In this exercise, you work with compound walls. Convert generic wall styles to new custom wall styles, add dimensions, edit fill patterns that display in section views, and apply surface patterns.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the m_Gallery.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Access wall properties
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 Zoom in on the upper part of the floor plan. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 4 Select the 200 mm exterior wall.

258 | Chapter 9 Walls

EIFS . click . 8 In the Name dialog box. ■ 14 In row 3. 11 Select row 2.5 On the Options Bar. click . do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. and in the Materials dialog box. under Name. under Name.Interior . . Enter 50 mm for Thickness. ■ Creating Walls | 259 . and select Finish 2 [5]. and click Down twice. click Click OK. 13 In row 1. enter 200 mm Stud Wall for Name. Click in the Material field. Click in the Material field.Stud Layer. 12 Select row 3. ■ 15 In row 5. Add two layers to the new wall type 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Name.GRG (Glass Reinforced Gypsum). and select Structure [1]. and click Up. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. Click in the Material field. and click OK. click . Enter 135 mm for Thickness. click Edit/New. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. Click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Finishes . under Layers. select Wood .Exterior Insulation and Finish System. select Finishes . 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select Finish 1 [4].Exterior . and in the Materials dialog box. 10 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Duplicate. Click OK. Enter 15 mm for Thickness. and in the Materials dialog box. click Insert twice. click Edit for Structure.

22 In the Type Selector. click Dimension. expand Families.16 Click Preview. Specify the view detail level 18 On the View Control Bar. select Basic Wall : 200 mm Stud Wall. Add a wall centerline dimension 23 Zoom in on the lower part of the floor plan. 17 Click OK three times. 21 Select Generic . 25 On the Options Bar. right-click. and click Select All Instances. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. The style of the selected walls is updated in the building model. 26 Select the upper horizontal wall segment centerline as the first dimension point. expand Walls. 260 | Chapter 9 Walls .200mm. 24 On the Design Bar. and expand Basic Wall. 19 Zoom in on the left end of the new 200 mm Stud wall segment. Assign the new wall style to the remaining exterior walls 20 In the Project Browser.

select Wall faces for Prefer. Creating Walls | 261 . 28 Specify a point to the left as the dimension location point. The vertical wall centerline to centerline dimension displays.27 Select the lower horizontal wall segment centerline as the second dimension point. 30 Select the upper horizontal wall segment exterior face as the first dimension point. Add a wall face dimension 29 On the Options Bar.

34 Select the left vertical wall segment exterior core face as the first dimension point. Add a wall core face dimension 33 On the Options Bar. 262 | Chapter 9 Walls .31 Select the lower horizontal wall segment exterior face as the second dimension point. The vertical wall exterior face to exterior face dimension displays. 32 Specify a point to the right as the dimension location point. select Faces of core for Prefer.

The horizontal wall core face to core face dimension displays. Creating Walls | 263 .35 Select the right vertical wall segment exterior core face as the second dimension point. 36 Specify a point below as the dimension location point.

expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. select revit.Create a custom gypsum fill pattern 37 In the Project Browser. Enter 0. and click Import. 48 Zoom in on the gypsum board representation in the wall section. 50 On the View Control Bar. click Materials. and click Open. 47 In the Materials dialog box. 38 On the Settings menu. 40 In the New Pattern dialog box. click for Pattern.Dense for Import. 41 In the Import dialog box. select Gypsum. select Custom. navigate to \Program Files\Autodesk Revit Building\Data. 45 In the Materials dialog box. expand Sections (Callout 1). select Finishes .GRG . 46 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click Fill Patterns. 264 | Chapter 9 Walls . 42 In the New Pattern dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sand . The new Gypsum pattern is assigned to the gypsum wall board representation in section view. Assign the new gypsum fill pattern to a wall layer in section view 44 On the Settings menu. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Assign a masonry surface pattern in a 3D view 49 In the Project Browser. and under Cut Pattern. and double-click Callout of Section 3. click New.pat. click OK. 39 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 43 Click OK twice.Interior . and click OK. Enter Gypsum for Name.Glass Reinforced Gypsum.25 for Import scale.

51 On the Settings menu, click Materials. 52 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks, and under Surface Pattern, click 53 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, select Model for Pattern Type, select Block 8x16, and click OK. 54 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 55 Select the low circular wall segment. 56 On the Options Bar, click . for Pattern.

57 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Structure. 59 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, click 60 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks. 61 Click OK four times. 62 Zoom in on the low wall segment. for Material.

Align a masonry surface pattern in an elevation view
63 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click East.

64 Zoom in on the right retaining wall.

Creating Walls | 265

65 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the wall. 66 On the Toolbar, click .

67 Select the building wall edge as the alignment reference.

68 Select the CMU edge as the line to align.

The upper left corner of the CMU pattern is now aligned with the upper left corner of the retaining wall. This completes the Working with Compound Walls exercise.

Working with Vertically Compound Walls
In this exercise, you modify vertically compound walls and create and modify wall layers in sections view.

266 | Chapter 9 Walls

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Townhouse.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Access the exterior wall properties
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the right front exterior wall.

6 On the Options Bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 9 If the Preview pane is not displayed on the left side of the Edit Assembly dialog box, click Preview. 10 On the Preview pane, ensure that Section: Modify type attributes is selected for View.

The wall section displays at its default sample height of 6096 mm.

Creating Walls | 267

Assign split regions to the wall section
11 Right-click in the preview window and click Zoom In Region. 12 Zoom in on the bottom of the wall section. 13 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 14 Specify a point up 300 mm from the bottom of the wall on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the first split point.

15 Specify a point up 300 mm from the first split point on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the second split point.

Merge split regions in the wall section
16 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Merge Regions. 17 Select the upper split line as the region to merge.

268 | Chapter 9 Walls

The previously split regions are now merged.

Adjust the split line location
18 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 19 Select the split line, and click the 300 mm dimension value. 20 Enter 3680 mm.

Creating Walls | 269

21 Press ENTER. 22 Zoom out on the wall section.

The split line now occurs 3680 mm above the bottom of the wall.

Adjust the sample wall height
23 Scroll up to view the top of the wall. 24 Move your cursor over the top of the wall and press TAB until the outer boundary of the wall is highlighted (watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the interface to be sure you are highlighting the outer boundary), and then click to display the lock icon and the 6096 mm dimension value. 25 Click the 6096 mm dimension value, and enter 5500 mm.

270 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Press ENTER. The sample wall height is now 5500 mm.

Add another split line
27 Zoom in on the existing split line. 28 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 29 Specify a point up 240 mm from the existing split line on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the new split point.

The new split line now occurs 240 mm above the previous split line.

Creating Walls | 271

Add a new layer to the wall style
30 Under Layers, select row 1, and click Insert. 31 In row 1, select Finish 1 [4] for Function. 32 Select for Material.

33 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Masonry Brick - Soldier Course, and click OK. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, select row 1. 35 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Assign Layers. 36 On the Preview pane, select the 240 mm high region between the split lines as shown. Place the cursor at the bottom of the region to select it.

37 Click OK three times. 38 Zoom in on the front brick wall.

The soldier course displays in the exterior wall.

272 | Chapter 9 Walls

Specify allowance for layer extension
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the front brick wall. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 42 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 43 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, on the Preview pane, zoom in on the bottom of the wall. 44 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 45 Select the outer boundary of the wall at the masonry brick layer.

46 Click the lock icon to unlock the masonry brick layer for layer extension. 47 Click OK three times.

Modify extended layers
48 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Wall Detail. 49 Select the brick wall.

50 Using the drag control at the bottom of the brick wall, drag it down into the concrete wall approximately as shown.

Creating Walls | 273

51 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry. 52 Select the brick layer of the wall as the first layer to join.

53 Select the concrete foundation wall as the second layer to join.

The concrete foundation wall is cut away to accommodate the brick course.

54 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 55 On the Options Bar, click .

56 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter -150 mm for Base Extension Distance, and click OK.

274 | Chapter 9 Walls

Add a wall sweep
57 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 60 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Sweeps. 62 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box, click Add and do the following:
■ ■

Select Sill : Sill for Profile. In the Material field, click Concrete. Click OK. , and in the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place

■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 3860 mm for Distance. Select Base for From. Select Exterior for Side. Enter -90 mm for Offset.

63 Click OK. 64 On the Preview pane, zoom in on the applied wall sweep in the wall section.

65 Click OK three times. 66 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click 3D perspective. 67 Zoom in on the front wall, and view the sill.

Creating Walls | 275

This completes the Working with Vertically Compound Walls exercise.

Joining Walls to Floors
In this exercise, you work with joining walls and floors in section view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Floor_wall_joins.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Draw the level 2 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 7 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 8 For all four walls, select the outer edge of the wall core. Use the flip arrows to toggle the selection. TIP You can select each wall or use the TAB key to select the chain of walls.

276 | Chapter 9 Walls

9 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Wood Joist 255 mm for Type, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 12 When prompted to cut the geometry from the walls, click Yes. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 14 Zoom in on the wall at Level 2.

The level 2 floor extends into the wall structural layer.

Draw the level 1 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 18 Select all four walls on the centerline (click each wall while pressing Ctrl).

19 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box, verify that the Type is Wood Joist 255mm, and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 22 When prompted to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor, click Yes. 23 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 24 Zoom in on the wall at Level 1.

Creating Walls | 277

The foundation wall is trimmed by the level 1 floor. This completes the Joining Walls to Floors exercise.

Working with Foundation Walls
In this exercise, you create and modify concrete foundation walls and footings.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall_Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

6 On the View menu, click View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select T.O. Footing for Underlay, and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 9 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 10 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select T.O. Footing for Depth. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 305mm for Offset.

11 Specify the outside upper left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment start point, and then specify the outside lower left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment endpoint.

278 | Chapter 9 Walls

12 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five foundation wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each foundation wall segment endpoint. 13 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Create a new 610 mm concrete footing wall type
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Footing.

Creating Walls | 279

15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 16 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 20 In the Name dialog box, enter Foundation - 610mm Concrete for Name, and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 22 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, enter 610 mm for Thickness.

23 Click OK three times.

Draw the 610 mm concrete footing
24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Unconnected for Depth and enter 305 mm. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 460 mm for Offset.

25 Specify the outside upper left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment start point and then specify the outside lower left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment endpoint. If a warning about the objects not being visible in the current view is displayed, close the warning dialog.

280 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five footing wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each footing wall segment endpoint.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The concrete foundation walls and footings are now complete. This completes the Working with Foundation Walls exercise.

Working with Wall Wraps
In this exercise, you assign different wall wrap conditions to a window opening.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Creating Walls | 281

Assign window wall closure parameters
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on one of the level 1 windows.

Neither the interior nor the exterior wall components wrap around the window opening. 3 Select the window. 4 On the Options Bar, click .

5 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select By host for Wall Closure. 7 Click OK twice.

Assign an interior wall wrap parameter
8 Select the wall. 9 On the Options Bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 12 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Interior for At Inserts. 13 Click OK three times.

The interior metal stud wall with gypsum board now wraps around the window opening.

Assign an exterior wall wrap parameter
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall. 15 On the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Exterior for At Inserts. Both would wrap gypsum and brick. Exterior wraps only the brick. 19 Click OK three times.

282 | Chapter 9 Walls

The exterior brick wall now wraps around the window opening. This completes the Working with Wall Wraps exercise.

Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments
In this exercise, you assign wall bottom attachments to a curved floor in 3D view and wall top attachments to reference planes in elevation view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Attach_Top_Bottom.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Attach wall bottoms to floor surface
1 Select all four wall segments.

2 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and select Base for Attach Wall. 3 Select the floor as the object to attach to.

The walls are projected down to attach to the floor.

Creating Walls | 283

click Attach for Top/Base. and select Top for Attach Wall. and double-click South. 5 Select the south wall.Attach wall tops to reference planes 4 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Select the first reference plane as the object to attach to. 284 | Chapter 9 Walls . The south wall is projected up to attach to the first reference plane. expand Elevations.

8 In the Project Browser. click Attach for Top/Base. under Elevations. 11 Select the second reference plane as the object to attach to. and select Top for Attach Wall. double-click North. Creating Walls | 285 . 9 Select the north wall. The north wall is projected up to attach to the second reference plane. 10 On the Options Bar.

This also completes the Walls lesson. This completes the Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments exercise. 286 | Chapter 9 Walls . expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}.12 In the Project Browser.

grid lines. Like walls. To change grids.Curtain Systems 10 Curtain systems are not walls. Unlike windows. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. you need to change the length of the wall. 287 . To switch panel types. This affects the entire curtain system. to resize the system. and mullions. Like windows. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. panel. and they are not windows. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. For example. you select the grid. and you can change these elements individually. or you can use a specific curtain system command. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. you need to select a panel.

Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. expand Floor Plans. 288 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Type Selector. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. expand Views (all). you create a curtain system using the wall command. Open the m_Curtain_Walls. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and double-click Ground Floor.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. 2 Zoom in on Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. click Wall. click the Training Files icon. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Flat Curtain System | 289 . 7 Zoom in on the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown.

12 Under Constraints. specify Up to level: TOP OF ROOF for Top Constraint.8 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). and double-click Southeast Isometric. and click OK. 10 Zoom in on the curtain system you just added. top constraint. and room bounding. 9 On the View menu. 13 Specify 1200 for Top Offset. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. 11 Select the curtain system and click . top and base attachments. expand 3D Views. 290 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . click Orient ➤ Northeast. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint.

22 Place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. Flat Curtain System | 291 . right-click on the elevation name Elevation 1 . using curtain grids.a. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. click Elevation. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. and resize the crop boundary as shown. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. the curtain system is a single glazed panel. and click OK. and click Rename.Right now. 20 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. click Curtain Grid. You are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 18 In the Project Browser.

29 In the Select Levels dialog box. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. Click to place another grid line. one larger than the other. and click OK. click Modify. 292 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . THIRD FLOOR. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. FOURTH FLOOR. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels.23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. click Copy to Clipboard. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. FIFTH FLOOR. and SEVENTH FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 27 On the Edit menu. 28 On the Edit menu. 33 On the Design Bar. Click to create a vertical grid. hold CTRL and select SECOND FLOOR. 26 Hold CTRL and select the 3 grid lines you just placed. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 25 On the Design Bar. SIXTH FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. click Modify.

you add a doorway to the curtain system. and then select the segment above it. click Add or Remove Segments.Next. The segment line style changes to dashed. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. You do not use the Door command. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. 38 Using the same method. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Instead. The two segments are removed. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. and on the Options Bar. Flat Curtain System | 293 . remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.

TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. select One Segment. Use the following picture as a guide. 294 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 42 Place dimensions as shown. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar.39 On the Design Bar. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Curtain Grid. 40 On the Options Bar. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 43 Delete the dimensions. and lock them. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added.

To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. and click Wireframe. Next. Next. 54 On the Design Bar. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). Flat Curtain System | 295 . you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. under Elevations. on the new curtain system you added. under Floor Plans. Now. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 50 In the Doors folder. 52 On the Type Selector. The panel changes to a double door. 56 In the Project Browser. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. not as curtain panels. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. These panels schedule as doors. click Modify. This changes the graphics style of the view. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level.rfa. They are part of the curtain panel category. 57 On the View Control Bar. 55 In the Project Browser.TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. click in any white space to exit the editor. double-click Entrance Elevation. click . double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. select M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. and click Open. 49 On the File menu. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it.

rvt. 62 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels.59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. and the solid panels display in white. 65 On the View Control Bar. click Wireframe for Graphics Style. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 61 With the panel still selected. click System Panel : Solid. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 63 Click OK twice to close the Type Properties and Element Properties dialog boxes. 296 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . you place mullions on curtain panel grids. The glazed panels display in blue. click Shading with Edges for Graphics Style. Name the file m_rvt8_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 66 On the View Control Bar. click Save As. click . Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 60 On the Type Selector. 68 On the File menu. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels.

Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. Flat Curtain System | 297 . 2 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. select Grid Line Segment. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. so you remove them next. because they reduce the doors’ size by their widths. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in on the set of doors.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 9 Delete the mullions below them. 4 On the Options Bar. select Entire Grid Line. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. select All Empty Segments. however. click Mullion. there are a few that you do not want. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You are going to change some mullion joins.

The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. Two mullion join controls display. 298 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion.Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 13 Click the top mullion control. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.

click Modify. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR for Top Constraint. 15 In the Project Browser. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. 8 On the Options Bar. Finally. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. under Floor Plans. 7 Enter 1200 for Top Offset. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Wall. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. double-click Southeast Isometric. 5 Click . You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 14 On the Design Bar. you can also right-click and select Break at Join from the Join Conditions menu to break the mullion at both joins. 9 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. click . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 4 On the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in on the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. Finally. and click OK. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. double-click Ground Floor. 6 Under Constraints. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. Curved Curtain System | 299 . you add a curtain system using the wall command. 1 In the Project Browser. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system.TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. 10 Place the second point at the lower right side. 16 Save the file. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system.

15 In the Project Browser. Next. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. double-click East. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you place grids on the system. 16 Zoom in on the cylinder. You are going to use one of these snaps points. under Elevations.11 Finish the arc by clicking at the top of the arc. 300 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. Divide the halves into quarters. eighths. 13 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. and then sixteenths. click Curtain Grid. 14 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc.

to filter out all other elements 20 Save the file.17 On the Design Bar. Remember to click from the selection except Curtain Walls. click Modify. select the bottom layer of panels. 19 On the Type Selector. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. Curved Curtain System | 301 . Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Next. you change some panels in the system. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. click Basic Wall: Generic . Using walls as panels 18 Using a selection box.300mm.

4 On the Design Bar. double-click Metric Curtain Wall Panel. under Elevations. . 11 On the Design Bar. click Model Lines. click Lines. 1 On the File menu. click . specify Glass for Subcategory. click New ➤ Family. and click . 7 Start the sketch at the upper lefthand reference line intersection and finish at the lower righthand reference line intersection. click Finish Sketch. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. 10 Under Identity Data.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rft. click 12 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 2 In the Metric templates folder. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. 302 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . and on the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. 6 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. double-click Exterior. enter 100 for Depth.

Hold Shift and spin the model so that you can see the The curved curtain system’s structure now matches that of the main part of the building.rfa. 26 On the Type Selector. 18 In the Project Browser. .Pattern. 19 Highlight a panel in the arc. click Save As. 21 Select the curved arc curtain wall. All the panels change to the solid panel. Curved Curtain System | 303 . and then click . and save the family as Curtain Panel .Pattern. All fifth floor panels are selected. select Curtain Panel . click Modify. 25 Highlight a panel in the arc. All fourth floor panels are selected. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.13 On the Design Bar.rfa family. 22 Right-click. 16 On the File menu. 23 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. and click Flip Orientation. 24 In the Project Browser.Pattern. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. click curved curtain system. under Floor Plans. and return to your project file.Solid. 20 On the Type Selector. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 17 Load the Curtain Panel . 14 On the File menu. 15 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. click System Panel .

Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 On the File menu. click New ➤ Family.rft. double-click East. 1 In the Project Browser. 304 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Metric Profile. click Family Category and Parameters. under Elevations. click . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. For vertical mullions. 7 Specify Mullion for Profile Usage. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 27 Save the file. and click OK. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 8 On the Design Bar. click Mullion. and select Radius and specify 50 mm for the radius. enter 8 for Sides.The finished arc wall should look like the following picture. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 6 On the Settings menu. 5 In the Metric Templates folder. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel.

14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. 19 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. and click OK. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rfa file from the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Detail Components folder. click Modify. 11 On the Design Bar. click Visibility. click Detail Component. 15 On the File menu.10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 13 On the Options Bar. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Curved Curtain System | 305 . 12 Select the lines in the octagon.detail. 17 Open the m_Cylinder Mullion . Click again to specify the ending point. 18 On the Design Bar. clear Fine. click the Training Files icon.

and click OK. 38 On the Options Bar. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. and return to the project file. After the new profile is loaded. 40 On the Design Bar.rfa family.rfa. clear Coarse and Medium. 26 On the File menu. click Duplicate. and click DELETE. 27 Load the Cylinder Mullion. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. under 3D Views. 33 Click Edit/New. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 Select the detail component. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. it can be added as a mullion type. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 31 Click . 22 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box.20 On the Design Bar. select All Empty Segments. 23 On the File menu. 36 Under Construction. You have placed more mullions than you want. select Circular Mullion for Family. right-click and use Select Mullions on gridline from the Select Mullions menu. 25 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. under Floor Plans. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Modify to exit placing mullions. 306 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. so next you remove the unwanted ones. 24 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. and click Visibility. click Mullion. 28 In the Project Browser. 29 Click . 41 In the Project Browser. specify Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion for Profile. 37 Click OK twice. click Modify. and click OK. 30 On the Modelling tab. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Save As.

and you can click to select them all. you learned to create a curved curtain system. click Pick Walls. 2 Zoom in on the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. make custom curtain panels and mullions.43 Save the file. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. select Defines slope. and press TAB. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. a storefront system. 5 On the Options Bar. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 4 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP To chain select all the walls. under Floor Plans. and then apply those custom elements to the system. All the inside faces highlight. Additional Curtain Systems | 307 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. and a ruled curtain system. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. In this lesson. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system.

14 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 9 Under Constraints. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. Storefront System In this exercise. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. click Finish Roof. select Entire Grid Line. double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 Zoom in on the skylight. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. and click OK.7 On the Design Bar. click Shaded with Edges for Graphics Style. 19 Save the file. click Roof Properties. click Modify. 308 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 11 In the Project Browser. click Mullion. click System Family: Sloped Glazing for Family. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 10 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 18 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views.

This curtain wall cuts the original wall. under Floor Plans. and enter 2400. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 2 Zoom in on the wall at the eastern-most area of the model. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Type Selector. select Unconnected for Height.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Additional Curtain Systems | 309 . click Wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR.

Under the Pattern heading. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog box and return to the Element Properties dialog box that displays the instance parameters. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. To see how the grid layout is defined. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. enter 10200 mm. 11 Zoom in on the new storefront wall. 9 On the Design Bar. the Layout (Grid 1) is set to Maximum Spacing. For this wall. This means that the panel heights will be exactly at a 2400 mm height. Angle (Grid 1). Justification (Grid 1). double-click Southeast Isometric. You see these same parameters for Grid 2. and the Spacing (Grid 1) is set to 1524 mm. center. which is specified in the type. see the Revit Building help. enter 45 for Angle (Grid 1) and 15 for Angle (Grid 2). The Grid 2 counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. Click OK. click Modify. This specifies an exact length for the wall. even if the wall height changes. 12 Select the storefront wall. 14 After you have looked at the Pattern parameters. 10 In the Project Browser. The Offset (Grid 1) is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. 310 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . you find Number (Grid 1). The Number (Grid 1) is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. under 3D Views. and click . The type parameters under the Pattern heading create the predefined layout. or end. By setting the Angle (Grid 1) value. 13 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties dialog box. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. The Justification (Grid 1) specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. and Offset (Grid 1).8 Click the temporary dimension. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. The Layout (Grid 2) is set to Fixed Distance. and press ENTER. and the Spacing (Grid 2) is set to 2400 mm.

17 Select a curtain grid. click Mullion. double-click Southeast Isometric. 3 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 18 Save the file. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and select All Empty Segments on the Options Bar. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. Additional Curtain Systems | 311 .16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. In this exercise. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model.

and highlight the thin line. 312 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . A panel between the 2 lines is created. making sure Thin Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 6 Click the highlighted line. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the thin line.5 Place the cursor at the bottom edge of the SECOND FLOOR. 8 Select the highlighted line.

Finally. 13 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. quarters. and click . embed a curtain system inside another wall. 12 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. click Curtain Grid. Next. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. and define a ruled curtain system.A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. right-click and use Select Panels along Grid 2 from the Select Panels menu. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. Additional Curtain Systems | 313 . you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 16 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. quarters. 10 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog box. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. 14 Highlight a top level glazed panel. click System Panel : Solid. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. and then eighths. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 17 Save the file. 9 Select the panel. 15 On the Type Selector. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and then eighths.

314 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

which are a type of view in a project. elevation. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. section. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan.Creating Drawings 11 In this tutorial. and are accessible from the Project Browser. and schedules. you can add different views of the building model directly to the sheet. usually contain a title block. Sheets are defined by borders. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model in an Autodesk Revit Building project. three-dimensional views. 315 . To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your building model. begin by first creating sheets.

and dimension the exterior walls of the building to complete the floor plan drawing sheet. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You also reorient the swing of one of the doors in the floor plan view on the sheet. adjust the view scale. 316 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you enter the project information and create a drawing sheet with a title block that displays the project information. You then add the floor plan view to the sheet. Next. click the Training Files icon. you learn how to create sheets within an Revit Building project. and observe that the changes are made in the floor and furniture plan views of the building model. you create a drawing sheet that includes a floor plan of the first level of the building model. You begin by duplicating an existing floor plan view that includes furniture. how to create new views from a building model. You turn off the visibility of the furniture in the duplicated view to create a floor plan view and rename the original view as the furniture plan. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. how to add views to the sheets. click Open.Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. The project used in the following exercises is a small office building model. Open m_Drawing_Exercise located in the Metric folder. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 317 . and click Rename. 8 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 10 Click OK. double-click Level 1 to redisplay the floor plan. 9 Under Visibility. Casework. Turn off visibility for casework. The changes in visibility are applied to this view only.Copy the Level 1 floor plan view to create a Level 1 Furniture plan view 1 In the Project Browser. furniture. right-click Level 1. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Model Categories tab. and specialty equipment continue to display in the Level 1 Furniture plan. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. click Edit for Project Address. and click OK. lighting fixtures. expand Views (all). click Project Information. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Level 1 Furniture. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. and expand Floor Plans. 3 Right-click Copy of Level 1. and specialty equipment in the Level 1 Floor Plan view 6 On the View menu. Casework. A copy of the Level 1 Floor plan view is displayed in the Project Browser. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 11 On the Settings menu. furniture. furniture. 5 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. and specialty equipment are no longer displayed in the Level 1 floor plan view. 2 Under Floor Plans.

16 Click OK. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 2005 for Project Issue Date. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. MA 12345 14 Click OK. and click OK. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. The text fields of the title block on the sheet automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered in step 14. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. Enter Client Approved for Project Status. 318 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . select A0 metric. and click View. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown.13 In the Edit Text dialog box. Smith for Client Name. 15 Continue to change the remaining type parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 31 March. Enter J. Enter Residence for Project Name. right-click. click Sheet. 18 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 17 On View tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify. 21 When the title block highlights. under Identity Data. and click OK. 25 In the Views dialog box. 19 In the Project Browser.Unnamed. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A101 . select Floor Plan: Level 1. and you can modify it within the sheet by activating the Level 1 floor plan view and changing its scale. but the scale of the view is too small for the drawing sheet. click . 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. on the Options Bar. click Add View. 23 Ground Floor Plan is displayed in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. enter Ground Floor Plan for Sheet Name. and click to place the view in the center of the drawing sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. View scale is a property of the view. 20 On the Design Bar. and select the title block.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. The Level 1 floor plan view is displayed on the drawing sheet. 26 Move the cursor to the center of the drawing sheet. expand Sheets (all). Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 319 . 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

The border and title block are grayed out. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. right-click. 320 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . click Viewport : Title w Line. click Deactivate View. indicating the view is deactivated. The border and the title block are no longer grayed out.27 With the view selected. Any changes that you make to it on the sheet while it is active display when you open the Level 1 floor plan view. and click OK. select 1:20 for View Scale. indicating that the Level 1 floor plan View is active and you can modify it. and drag the grips that display on the scale to lengthen it. and click View Properties. under Graphics. you would see that the scale of the Level 1 floor plan view is now 1:20. on the View menu. 28 Right-click the view. 31 Select the viewport and from the Type Selector. Center the view on the sheet and reposition the drawing scale 30 On the View menu. 33 Drag the viewport to the center of the drawing sheet. click Activate View. 29 In the Element Properties dialog box. If you were to open the Level 1 floor plan view. and click View Properties. 32 Select the viewport.

Reorient the door in the upper exterior wall 39 On the Design Bar. 40 Click the control arrows until the door swings open to the interior. click Modify. Move the cursor above the north exterior wall. as shown in the following illustration. as shown in the following illustration. 35 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 37 Dimension the north wall of the building: ■ Select the outer face of the west exterior vertical wall. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 321 . click Dimension. and then select the outer face of the east exterior vertical wall. ■ 38 Dimension the west exterior wall of the building by selecting the outer faces of the north and south exterior walls and placing the dimension to the left of the west wall. and select the door on the north exterior wall (in the upper right corner). 36 On the Options Bar. and click Activate View.Dimension the exterior walls of the building 34 Right-click on the viewport on the drawing sheet. and select Wall faces for Prefer. click . and click to place the dimension. This creates aligned dimensions that originate at the wall faces.

and click Deactivate View. 43 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click. double-click Level 1 Furniture. are specific to the view in which they are created. The dimensions that you added to the Level 1 floor plan view are not displayed. The two dimensions that you added to the view in the previous steps have been added to this view. Dimensions. 322 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 44 Proceed to the next exercise. 42 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.41 Select the view. the change is also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. the changes are made within the building model and not restricted to the current view. however. double-click Level 1. but the door reflects the change you made to its orientation in the Level 1 floor plan. This means that when you reoriented the door swing in the Level 1 floor plan. Adding a Sheet to the Project. and the door is updated. When you change the geometry of the building model while the view is activated.

under Identity Data. and on the Options Bar. The sheet is incrementally named A102. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. m_Drawing_Exercise. click .Furniture Plan Level 1. click Sheet. Furniture Plan Level 1 is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. under Sheets (all). In the Project Browser.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. 3 Select the title block. and adjust the scale of the view to create a furniture plan drawing. enter Furniture Plan Level 1 for Sheet Name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the new sheet. and click OK. A102 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog box.rvt. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select A0 metric. is displayed. add the furniture plan view. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 323 . you add a new sheet to the project.

7 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). 324 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .Change the scale of the view before you add it to the sheet 5 In the Project Browser. and select the lamp next to the lounge chair. double-click Level 1 Furniture. 5 Select M_Floor Lamp 1 : 100watt Halogen in the Type Selector to change the lamp type. 8 In the Project Browser. Change the lamp type in the furniture plan 1 In the drawing area.rvt. m_Drawing_Exercise. and then observe that the changes are also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. and click to place the view. 9 Center the cursor in the drawing area of the sheet. 6 On the View Control Bar. click and drag Level 1 Furniture onto the sheet. You change a lamp type and the length of an interior wall in the furniture plan view on Sheet A102. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet In this exercise. double-click A102 .Furniture Plan Level 1. and click Activate View. and select 1:20. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. right-click on the view on sheet A102. click Modify. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in on the lower left corner of the building. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet. click the scale value. under Floor Plans. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. verify that M_Floor Lamp 2 : 150 watt Incandescent is displayed.

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 325 . 11 Select the same wall you selected in step 8 to view the change in dimension. chair. The desk. furniture. 10 On the Window menu. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets. and file cabinet adjacent to the wall move when the wall is resized. 8 Select the wall as shown in the following illustration. The changes made to the lamp. and notice that Moves with Nearby Elements is selected in the Options Bar. enter 5200 mm. and the wall position in Sheet A102 are reflected in the Level 1 Furniture plan view. click Modify.6 Select one of the furniture components. 9 Click the temporary dimension value of the distance between the wall and the centerline of the exterior horizontal wall. and press ENTER. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture.

and select the dashed callout view border. double-click Level 1 Furniture. you learn how to create new elevation. click Modify. 326 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . callout. under Floor Plans. and section views of the building model and add them to a single drawing sheet. click Callout.rvt. Create a callout view 1 In the Project Browser.Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. A callout tag is placed inside the walls of the building model. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Select the blue border grip adjacent to the view tag. 3 Draw a rectangle around the room in the lower left corner of the drawing to define the boundaries of the room. and move it to the position shown in the following illustration. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Drawing_Exercise. 4 On the Design Bar.

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 327 . and add the callout view to a new sheet 7 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 10 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the sheet. position the view.Unnamed. TIP You can also drag the Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture view from the Project Browser to place it on the sheet. The new sheet. click the scale value. and click OK. select A0 Metric. and click to place the view. Change the callout view scale. select Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture. 11 In the Views dialog box. is displayed under Sheets (all) in the Project Browser. A103 . click Sheet. click Add View.6 On the Design Bar. and select 1:20. click Modify. and double-click the callout tag to display the callout view. and click Add View to Sheet. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and click to place the elevation symbol. click Modify. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The elevation extents do not display when you select the body of the elevation symbol. 18 On the Design Bar. select the elevation symbol arrow. double-click Level 1 Furniture. 14 Zoom in around the view tag of the callout. the elevation symbol points to the closest wall. 328 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . As you move the cursor. center it in the room so that it points north. Create a new elevation view.13 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The tag now displays the drawing sheet and detail number. and place it on the sheet 15 Adjust your zoom to display the lower left corner of the view. click Elevation. 17 Move the cursor to the lower left room. and zoom out to view the elevation extents. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor in the drawing area.

double-click A103 . 23 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Elevation: Elevation 1 . 20 Select the box under the elevation symbol to create a new elevation view 180 degrees from the first elevation view you created when you placed the elevation symbol. expand Elevations.19 Select the body of the elevation symbol. Add the new elevation views to sheet A103 22 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). 21 In the Project Browser under Views (all).a and Elevation 1 . The symbol is displayed as in the following illustration.Unnamed. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 329 . and click Add View to Sheet. 24 In the Views dialog box.c. 25 Click to place the elevation next to the callout view on the drawing sheet. click Add View. and notice that two new elevation views display: Elevation 1 .a.

and add it to the sheet 29 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 28 Zoom in on the elevation tag in the lower left room.c to the sheet either with the Add View command or by dragging it from the Project Browser onto the sheet. under Sheets (all). double-click A102 . 27 In the Project Browser. 30 Zoom in on the right side of the building. Create a section view. 330 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . double-click Level 1 Furniture.Furniture Plan Level 1. The sheet (drawing) number and detail IDs of the views are displayed in the symbol.26 Add Elevation 1 .

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 331 . 33 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click outside the north exterior wall of the building to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). ■ 34 Click the arrows at the head of the section line to flip the section so it points to the west. 32 In the Options Bar. click Section. Move the cursor down and click outside of the south exterior wall of the building to place the section tail and complete the section line. select 1:50 for Scale.31 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

332 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 43 Place the section view on the drawing sheet as shown in the following illustration. elevations. 37 In the Views dialog box. and click OK. you learned how to create new drawing sheets.Unnamed. and save the exercise file with a unique name. add views to your sheets. 41 Enter 25 for Scale Value. on the File menu. and to create new views of your building model. and click Deactivate View. double-click A103 . 45 Close the exercise file. click Custom for View Scale. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. The drawing sheet is now complete. modify the building model from your sheets. 44 If you want to save your changes. under Graphics. such as callouts. and sections. 36 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 42 Right-click on the view. and click View Properties. and click Activate View. click Add View. select Section: Section 1.35 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). 38 Right-click on the viewport. and click Add View to Sheet. By completing the exercises in this lesson. click Save As. 39 Right-click on the view.

On construction documents. you add the completed symbol legend to a cover sheet for the construction documents. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. door frame schedule. expand Legends. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and so on). 3 Right-click Legend 1.rvt located in the Metric folder. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or noteblock. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. doors. Open m_Legends. and door frames. Finally. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. windows. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. 2 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. On construction documents. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Building building model. click New ➤ Legend. and click OK.Filled Level Head . click Open. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. click Symbol.Upgrade : 6 mm M_Wall Tag : 12mm Door Tag metric Window Tag metric Using Legends | 333 . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . enter Symbol Legend for Name.

enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Marker (Level name/Elevation in mm) Wall Tag (Wall Type #) Door Tag (Door #) Window Tag (Window Type #) Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. select Text : 6mm. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK twice. enter 3mm for Name. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 17 In the Project Browser. 15 Working from the top down. 12 Under Text. and click OK. click .Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify to end the command. click Duplicate. click Text. and double-click A100 . 13 In the Type Selector. drag it to the lower-right corner of the cover sheet. enter 3mm for Text Size. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. 8 In the Type Selector. On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options bar. 334 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . you create a text type with the necessary size. 14 Enter Detail Callout (detail #/sheet #) for the text note.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. and click to place it. 18 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. expand Sheets (all). click Symbol Legend.

21 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Select Section for View. enter Wall Type Legend for Name. click Save As. Add components to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename.rvt. Creating a Wall Type Legend. m_Legends_in progress.138mm Partition (1-hr) directly below the first wall. expand Legends.rvt. select Walls: Basic Wall: Exterior . Using Legends | 335 .The symbol legend is added to the project cover sheet. name the file m_Legends_in progress. and click OK. You then add the completed legend to a project cover sheet. 9 Repeat the procedure to place a wall of type Interior . 20 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Save. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 19 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 Right-click Legend 1. click Legend Component. 8 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. Creating a Wall Type Legend In this exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.Brick on CMU for Family. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. click New ➤ Legend. 2 In the Project Browser.

13 Click in the far left portion of the Brick on CMU wall to specify the leader start point. 15 Enter (1) Layer 16mm GWB. 17 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 336 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 14 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. click to add a single-segment leader. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 12 On the Options bar. 16 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the remaining text annotations on the upper wall component. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. click Text. and click Modify on the Design Bar.Add text to the legend 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector.

20 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. and enter Wall Type 1. click Wall Type Legend. 27 In the Project Browser. click to add text without a leader. and click to place it above the symbol legend. double-click A100 . click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines. 19 On the Options Bar. and then select the wall to which you want to apply the same properties. Using a Legend View to Match Types In this exercise. 26 In the Project Browser. Place the legend on a sheet 25 Using extension reference lines.Add titles to the legend components 18 In the Type Selector. select Text : 6mm. 23 In the Type Selector. Using a Legend View to Match Types.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. The wall type legend is added to the project cover sheet. 24 Below the title text of the upper component. 21 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2. add an identical detail line below the lower component. 28 On the Design Bar. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. click Modify to end the command. drag it onto the sheet. Using Legends | 337 . draw a detail line that extends as far as the longest component callout. you use the Match Type tool to convert a wall in the floor plan to the component type used in the Wall Type Legend. 29 On the File menu. You capture the wall type properties in the tool. 22 On the Design Bar.

select the wall type 1 component. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. The open drawings are both visible. 7 Click on the wall at the top of the view. Match a component type 3 On the Tools toolbar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. so that you are zoomed in to the walls. 4 In the Wall Type Legend view. 8 On the View Control Bar. click . click Tile. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 5 In the floor plan view. 2 On the Window menu. select Medium for Detail Level.rvt. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 6 Draw a rectangle around the upper-left corner of the floor plan. 338 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . Tile views in the drawing window 1 Close all project view drawings except Floor Plan: Level 1 and Wall Type Legend. m_Legends_in_progress. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing.

The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 1 from the Wall Type Legend. Using Revision Tracking. and enter a date. 9 On the File menu. or changes in building material availability. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 In the Revisions dialog box. yet as concise as possible. the revision is locked and issued to the field. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. click Open. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Add a revision to the project 3 Click on the value for Release Date. These changes can be due to owner requests. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. In this exercise. click Revisions. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. When Issued is selected. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. 10 Proceed to the next lesson. In general. click Close. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds.rvt located in the Metric folder. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. Open m_Revisions. You can create a sequence of revisions. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. If you select By Sheet. When you use this option. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog box. contractor inquiries. 4 Click on the value for Description. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. and enter Moved window and added second window to Living Room. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Using the table. Using Revision Tracking Revit Building provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. Using Revision Tracking | 339 . For example. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. if the active revision is number 1.

and press ENTER. 8 On the File menu. name the file m_Revisions-in progress. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Select the dimension value to the left of the window. including revision number and revision date. enter 1200 mm. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. expand Views. 340 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . select the window. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. click Save As. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 3 In the small empty room. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. and click Save. The selected window is moved to the left 900 mm. m_Revisions-in progress. 7 Click OK. In most instances. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud.rvt.If Visible is not selected. you make changes to the project floor plan. 9 Navigate to your preferred directory. 2 Double-click Level 1 to open it in the drawing area. Sketching Revision Clouds. Modify a window 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and expand Floor Plans. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise.

rvt. 7 Move the cursor to the right until the distance from the midpoint is 1800 mm. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 12 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 15 On the File menu.Add a window 5 Verify that the modified window is still selected in the drawing area. m_Revisions-in progress. click Revision Cloud. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. you load a revision tag into the project. 11 In the drawing area. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified windows. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. Using Revision Tracking | 341 . 9 On the Design Bar. Revit Building is now in sketch mode. click Modify to end the command. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Finish Sketch. and click 6 Select the midpoint of the casement window as the start point. 8 Click to place the second window. 13 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. Add a revision cloud 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. on the Edit toolbar. 14 On the Design Bar. Tagging Revision Clouds. click near the windows you have changed.

Working with Revisions In this exercise. 10 On the File menu. 8 In the drawing area. and click Open. and click OK. and because the revision is the first in the project. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. click OK. dialog box. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 4 In the drawing area. click Tags. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. under Floor Plans. Add a revised view to a sheet 3 In the Project Browser. click New ➤ Sheet. you create additional revisions in the revision table. on which you place a revised view. In the Tags dialog box.rvt. 3 In the Tags dialog box. clear Leader. verify that A0 Metric is selected. select Level 1. 5 In the Open dialog box. 6 Draw a rectangle around the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. Tag a revision cloud 7 On the Options Bar.Load a revision tag 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Save. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. You then issue a revision. you create a sheet view in your project. m_Revisions-in progress. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click to place the floor plan. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. 9 Click to place the tag. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. Because you chose to number by project. click Tag. 4 Click Load. and drag it onto the sheet view.rfa. you need to add one. Working with Revisions. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 6 In the Tags. browse to Annotations\M_Revision Tag. Create a sheet view 1 On the View menu. 2 On the Options Bar. A new sheet view is created in the project. scroll down to Revision Clouds. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 342 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

you prevent further changes to the revision. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. click Close. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 12 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. clear Visible for each issued revision. Using Revision Tracking | 343 . under Add. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. and click OK. You can continue to add revisions. 14 Click OK. 13 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. 15 On the File menu. 11 In the Revisions dialog box. 9 Select Issued. On the Settings menu. enter a name for Issued to. click New. Issue a revision 7 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. click Revisions. 8 In the Revisions dialog box. click Revisions. you can no longer modify it. Create additional revisions 10 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. You do this by issuing the revision.The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. NOTE After you issue a revision. On the Settings menu. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.

344 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

like a standard detail that you want to add to a library. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. These components scale with the building model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail.Detailing 12 In this tutorial. In this tutorial. and metal studs. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. 345 . plywood. you learn how to create details in Autodesk Revit Building. you also learn how to change the detail component display order and visibility settings in a detail to create depth and show varying levels of detail. using detail components to represent materials like lumber.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. expand Floor Plans. In order to detail from the building model. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. You create the callout view by adding a callout to the section view. Creating a Callout View In this exercise. The callout defines the extents of the callout view. and double-click First Floor. expand Views (all). The section line that you see in the floor plan indicates that a section view has been added to the project. click the Training Files icon. you detail the foundation sill of a small house. you trace over the building model geometry.rvt located in the Metric folder. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. Open m_Cape_House. In the callout view. add detail components. 346 | Chapter 12 Detailing .Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you create a callout view that references the foundation sill of the house. The callout view is a larger view of the area that you define in the section view with the callout. Modify the section view 1 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 347 .2 On the Design Bar. 3 Click the break symbol to create a gap in the section line. click Modify and select the section line. 4 Select and move the blue grips of the interior end points of the section line so the section line is displayed as in the following illustration. Blue grips and a break symbol display on the section line.

■ Reposition the callout head 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Add the callout by drawing a rectangle around the left side of the foundation: ■ Click in the section view where the upper left corner of the callout rectangle displays in the following illustration.Add a callout to the section view to specify the callout view 5 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the grip near the callout head and move it to the bottom left side of the view as shown in the following illustration. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 348 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and click the tab in the context menu. 8 On the Options Bar. The callout border and tag highlight and display blue grips. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:5 for Scale. click Callout. Click in the section view where the lower right corner displays. and select the callout border. click Modify. 6 Double-click the head of the section line to display the section view. click Modify.

Notice that the alignment of the level is locked to the site level. 16 In the view. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ Enter Section Detail @ Foundation Sill for View Name. click View Properties. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 349 . 13 On the View menu. click Modify and double-click the callout head.Display and modify the callout view 12 On the Design Bar. The callout view is displayed. 15 Click OK. Select Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. select the First Floor level line. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box.

that you add to the view are visible only in this view. click Lines.17 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP If you do not see the Filled Region command.rvt. select Chain and click . They are also view specific. 350 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Detailing the View In this exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. Exact dimensions are not important. 3 In the Type Selector. Create a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside the foundation wall 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. which means that any detail components. 4 On the Options Bar. region objects. turn off the display of some of the Design Bar tabs. and then add detail components to the detail that represent lumber. 5 Trace the region representing the sloped grade using the following illustration for reference. and insulation objects. select Wide Lines. as well as detail lines. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. TIP Enter SO on your keyboard to turn off snapping as you sketch. m_Cape_House. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. Detailing the View. sub-flooring. click Filled Region. and an anchor bolt. Notice that the Design Bar is now in Sketch mode and the model geometry is grayed out. You start by adding a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside of the foundation wall. you detail the view of the foundation sill. siding.

the pattern does not display. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 351 . The earth fill pattern is displayed in the filled region. enter Earth for Name.6 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. select <Invisible lines>. 15 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. click Modify and select the two lines shown in the following illustration. click Finish Sketch to complete the filled region. and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 Click OK three times. NOTE You may have to zoom out to view the earth fill pattern in the filled region. under Name and Pattern. select EARTH. 14 In the Type Selector. If you are zoomed in too far. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 11 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 13 On the Design Bar. click in the Fill Pattern type parameter Value field. 9 In the Name dialog box. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box.

navigate to Detail Components\Structural\Wood in the Metric Library. 22 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber Section counter-clockwise. 18 In the Open dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. click Detail Component. select the following lumber components: ■ ■ ■ 38X140 38X235 38X286 20 Click Open.Add lumber detail components 16 On the Design Bar. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section 38X235.rfa. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. click . 21 In the Type Selector. 23 Place the 38X235 Lumber component in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. 19 At the bottom of the dialog box. 352 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select M_Dimension Lumber-Section.

and place it in the detail view. 25 In the Type Selector.24 Place a 38X235 lumber component as shown in the following illustration.Section: 38x140. select M_Dimension Lumber. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 353 .

Add a plywood detail component to the exterior wall face 29 Place another plywood component on the exterior face of the wall as shown in the following illustration. select M_Plywood : 25mm. 28 Place the plywood component above the last 38X235 that you added as shown in the following illustration. 27 In the Type Selector. TIP You may need to use the Align tool to place the plywood component. 354 | Chapter 12 Detailing .Add a plywood detail component to represent the sub-flooring 26 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component.

36 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. click Edit/New. until enough lap siding displays to cover it. enter 19 mm for Thickness. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. 41 Add the lap siding to the plywood on the exterior face: ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the plywood detail component. click Duplicate. Verify Detail Rotation is set to None. and click OK. enter Lap Siding for Name. . select m_anchorbolt and place it in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. Verify Fill Available Space is selected for Layout. 35 On the Options Bar. click . click Repeating Detail. click Detail Component. Select Inside. and click OK. Add an anchor bolt detail component 32 On the Design Bar. change the following type parameters: ■ ■ Select m_lap siding for Detail. and click to place the lap siding. Add a lap siding to the exterior wall as a repeating detail component 34 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ 40 Click OK twice. this parameter determines the appropriate spacing between the repeated components so that they fill the space that you select evenly. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box.30 On the Design Bar. select the plywood on the exterior face of the wall. and click 31 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 355 . 33 In the Type Selector. Move the cursor up along the plywood component. 38 In the Name dialog box. When you place the repeating detail component.

meaning they display only in this view. m_Cape_House. click Detail Lines. click Modify and select the repeating lap siding detail component. The lap siding is displayed along the plywood. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. on the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise.rvt. Like detail components. they are view specific. you add lines to your detail. 356 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.NOTE You may need to move your cursor above the crop region of the detail view to place the lap siding along the entire length of the plywood. Adding Detail Lines. If you need to make modifications to the lap siding after you place it. click Wide Lines. 3 Sketch detail lines to enclose the bottom end of the lap siding as shown in the following illustration. Select and move the blue grips on the repeating detail line to shorten or lengthen the lap siding. 2 In the Type Selector.

and click OK. 13 Trace over the interior wall face as shown in the following illustration. The model geometry that displays underneath the detail components and lines is grayed out. 12 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. select . Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 357 . select Chain. select Medium lines. 11 In the Type Selector. 9 Add two more detail lines as shown in the following illustration. select As underlay for the Display Model instance parameter. select Medium Lines. click View Properties.4 On the View menu. 6 On the Design Bar. 8 Using the underlay inside wall face and floor as references. click Filled Region. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. sketch a 20 x 100 mm baseboard. 7 In the Type Selector. Create a filled region that represents the15 mm gypsum board 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click .

enter Plasterboard for Name. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Name and Pattern. click Region Properties. 18 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate.14 On the Design Bar. 20 Click OK three times. select Gypsum-Plaster. and click OK. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 17 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New. 21 On the Design Bar. 358 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Finish Sketch to view the gypsum board.

Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 359 . 24 On the Options Bar. under Name and Pattern. you turn off the display of the model geometry. 23 In the Type Selector. If there were no filled region to represent the foundation walls.rvt. 26 On the Design Bar. click Line Styles. 3 In the New Subcategory dialog box. click Filled Region. enter Concrete for Name. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation. 31 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. select Concrete. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. 29 In the Name dialog box. under Modify Subcategories. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 In the Type Properties dialog box. 25 Trace a rectangle over the foundation wall. Add a vapor barrier 1 On the Settings menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 32 Click OK three times.Create a filled region that represents the foundation wall 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click New. click Edit/New. the region would be blank. select . click Duplicate. and click OK. select Medium Lines. click Region Properties. 33 On the Design Bar. enter Vapor Barrier for Name. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation In this exercise. Near the end of this lesson. 2 In the Line Styles dialog box. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch to view the concrete filled region. and click OK. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. you add a vapor barrier and insulation to the detail. m_Cape_House.

4 Under Lines Styles. enter 120 mm for Width and 65 mm for Offset to center. Adding Break Lines In this exercise. you add break lines to the detail. 8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. 360 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Detail Lines. 9 Click the right face of the interior wall to create a line as shown in the following illustration. click Insulation. 7 In the Type Selector. make the following changes to Vapor Barrier: ■ ■ ■ Select 3 for Line Weight/Projection. select Vapor Barrier. 5 Click OK to complete the new line style. click and enter 28mm for Offset. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add insulation 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Break Lines. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Select Black for Line Color. Select Dash for Line Pattern. 12 Sketch the insulation: ■ ■ Click at the top and to the right of the exterior wall face underlay of the wall to specify the start point. Move your cursor down to the top of the 38x140 and click to specify the endpoint.

rvt. Add a break line to the floor 6 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the view displays as in the following illustration. verify that M_Break Line is selected. 3 Place the break line at the top of the wall section as shown in the following image. 2 In the Type Selector. Add a break line to the top of the wall section 1 On the Design Bar. m_Cape_House. click Detail Component. and select the crop boundary of the detail view. 4 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select M_Break Line. click Detail Component. 8 Place the break line approximately in the center of the floor as shown in the following illustration. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 361 .

and click OK. select Do not display for Display model. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. click Modify. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added previously. NOTE You may need to drag the shape handles of the break line to resize it to the illustration. click and rotate the break line until it displays as shown in the following illustration. 362 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 10 On the Tools toolbar.9 On the Design Bar. and select the break line. When you turn the display model off. as shown in the following illustration. click View Properties. Turn off the visibility of model components to view detail components only 11 On the View menu.

13 Proceed to the next exercise. click Text. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click to create a leader with two segments. 5 If you want to save your changes. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 363 . Click again to set the elbow position of the leader.rvt. m_Cape_House. 6 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. Enter the text. click Save As. select 4 mm text for Text size. Click again to set the location of the text box. you add text notes to complete the detail. 4 Add the leaders and notes shown in the following illustration: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to set the location of the arrow. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 On the Type Selector.

you can set only doors in a detail view to display in fine detail. You also learn how to override line styles and detail level settings for each model element. expand Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you learn to modify the display of detail components in your detail views.rvt located in the Common folder. For example. A detail component can display in front or in back of all other components. you can arrange the order in which detail components display. or can display in front of or in back of specific components. Open the detail view 1 In the Project Browser. The section line that you see in the top right corner of the floor plan indicates that a section view that cuts through the kitchen sink and cabinet has been added to the project. Within a detail view. Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View In this exercise. The filled regions in the detail section view do not overlap properly. display in coarse detail. while other model elements. click the Training Files icon. and double-click Basement. 2 Double-click the section line head to display the section view. expand Views (all). click Open. Open c_Office_Building. 364 | Chapter 12 Detailing . you change the order in which detail components in a detail view of a kitchen sink and cabinet display. such as walls and windows.Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views In this lesson.

select it. behind the cabinet. click . Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 365 . 4 With the sink selected. click . The sink now displays as if it was in front of the cabinet detail component. The sink is now sent to the back of the drawing. Display the sink behind the cabinet 5 Select the sink and. and when it highlights. on the Options Bar.Display the sink in front of the cabinet 3 Move your cursor over the kitchen sink detail component. on the Options Bar.

Select the base cabinet and try the various depth options on the Options Bar. c_Office_Building. a cabinet. Open four different views 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 3 On the View menu. 2 On the Window menu. and overriding detail level settings. double-click Level 1. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. select Zoom ➤ Zoom In Region. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Tile. using halftone.There are three stacked detail components in this detail: a sink. 366 | Chapter 12 Detailing . you change the visibility settings of several views by overriding line styles. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View In this exercise. select Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Display the furniture in the basement view in halftone 4 On the View menu. 5 Click in the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view and draw a zoom box around the furniture as shown in the following illustration. and a simple fill pattern.

13 On the View menu. The door tags are not displayed. select Visibility/Graphics. scroll down to Furniture. 16 Move the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box so you can view the floor plan. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. select Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 10 Click OK. 7 On the View menu. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. The furniture within this view is displayed in halftone. click the Annotation Categories tab. Turn off door tags in the Level 1 Floor Plan 11 In the Project Browser. click the Model Categories tab. expand Views (all). and click Apply. select Visibility/Graphics. 12 On the View menu. 9 Under Visibility.6 Maximize the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view. 14 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 15 Clear the Visibility for Door tags. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 367 . and select Halftone.

Select Solid for Line Pattern. select Coarse for Detail Level. Change the cut line style for walls in the view 19 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. Select 8 for Line Weight. click Override under Line Style Cut for Walls. All the walls in this view are displayed as coarse regardless of the settings in the View Properties dialog box. 21 Click OK twice. The cut line style of the walls is now significantly heavier. 368 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 18 For Walls. click the Model Categories tab. The walls in this view display in a coarse level of detail while the rest of the floor plan is displayed in a fine level of detail. 20 In the Select Line Style dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Override. and click Apply.Display walls in coarse detail in the Level 1 Floor Plan 17 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. Select Black for Line Color.

Creating a Detail in the Drafting View In this exercise. you learn how to create a drafted detail. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. enter the following: ■ ■ Enter Door Detail for Name. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. is displayed in the Project Browser. 5 Proceed to the next exercise. Select 1:5 for Scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create a door detail in this new drafting view. 3 Click OK to create the new drafting view. In the next exercise. and expand Drafting Views. click Open. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. you create a drafting view that is not associated with a building model. After you create a drafting view. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. The new drafting view.22 If you want to save your changes. click New ➤ Drafting View. Creating a Drafting View In this exercise. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. on the File menu. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Building or by importing details from an existing detail library. click Save As. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (all). named Door Detail. 4 In the Project Browser. Create the new drafting view 1 On View menu. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 23 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating a Drafted Detail | 369 . you create a door detail in the new drafting view. Open m_Drafting_views. The building model is no longer displayed in the drawing window because you have created a drafting view that is not associated with the building model. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View.

5 Permanently dimension the door jamb sketch so that the dimension values match those in the following illustration. When the dimension value displays in blue. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. 4 On the Design Bar. 3 Sketch the door jamb shown in the following illustration. After you create a dimension. 370 | Chapter 12 Detailing . TIP You may want to use the Chain option when you sketch the door jamb. Create a drafted door detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. and then use the Split and Trim tools to complete the sketch.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Dimension.rvt. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. you can change its value by clicking Modify on the Design Bar and selecting one of the lines the dimension references. click Detail Lines. You can also use the Rectangles sketching tool to create the basic shapes. select Wide Lines. you can change it. m_Drafting_views.

click for the Fill pattern type parameter. under Name. click Filled Region. click Duplicate. Under Dimension Snaps. click Lines. 20 In the Type Selector. The detail with filled regions (the gypsum wall board with the sand drafting pattern) is displayed. 9 Turn off automatic snapping to facilitate sketching in close detail: ■ ■ On the Settings menu. On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. click Finish Sketch. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK 3 times. 8 On the Options Bar. 21 Sketch the 50 mm x 15 mm door trim as shown.Create filled regions 6 You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Detail Lines. Creating a Drafted Detail | 371 . and click OK. verify Drafting is selected. select Sand. click . click Edit/New. 19 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Name dialog box. click Snaps. 16 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. and click OK. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 Sketch two 15 mm thick rectangles as shown. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Under Pattern Type. clear Length dimension snap increments. select Wide Lines. enter Sand. 11 On the Design Bar.

24 Drag the door jamb dimension controls to pull the dimensions away from the detail. Adjust witness lines 23 Select each door jamb dimension.22 On the Design Bar. 372 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and add 2 dimensions to the door trim. click Dimension. 25 Add an overall dimension of the door jamb.

click Edit/New. enter 38 x 125. 34 In the Name dialog box.Sketch a door 26 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. 36 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber counter-clockwise. select M_Dimension Lumber 38X140. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Hide Object from the context menu. enter 125 for the Width type parameter. 30 In the Type Selector. and click OK. Add the dimensional lumber for the header 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 31 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Type Selector. click . TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. TIP You may find it helpful to temporarily hide the dimensions in the view when sketching the door. select Medium Lines. click Detail Lines. 37 Place the lumber component in the detail. Select the desired dimensions. click the Hide/Isolate command. 28 Draw lines that represent the door as shown. and on the View Control Bar. click Detail Component. Creating a Drafted Detail | 373 . 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK twice.

38 Stack another 38 x 125 directly above the one that you placed in the previous step to complete the header. click Detail Component. Add two break lines 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Add two break lines as shown. select Break Line. 374 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 40 In the Type Selector. TIP Rotate and move the bottom break line to adjust its masking element.

click Text. click to create a leader with two segments. and expand Drafting Views. 43 In the Options Bar. 48 Select Door Detail. 49 Click to specify an insertion point. verify that A0 metric is selected.Add text notes to complete the detail 42 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and drag it onto the sheet. Place the drafting view on a new sheet 45 On the View menu. 47 In the Project Browser. expand Views. 50 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. Creating a Drafted Detail | 375 . 46 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 44 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. click New ➤ Sheet.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 376 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and then click Open. Import a complete detail in DWG format 4 On the File menu. select Preserve colors. 5 In the Import/Link dialog box. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. m_Drafting_views. DXF. 3 Click OK. After you explode it. select m_Rail_detail. DGN. The detail that you import is in DWG format. enter the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Rail Detail for Name. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View.51 Proceed to the next exercise. select New ➤ Drafting View.dwg from the Metric folder in the Training Files. The detail is imported as an import symbol. In order to modify it.rvt. Enter 5 for the Scale value. Select Custom for Scale. 6 At the bottom of the Import/Link dialog box. you must explode it. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the detail. Create a new drafting view 1 On the View menu. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. the DWG entities are converted into Revit Building elements. under Layer/Level Colors. 7 On the View menu.

click Modify. Creating a Drafted Detail | 377 . and select all of the text blocks in the detail. click Modify. and then select the detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 In the Color dialog box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. and the text within the detail is converted to Revit Building text. The text is displayed as black after you click in the drawing area.Explode the imported detail 8 On the Design Bar. click . and click Full Explode. select black. The text retains the DWG layer color. 9 Right-click. 12 On the Options Bar. The lines of the detail are converted to detail lines. click the button in the Color type parameter Value field. click Edit/New. and click OK 3 times. click Delete Element(s). press and hold CTRL. 10 If an error dialog box displays. Change the text color to black and add text leaders 11 On the Design Bar.

378 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Creating a Reference Callout. 17 On the Options Bar. click . 19 Add leaders to the remaining text notes to complete the detail as shown.Add leaders to the text notes 16 On the Design Bar. A leader is added to the text note. MET STUD FRAMING. click Modify. and select the bottom text note. 18 Select and move the leader grips to position the leader as shown. 20 Proceed to the next exercise.

rvt. and select Drafting View: Door Detail (1/A101). The door detail that you drafted previously is displayed. Display the reference view 7 On the Design Bar. The section view is displayed. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Drafting_views. click Callout. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the door detail that you previously created. The callout head displays the detail and sheet information (1/A101) because the referenced drafting view is already placed on this sheet. expand Sections. NOTE When a view has been placed on a sheet view. it appears in the Reference other view list with the detail number and sheet number displayed after the view name. 6 Select the callout. 5 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble over the upper left door corner. click Modify. select Reference other view. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Zoom in on the Level 1 doors.Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. Creating a Drafted Detail | 379 . and double-click the callout. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 1. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. expand Views (all).

Otherwise. close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As.8 If you want to save your changes. 380 | Chapter 12 Detailing . on the File menu.

Scheduling 13 In this tutorial. you learn how to create different types of schedules in your Autodesk Revit Building projects. 381 .

you learn how to create type and instance schedules.Creating Type and Instance Schedules In this lesson. creating a type schedule. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. You begin by creating an instance schedule. 382 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . you can list each component as a separate line item. creating an instance schedule. or you can group components of the same type into a single line item. or a schedule that lists every window in the building. When you schedule building components in Revit Building. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

5 Using the same process. select Windows. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. under Category. select Comments and click Add. Create a new window schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. or a schedule that lists the windows by window type. click the Fields tab. you change the window instance schedule to a window type schedule. 7 Click OK. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. and click View. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 6 Under Scheduled fields. click Schedule/Quantities. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. Creating Type and Instance Schedules | 383 . click Open. and click OK. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Open m_Schedules. right-click in the Design Bar.Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 4 Under Available fields. Finally.

13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. on the Options Bar. sorted by type mark. 9 In the warning dialog box that is displayed. in large building models with many views. 11 In the Project Browser. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. 15 Select Type Mark for Sort by. 384 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 12 Right-click on the schedule. this can be a time-consuming process. click Show. click the Sorting/Grouping tab.Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 8 Select any cell in the first row of the window schedule and. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Close. NOTE By clicking Show. However. and click View Properties. The window schedule is displayed. 10 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog box. and double-click Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. 16 Click OK twice. under Other. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 385 .Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 17 Right-click on the schedule. and click View Properties. click Edit for the Sorting/Grouping instance parameter. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. The window type schedule is displayed. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. you create a room schedule from the floor plan of a large building model. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. you learn to add schedules and schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. 20 Click OK twice. click Save As. on the File menu. 22 Close the exercise file. 21 If you want to save your changes. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. clear Itemize every instance.

Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Under Available fields. select Number and click Add. right-click in the Design Bar. and click OK.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click View. click the Fields tab. 386 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). under Category. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields.rvt located in the Metric folder. and double-click flr 3 to make it the active view. click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Rooms. click Open. expand Floor Plans. Open m_Schedules. Several rooms and room tags exist in the floor plan. click the Training Files icon. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.

you define the font for the schedule headers. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. 9 To the right of Header text. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 7 Under Scheduled fields. 10 Click OK. Add new rooms to the schedule 11 On the Options Bar. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Tagged. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. Next. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet.6 Using the same process. next to Rows:. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 387 . A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. The room Number is 1. because the room is not tagged with a room tag. click New. 8 Click the Appearance tab.

13 Select Room in the Name column for Room 29. and enter Conference to change the room name. 388 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and select Conference from the list.12 Using the same process. double-click flr 3. None of the rooms have tags placed on them. and enter 30. 17 Zoom in on the right side of the building. 15 Select 1 in the Number column for Room 1. Add two room tags to the floor plan 16 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 14 Select Room in the Name column for Room 1. The second room is displayed at the bottom of the list and is numbered sequentially. add a second room.

and verify that Horizontal is selected. 22 Place the room tag in the small room across from the large conference room. select 29 Conference for Room. select 30 Conference for Room. and double-click Room Schedule to view the updated room rows. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click to place the room tag. 20 Move your cursor into the large room in the upper right corner of the floor plan. 23 In the Project Browser. and click Drafting. click Room Tag. right-click in the Design Bar. The boundaries of the room highlight before you place the room tag. 19 On the Options Bar. expand Schedules/Quantities.18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 389 . 21 On the Options Bar.

28 In the Project Browser. select Auto for Room. click Room Tag. 390 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 26 On the Options Bar. double-click Room Schedule to view the 11 rooms that you added to the schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. 27 Place the room tags as shown in the following illustration.Add eleven additional room tags 24 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click flr 3. 25 On the Design Bar.

select Services for Name. The name in the room tag is now Circulation. click . locate the room with an area of 92. and click OK. under Floor Plans. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 391 . click Modify. and click OK. select Office for Name. 34 On the Design Bar. click . under Identity Data. 31 On the Design Bar. press and hold CTRL. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box. and zoom in on the room. click Modify. and select the seven room tags shown in the following illustration. press and hold CTRL.Modify room tags 29 In the schedule. 35 With the room tags selected. double-click flr 3. and select the tags in the three remaining rooms named Room. and select Circulation for Name.11 square meters. 30 In the Project Browser. 32 With the room tags selected.

press and hold CTRL. and click Add. and Wall Finish. and click OK. 45 On the Options Bar. under Available fields. Floor Finish. select Base Finish. under Category. select Rooms. 392 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Enter Paint for Wall Finish. 46 Add information to the rows so that the schedule displays as shown in the following illustration. 41 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. click New twice to add two rows to the schedule.Add a schedule key 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Define three new room styles 42 On the Options Bar. click New to add a row to the schedule. 44 Using the same process. click the Key Name field. 39 Select Schedule keys. 43 In the new row. 38 In the New Schedule dialog box. click Schedule/Quantities. enter the following information in the row: ■ ■ ■ Enter Vinyl for Base Finish. 40 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and enter Std Office. Enter Carpet 1 for Floor Finish.

52 On the Options Bar. click Edit for Fields. 49 On the Options Bar. 50 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. View the room schedule 54 In the Project Browser. 39) in the lower right corner of the floor plan. and click OK. click Modify. 57 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and select the room tag in the large conference room (29) in the upper right corner of the floor plan. select Exec Offices for Room Style. under Other. double-click Room Schedule. click . 59 Click OK twice to update the schedule. 55 On the View menu. 58 Change the order of the schedule as shown in the dialog box below.Apply the new room styles to the room schedule 47 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click View Properties. under Schedules/Quantities. 38. click Modify. 53 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Available fields. 48 On the Design Bar. select Room Style. press and hold CTRL. and select the room tags in the three offices (37. and click Add. click . 56 Under Other. 51 On the Design Bar. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 393 . under Other. double-click flr 3. select Exec Offices for Room Style.

you create a room color diagram based on the names of the rooms in the floor plan.60 For the rooms in the schedule that are named Services. Creating a Room Color Diagram. 394 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . select Services from the list in the Room Style column. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise.

9 In the Color dialog box. m_schedules. Create a room color diagram 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click OK. click Modify. 10 In the PANTONE® Color Picker. click the color button for Conference.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Change the fill colors that are applied to the conference rooms 6 On the Design Bar. The rooms in the floor plan automatically change color. 5 In the alert dialog box. click PANTONE. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog box. expand Floor Plans. click Edit Color Scheme. scroll all the way to the left. click Color Fill. and click the color green. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 395 . 4 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. under Views (all). 2 Zoom out so you can view the entire building model. 11 Click OK three times. 7 On the Options Bar. and double-click flr 3.rvt. and select the color legend. A legend displays at the tip of your cursor. The fill color in the rooms named Conference are displayed as green.

select Project Units from the Settings menu and change the appropriate formats to metric. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you learn how to schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Building components. and click View. Open c_Schedules_2. You also learn how to create a furniture schedule that includes room name. and click OK. double-click Room Schedule. Room no longer displays in the key/legend. under Schedules/Quantities.Change the name of the single room named Room 12 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Design Bar. click Save As. and level. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. under Categories. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. select Services for Room (10) in the Name column. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Create a new wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. To display graphics with metric values. click Schedule/Quantities. click Open. number. The color diagram and legend reflect the changes that you made. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. graphics are displayed with imperial values. 16 Close the exercise file. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. select Walls.rvt located in the Common folder. 4 Under Available fields. click the Fields tab. 396 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 2 In the New Schedules dialog box. and save the exercise file with a unique name. NOTE Because the next two lessons use common files. double-click flr 3. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click the Training Files icon. 13 In the Room Schedule. on the File menu. 15 If you want to save your changes. select the following fields and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.

8 In the Element Properties dialog box. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Properties to view the element properties of the wall schedule that you created.Schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes 6 In the Project Browser. under Other. click Edit for Fields. add Assembly Code and Assembly Description to the schedule. The Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields display in the schedule. 7 Right-click Wall Schedule. 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 10 Click OK twice. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 397 .

14 Click OK in the dialog box that explains that the change will be applied to all elements of the chosen type. 398 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and select C1010115 .Fixed Partitions.Brick Veneer w/ Stud. click in the Assembly code column in the first row of the schedule. and double-click Level 1. All of the walls of this wall type are updated. expand C1010100 . under Views (all).Partitions . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project from the building model 15 In the Project Browser.Interior Construction. and click . expand Floor Plans.Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project within the schedule 11 In the wall schedule. 13 Click OK.Interiors. expand C . and then click in the schedule. expand C10 .Partitions. expand C1010 . 12 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box.

Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 399 .16 Select one of the Interior . expand C1010100. expand C10. double-click Furniture Schedule. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . under Schedules/Quantities. 17 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. double-click Wall Schedule. and select C1010145 . 19 In the Type Properties dialog box.5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls. Schedule building model components by level and room 23 In the Project Browser. 20 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. expand C1010.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. expand C. under Schedules/Quantities. 22 In the Project Browser.Partitions . 21 Click OK three times. click in the Assembly Code field. click Edit/New. and then click .

25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 400 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : 30 x 42 Horizontal. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 31 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click Properties. 34 Adjust the row length in the schedule by selecting and moving the blue grips that are displayed on the top of the schedule. and then add Level and Manufacturer to the schedule. click Sheet. 27 Add Room: Name and Room: Number to the schedule. click Edit for Fields. Change the appearance of the schedule 33 Zoom in on the schedule on the sheet. and click OK. 29 Click OK twice. and click to place it. 28 Select Furniture for Select available fields from. Place the Furniture Schedule on a new drawing sheet 30 On the View tab of the Design Bar.24 In the Project Browser. under Other. 32 Drag the furniture schedule from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select Room for Select available fields from. right-click Furniture Schedule.

38 Close the exercise file.35 Split the schedule into multiple segments by clicking the blue break line that is displayed on the right border of the schedule. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. Creating a Multi-Category Schedule In this exercise. These shared parameters can be added to any family. 36 Select the blue crosses that are displayed in the center of each schedule segment to reposition the schedule segments as shown. regardless of category. you create a multi-category schedule. click Save As. and creating a multi-category schedule. and are defined and stored in an external file. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Building multi-category schedules. on the File menu. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in pre-defined instance and type parameters either within family components or within the project template. 37 If you want to save your changes. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. adding the shared parameters to a family. ensuring consistency across families and projects. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 401 . The new schedule segments are automatically placed to the right of the original schedule and are top aligned.

ID. enter Closure for Name. and Lock Set. select Text for Type. Create parameters in the Hardware group 6 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 9 Add three additional parameters. Shared parameters are saved to an external file. click Create. and click OK. and assign Text for Type. Hinge. click New.You create shared parameters. 10 After you add the parameters. click Shared Parameters. Create a shared parameter file 1 On the File menu. click OK. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. If you are working on a network. Create a new parameter group to store individual parameters 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. make sure you save your shared parameter files in a location where other users can access it. The shared parameter file (TXT) is created. add them to a door family. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 7 Under Parameters. click New. create a multi-category tag that you use to tag a simple floor plan. 3 In the Save As dialog box. verify that Hardware is selected for Parameter group. and click OK. and then generate the multi-category schedule. 5 In the New Parameter Group dialog box. Click OK if the alert box indicates that the shared parameter file does not exist. enter a file name. and click Save. under Groups. enter Hardware. 402 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . You store all of your hardware-related parameters within this group for use in the project.

select Instance. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 403 . You are now working in the Family Editor. 12 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The Family Types dialog box displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Yale for Lock Set. under Parameters. click Family Types. The parameters are displayed in the Family Types dialog box. Enter N/A for Closure. Enter Chrome for Hinge. and click Select. setting them as Type parameters. and click OK. select Shared parameter. under Parameters. 19 Repeat the steps for the other parameters. 22 Save the file as NewDoor in an appropriate location.rfa located in the Common folder. click Open. 23 On the File menu. 20 Assign the new parameters the following values by entering them in the corresponding Value field. 13 Open c_ Door. 15 In the Family Types dialog box. 21 Click OK. and click OK. click Close to close the file. 17 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. so that you can use it later in this exercise. 14 On the Design Bar. click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select ID. Enter 1 for ID.Add the shared parameters to a family 11 On the File menu. click the Training Files icon.

30 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. This option ensures that this tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter (i. NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag. Use the multi-category tag in a project 40 On the File menu. as shown. 38 Save the file as HardwareTag in an appropriate location.rvt located in the Common folder. click Close to close the file. click Lines. select Hardware. 27 Click at the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog box. Open.Create a multi-category tag 24 On the File menu. and click Open. 34 Zoom in to the tag at the intersection of the reference planes. 35 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 32 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 41 In the Open dialog box. under Parameter Group. 33 Click OK. A multi-category tag must have at least one label with an external parameter set as a filter parameter. the tag cannot attach to any component.. select Filter parameter. click . 37 Draw a rectangle around the tag. 36 On the Options Bar. 31 Under Parameters. click Label. select Multi-Category Tag. 404 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and click OK twice. click Add. 28 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click Open. ID). 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 26 On Design Bar. 25 In the New dialog box. select c_Hardware_Plan.rft in the Annotations folder. 39 On the File menu.e. select ID. click Select.

44 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. 51 In the New Schedule dialog box. Create a multi-category schedule 50 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and load into the project the multi-category tag files HardwareTag.rfa and NewDoor. 43 Replace any existing doors by selecting them and changing their type to the NewDoor type that you just loaded. select Multi-Category Tags for Category.42 On the File menu. click Tag. 48 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ID Mark Type Family Closure Lock Set NOTE Do not be concerned with duplicate ID and Lock Set fields. Notice that the HardwareTag is reading the shared parameter that you created earlier and attached to the Door family.rfa that you just created. 49 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. and click OK. 45 In the Type Selector. 47 Click to place the tag. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 405 . click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Tag All Not Tagged to quickly tag all the components with the filter parameter. 52 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select the multi-category HardwareTag that you just loaded. and click OK. 46 Move your cursor into the drawing window. Notice that you can highlight only those components that have the filter parameter that you set earlier to ID. 53 Click OK. select Multi-Category from the list.

you create a level based door schedule. You use both filters and a formula to create the second schedule. and save the exercise file with a unique name. However. 54 If you want to save your changes. you want to filter out all doors that are not on level 3 to include only the 11 doors listed above. The second schedule that you create is a wall schedule that calculates the cost of the walls in the project.rvt located in the Metric folder. Open m_First_Project-West_Wing. and double-click Level 3. click Save As.UK_Single-Flush: SO 1010 x 2410 mm If you created a standard door schedule. all of the doors in the project would be scheduled. expand Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The floor plan is displayed. click Open. click the Training Files icon. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules In this lesson. expand Views (all). based on wall area.M_Single-Flush Vision: 915 x 2134 mm 3 . you create two schedules. The first schedule that you create is a level-based door schedule that uses a filter to exclude all of the doors that are not on floor three of the building model. Create a new door schedule for level flr 3 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.M_Single-Flush Vision: 864 x 2032 mm 3 . on the File menu. View the third floor of the building 1 In the Project Browser. click Schedule/Quantities. Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. There are 11 doors of the following types on this level of the building model: ■ ■ ■ 5 . 55 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.The multi-category schedule is displayed. 406 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

Select Level 3 in the third menu. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Sill Height Head Height Width Level 7 Click the Filter tab. click the Filter tab. under Other. Under Name. select Level. and select (none) for Filter. 4 Click OK. Verify New Construction is selected for Phase. select the following fields. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.Level 3. click Edit for Filter. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules | 407 . 6 Under Available fields. The schedule includes the count and type for only doors on floor 3. Hide the Level field in the schedule so it is used only to filter the doors that are not on level 3 and not included as a column in the schedule 9 Click the Formatting tab. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 Click OK twice. and specify the following options: ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort by. click the Fields tab. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. This filter checks each door in the project to see which level it is associated with. and click View Properties. and it causes the schedule to include only the doors on Level 3. and click OK. select Hidden Field. Verify Schedule building components is selected. Clear Itemize every instance to group the like door types into one row. 10 Under Fields. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. The counts for the door types represent the door schedule for the entire model. enter Doors . Select equals in the second menu. 12 Right-click the schedule. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Level in the first menu. 11 Under Field formatting. select Doors. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.3 In the New Schedule dialog box.

5 Under Available fields. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula In this exercise.rvt. The wall type information for each wall is updated when you enter this data. select the following fields. click Schedule/Quantities. 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 Under Fields. The schedule is displayed. 7 Select Family and Type for Sort by. click the Fields tab. you create a wall schedule that provides a total cost of all of the walls in the project based on the total square footage of each wall type. enter a cost value for each type in the schedule. and then under Field Formatting. 408 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . m_First_Project-West_Wing. 9 Click the Formatting tab. Use the cost values in the following illustration. 14 Since no cost has been assigned to these wall types. 8 Clear Itemize every instance to group the like wall types into one row. click once so the schedule represents only the doors on Flr 3. select Calculate totals so that the total area of the each type is calculated. select Cost. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. Verify New Construction is selected under Phase. Verify Schedule building components is selected. enter Cost/Sq. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 12 Under Fields. select Walls. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Category.16 On the Standard toolbar. Create a new schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click OK. m to more accurately represent the data. 11 Under Heading. 13 Click OK. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Cost Area 6 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula. select Area.

without the value it would have a unit of area. 24 In the Format dialog box. you learn how to schedule project parameters. m column. NOTE The /(1 m^2) in the formula is required to make the resulting value unitless. This is because you did not select to calculate the totals for that field. They cannot be shared with other projects and. click Save As. select Total Cost. and click View Properties. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 27 Select Grand totals to have the schedule display the sum of any row for which you selected Calculate totals on the Formatting tab. Notice that there is no grand total displayed for the Cost/Sq. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click OK twice. Select 2 decimal places for Rounding. Enter Area * Cost/(1 m^2) for Formula. click Edit for Fields. Project parameters are instance or type parameters that you can use to schedule information specific to the project that you are working with. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Select Fixed for Units. 29 Close the exercise file. 28 If you want to save your changes. Scheduling Project Parameters In this lesson. 19 Click OK. 23 Click Field Format. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog box. unlike shared parameters. Scheduling Project Parameters | 409 . on the File menu. The schedule is displayed. 25 Click OK. Verify that Number is selected for Type. select Calculate totals to ensure that a total of all the walls is returned. 20 Click the Formatting tab. under Other. click Calculated Value. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 21 Under Fields. 22 Under Field formatting. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. you cannot use them to tag objects. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.Determine the total cost for each wall type by multiplying the total area of the wall by the cost per square foot 15 Right-click the schedule. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box.

TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. Assign the new Occupant parameter to the project and create the room schedule 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you can add information to the Occupant column in the schedule. After you create the schedule. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open m_Office_2. you create a room schedule for the following office floor plan that includes the project parameter. select Rooms to associate the Occupant parameter with the Room category. Enter Occupant for Name. You begin by adding the Occupant parameter to the project and creating the room schedule to include the Occupant parameter as a column in the schedule. 4 Click OK. and click Drafting. click Room Tag. either by entering it directly. Under Categories. 5 Click OK. click Add to create the new parameter. 410 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . or by entering it in the properties of the room tag. Occupant. click Project Parameters. Create a project parameter 1 On the Settings menu. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon. The new project parameter Occupant is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog box. click Open. 7 Tag the rooms as shown in the following illustration.Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters In this exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Project Parameter.

you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 13 Add names to the occupant field by entering them directly in the schedule or by entering them in the room tag properties. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise.8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 10 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 9 In the New Schedule dialog box. The Occupant field is displayed in the schedule. under Categories. on the File menu. select Rooms to create a room schedule. select the following fields. 14 If you want to save your changes. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Area Department Occupant 12 Click OK to generate the schedule. and click OK. Exporting Project Information with ODBC | 411 . click Save As. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. click Schedule/Quantities. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click the Fields tab. 15 Close the exercise file. 11 Under Available fields.

so that each table of elements includes an “Id” column. click Open. click Create. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. and click Next. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule.mdb for Database Name. and click OK to create the database. instance tables include a “TypeId” column containing the ID of the instance’s type. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. 412 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog box. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. 13 Close the exercise file. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box. Revit Building creates two tables for the following categories of elements: one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). select a location for the database file. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Building exports. used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. Open c_Schedules_2. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. and click Next. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. 9 Under Directories. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. under Database Name.rvt located in the Common folder. and some instance tables include a “RoomId” column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. 6 Click Finish. click OK in the dialog box. These parameters are exported as well and contain the ID of the key element. For example. click OK. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 10 When the confirmation displays. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. enter Revit_Project. click the File Data Source tab. 3 Click New. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialog boxes. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. Additionally. and open the database in Microsoft Access. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). under Database. click the Training Files icon. 8 In the New Database dialog box. 1 On the File menu. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. in addition to the Id column. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter.

and how to annotate and dimension your Autodesk Revit Building projects. 413 . you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 14 In this tutorial.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. and not 1504 m. After you define the levels as shared and relocate the project. For example.Setting the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. expand Views (all). Open m_simple_house. and Level 2 reads 1504 m. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. the elevation value of the second level of the house (4000 mm above Level 1) reports an elevation of 14000 mm. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. Project levels report elevation as it relates to other levels in the project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. you can relocate the project at a base elevation of 1500 m and define the levels as shared so that Level 1 reads 1500 m. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 meters and Level 2 is 4 meters above the base elevation.rvt located in the Metric folder. and double-click South. 414 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . and not 4 m. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. you relocate the base elevation of a small house from 0 m to 10000 m. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 m and Level 2 is 4 m above the base elevation. Shared levels report an elevation value relative to an origin that you establish when you relocate the project. expand Elevations. Level 1 reads 1500 m. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at sea level. You accomplish this in Revit Building by defining levels as either project or shared levels. while Level 2 reads 4 m. For example. click Open. Setting the Base Elevation of a House In this exercise.

10 Select the Level 1 line.Shared. select Shared for Elevation Base. The reported value of Level 2 changes to take the value of the global elevation into consideration. select Level : Level . under Constraints. 8 Click OK twice. 11 Move the cursor above the elevation line. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Relocate the project 9 On the Tools menu. By selecting the Level 1 line. 12 On the View menu. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. click Duplicate. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. Setting the Base Elevation of a Project | 415 . you specify the new location of the project. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. you specify the point from which you want to relocate the project. click . If you did that now. 6 In the Name dialog box. and you must create a new level type. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project.2 Select the Level 1 line. By entering 10000 mm in this step.Shared. In order for Level 1 to report the global elevation after the project is relocated. click Edit/New. and press ENTER. enter 10000 mm. 14 In the Type Selector. you would change the parameter for all the levels in the Project. However. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. 3 On the Options Bar. enter Level . The south elevation is displayed. and click OK. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 Select the Level 2 line. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box.

Dimensioning In this lesson. on the File menu. In Revit Building. double-click North. permanent dimensions are created automatically. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. as well as other views of the building model.15 In the Project Browser. click Save As. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. 18 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. so it reports an elevation of 18000 mm. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Elevations. define the roof level as shared. 16 Using the same method. there are two types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. 416 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. In this case. 17 If you want to save your changes. except when you sketch profiles to create families.

select it. The different types of dimensions that you can add include aligned. 4 Move the cursor over the wall at the very bottom of the view. 3 When the centerline of the wall highlights. click Open. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. move the cursor over the top straight wall on the floor plan. that you can add to your drawings. Create permanent dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. click the Training Files icon.Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Dimensioning | 417 . radial. By default. and when the centerline of the wall highlights. click Dimension. Open m_Dimensions. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. multi-segmented. and angular dimensions.rvt located in the Metric folder. select it. 2 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions. linear. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

click Dimension.5 Move the cursor to the left. outside of the wall. and click to set the location of the dimension. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. 6 Click the lock. In addition. 418 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The lock displays as locked. indicating that the dimension can be modified. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. and click to place the dimension. An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. Move the cursor below the lowest horizontal wall. 8 Dimension the four vertical walls: ■ ■ Select the four vertical wall segments sequentially. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. Create multi-segmented dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. The dimension displays in the drawing.

Select the curved corner wall to display the radial dimension. click Dimension. The slash no longer displays through the equal symbol. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. and click to place the dimension. and the are dimensions permanent and constrained to each other. 11 On the Options Bar. click 12 Dimension the curved wall: ■ ■ . Create a radial dimension 10 On the Design Bar. Dimensioning | 419 . indicating that the segments are now equal.9 Click the equal symbol to make all dimension segment lengths equal.

click Dimension. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. 420 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . and press DELETE. and place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing window. 17 Dimension the curved wall again: ■ ■ Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. The dimension is snapped to the wall center. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and zoom in around the curved wall. click Modify. click and select Wall faces for Prefer. 14 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. Select the inside face of the wall.13 On the View menu. 15 On the Design Bar. the default dimension option.

The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. You can override the cursor tracking by toggling with the spacebar. and then select the bottom point of the exterior face. and click to place the dimension. as shown in the following illustration. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall above it. and click to place the dimension. Move your cursor to the right. click . 20 Dimension the slanted wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the inside face of the slanted wall. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. click and verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. Create a linear dimension 21 On the Options Bar. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. Move your cursor to the left to size the dimension arc.You can now view the radial dimension within the floor plan. Dimensioning | 421 . 22 Dimension the vertical wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the top point on the exterior face of the wall. Create an angular dimension 19 On the Options Bar. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points.

Each time you press TAB. because the Prefer wall face option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. click Dimension. 24 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. click Modify. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. Controlling Witness Line Location. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. select it. 6 When the outside face of the wall highlights. delete. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. 2 On the Options Bar. Override dimension defaults 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. However. m_Dimensions. For example.23 On the Design Bar. but do not select anything. Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. 422 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 4 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer bottom wall face. including the wall centerline. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. 3 Move the cursor over the bottom wall. in some cases. and press TAB repeatedly. you learn to add. When you place dimensions. 5 Hover the cursor near the center of the bottom wall. for a multi-segmented dimension. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. a different wall selection choice highlights. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. and change the origin of dimension witness lines.

9 Place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. The dimension highlights and control boxes display on each witness line. click Modify. Dimensioning | 423 . Edit dimension witness lines 10 On the Design Bar.7 Move the cursor over the middle horizontal wall. 8 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall and select the exterior face. and select it. 11 Select the dimension line shown in the following illustration.

14 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line at the top wall. The witness line moves to the wall centerline. The witness line moves to the inside wall face. 13 Click the control box again. 424 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . but do not select it.12 Click once on the control box on the lowest witness line.

you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions.rvt. The witness line is deleted. a shortcut menu with different options is displayed. Dimensioning | 425 . click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. 18 To end the editing command. and click Delete Witness Line. Modifying Dimension Properties.15 Right-click the control box. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. click Modify and select the dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The full dimension string is displayed again. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 16 Right-click the remaining dimension line and click Edit Witness Lines. m_Dimensions. If you right-click the control box. 17 Select the outside face of the top wall.

As you create components. click Modify. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. when sketching walls. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. if two or more walls are colinear. enter 5 mm for the Text Size. Working with Alignments and Constraints. 426 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 7 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Right. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. 5 Click OK twice. The dimensions update as shown in the following illustration. a lock symbol immediately displays. click . and save the exercise file with a unique name. For example. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. Under Text. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the components is moved or modified. then Up for Read Convention. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. click Edit/New. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero.2 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 On the Design Bar. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text.

Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. The symbol changes to a closed lock. click Open. the first component that you select remains fixed in position. indicating that the alignment of the two walls is now locked. indicating the two walls are not constrained to each other. When you align two components. click the Training Files icon. 3 Click the lock.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. indicating that the Align command is active. Dimensioning | 427 . select Multiple Alignment. 6 Select the lower center wall to define it as the fixed wall to which the other walls will align. click . Align the three short horizontal walls below the two walls that you aligned 4 On the Tools toolbar. 5 On the Options Bar. click 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ . and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. Align the two uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Tools toolbar. The cursor displays two arrows at its tip. Select the exterior face of the short horizontal wall on the left. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. Open m_Alignment. The short horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall.

11 Select the middle wall and drag it downward. 10 On the Design Bar. Do not lock this segment of the alignment.7 Select the short wall to the left. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the two walls is not constrained (locked). 8 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. 428 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. 9 Select the short horizontal wall on the right.

Move the walls to verify the alignment. the Prefer wall faces or centerline option on the Options Bar does not apply to the doors. Dimensioning | 429 . and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall.12 On the toolbar. NOTE Because you are not aligning walls. 16 Select the centerline of Door 4 on the upper right side of the model. 15 On the Options bar. select Multiple Alignment. click once to undo the move. 13 Click the right wall. click . Align doors in the floor plan 14 On the Tools toolbar.

18 Click the lock to constrain the movement of the doors. 20 Select Door 1 and lock it to constrain it to the other doors. 19 Select Door 2 and lock it to constrain it Doors 3 and 4. 22 Slide the door up or down the wall and notice how the other doors move with it. 430 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify and select one of the aligned doors.17 Select the centerline of Door 3 to the left. 21 On the Design Bar. Door 3 aligns with Door 4.

indicating the constraint. click . 29 To view the constraint. 31 On the Tools toolbar. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall.Align the windows in the floor plan 23 On the Tools toolbar. on the Design Bar. 30 Click the lock to unlock it. 25 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. 26 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. A lock is displayed. The two windows align. 27 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. Dimensioning | 431 . click and repeat steps 27 . The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. click Modify.28 to align the windows. 24 On the Options Bar. clear Multiple Alignment. 28 Select the far right window in the top wall.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 View the lower horizontal wall and notice that it includes five windows. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. as shown in the following illustration.32 Align the remaining windows.rvt. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. m_Alignment. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each window displays in the dimension string. 432 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions.

5 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . click Dimension. on the File menu. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. 6 Select the lower horizontal wall. and then Widths. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 8 If you want to save your changes. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. the windows). Verify Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer.2 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. Select Entire Walls for Pick. The two vertical walls highlight. select Openings. 7 Move your cursor below the lower horizontal wall and click to add the dimension. 3 On the Options Bar. Click Options. Dimensioning | 433 . indicating the start and end of the dimension string. click Save As.

3 On the Options Bar. Open c_Area. click Open. 434 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click . You learn how to create angular dimensions and how to use an equality constraint to space the windows equally. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Dimension. and double-click Level 1. click the Training Files icon. expand Floor Plans. sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan. you dimension the three windows on a floor plan. 4 Dimension the three windows near the east entrance by selecting the centerline of each window and placing the dimensions as shown in the following illustration. Creating Angular Dimensions In this exercise. tag doors and windows. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Annotating In this lesson. you how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Building. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Common folder. rotate tags with building components. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ create angular dimensions. Create angular dimensions 1 In the Project Browser.

3 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. Tag rooms sequentially 1 On the View menu.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.5 Click the equal sign associated with the angular dimension string to equally space the windows. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. c_Area. and click to place the room tag. Sequentially Tagging Rooms In this exercise. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. you sequentially tag the rooms on the floor plan. The enclosed area that represents the room highlights to indicate that it will be tagged. Annotating | 435 . click Room Tag. Sequentially Tagging Rooms.

and select the room tag. Move the cursor into the room below the one previously tagged. ■ The second tag that you place displays the sequential number 102.4 On the Design Bar. click it. Click to place the new tag. enter 101. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. Sequential letters are also supported. 5 Zoom in on the tag number. and press ENTER. 7 Continue to place room tags. click Room tag. The room tag number displays in blue. 6 Place another room tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 436 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . indicating that it can be edited.

8 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. to add a tag with a leader. 4 Place the door with the tag in the room at the bottom left. 3 On the Options Bar. click Door. 2 In the Type Selector. as shown in the following illustration. Add a door and tag 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Place a door with a door tag and leader 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You learn how to add a door to the floor plan that includes a tag. select a door type that you want to add to the floor plan. and select Leader. you learn how to place door and window tags. and clear Leader. c_Area. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. 7 Place the door as shown in the following illustration. Tagging Doors and Windows. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and to tag doors and windows that are not tagged. click Door. Annotating | 437 . 6 On the Options Bar. select Tag on Placement to add a tag when you place the door in the floor plan.

Tag the windows in the floor plan 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 Place the door below Door 6. and click OK. verify that Door Tags is selected for Category. click Tag All Not Tagged. Tag a door after placing it 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The door is tagged with a tag and leader. click Tag All Not Tagged. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. under Category. 438 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . All of the windows that were not tagged are now tagged. select Create. 9 On the Options Bar.Place a door without a tag 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. clear Create. 13 Under Leader. and then click OK. Notice that the door is placed without a tag. 16 Under Leader. 12 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. select Window Tags. clear Tag on placement. click Door.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. click Save As. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. Annotating | 439 .17 If you want to save your changes.

440 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

441 . you learn to create and customize views of building information models. More specifically. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans.Viewing 15 In this tutorial. how to control fill pattern colors. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotation within views.

Open m_Viewing_Exercise. and three-dimensional (3D) views. and double-click East. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. on the Standard toolbar.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. expand Views (all). click . sections. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotation within them. including elevation and three-dimensional views. you learn how to access different views of the building model. 442 | Chapter 15 Viewing . A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. expand Elevations. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. locate the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. 2 In the Project Browser. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. click Open.rvt located in the Metric folder. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. You create elevations. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotation within building model views. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise.

The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Annotation Categories tab. Create a 3D view of the building model 9 On the View toolbar. Viewing a Building Model | 443 . The default name of the view is {3D}. 8 Click OK. 6 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. scroll down and clear Window Tags.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. This change is applied only to the active view. the east elevation. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog box. click Model Graphics Style. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. 7 Under Visibility. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. click . The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. This change is applied only in this elevation view. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. and click Hidden Line.

you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button while moving the mouse. . and click Rename. 14 View the Dynamic View dialog box in the lower left corner of the screen. The view follows the movement of the cursor. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera. double-click My 3D View. You can pan. zoom. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. and click OK. 17 In the Rename View dialog box. Save the current 3D view 15 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click to reorient the view. Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. . you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. right-click {3D}. 18 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. 12 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area.10 On the View toolbar. 13 Press and hold CTRL. expand Views (all). 11 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. and expand 3D Views. click X to close the view. 19 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 16 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog box. enter My 3D View. 444 | Chapter 15 Viewing .

Viewing a Building Model | 445 . right-click in the Design Bar. eye height. and click View. expand Floor Plans.Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Cameras define the eye point.rvt. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. outside of the dimension lines. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. and distance from the target. click Camera. After you specify the second point (the view target). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise. as shown in the following illustration.

Press and hold the left mouse button. 5 On the View menu. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog box to move the camera position and change the view.4 Select the blue grips that display on the crop region of the view and move them to resize the view so the view includes the entire building model. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. click Dynamically Modify View. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. 446 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and sideways to see how the view changes. Move the cursor up. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Press and hold the left mouse button. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog box. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog box. down.

Viewing a Building Model | 447 . Change the camera position. click Tile. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. 13 On the View menu. height. and target 12 On the Window menu. Press and hold the left mouse button. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.

16 Right-click. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. under Floor Plans. and move it to another location. double-click Level 1. under 3D Views.14 In the Project Browser. 17 In My 3D View. and click Show Camera. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). 15 In the Project Browser. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. click 3D View 1. 448 | Chapter 15 Viewing .

18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. Click OK. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. In the Element Properties dialog box. right-click. click to create a new 3D view. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. 20 On the View Control Bar. Viewing a Building Model | 449 . and click Properties. under Camera.3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. 21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. and click Shading.

22 On the View menu. 24 Click the section box. select Section Box. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. click View Properties. as shown in the following illustration. under Extents. A rotation tool is also displayed. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. A section box is displayed around the model. 450 | Chapter 15 Viewing .

Creating a Section View. Creating a Section View In this exercise. and maximize this view. m_Viewing_Exercise. expand Floor Plans. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Viewing a Building Model | 451 . you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view.rvt. double-click Level 1.26 Click and hold the rotation tool and rotate the section box around the model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

right-click. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. and double-click Section 1. and click Find Referring Views. expand Sections (Callout 1). Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. 6 Select the section view. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. double-click the section head. 3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. 452 | Chapter 15 Viewing . select Floor Plan: Level 1. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. or in the Project Browser. 8 Select the section line. 4 On the Design Bar.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Section. and click Open View. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. click Modify. View the section 5 To view the section.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.rvt. m_Viewing_Exercise. Viewing a Building Model | 453 . Notice the change in the view direction. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. 14 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. click Elevation. Creating Elevation Views. 12 Select the section line. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag.9 On the Design Bar. Notice the change in section depth. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. double-click Level 1. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. click Modify. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise.

double-click Elevation 1 . The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. 4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. 7 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. Elevation 1 . The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes.b. 5 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . 10 In the Project Browser.b. under Floor Plans. move the cursor around the building model. Do not select the arrow. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. double-click Level 1. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol.a. click Modify.a by default. 454 | Chapter 15 Viewing . Elevation 1 . and click.3 Without clicking in the drawing area. double-click the elevation symbol arrow.

in this case. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. and other families. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type.11 If you want to save your changes. and the insulation color to pink. where each layer is assigned a different material. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. floors. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. such as Brick on CMU. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 455 . This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. For example. a shade of gray. on the File menu. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. This includes walls. such as the one below. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. In addition. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. and applies to phasing override materials as well. in a compound wall. roofs.

scroll down and click the Training Files icon. The surface pattern of the brick is black. Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . The brick cut pattern is displayed as red. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog box. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Materials. 5 In the Color dialog box. expand 3D Views. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls.Filled).Brick for Name. click Open. expand Sections (Section Head . select red.rvt located in the Common folder. Open c_Showroom.Level 3. 2 On the Settings menu. click Color. 3 In the Materials dialog box. 456 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and double-click 3D. 4 Under Cut Pattern. and click OK twice. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser under Views. expand Views (all). select Masonry . Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer.

10 Under Surface Pattern. select white. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. 11 In the Color dialog box. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 9 In the Materials dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). click Materials.Brick for Name. c_Showroom. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. and click OK twice. click Color. The floor plan in the view is displayed in the Coarse level of detail as indicated by the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser.Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 457 . select Masonry . 12 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise.

11 Zoom in on the arced wall. click Modify. and click Fine. click Edit/New. and click Properties. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. the Coarse Scale Fill Color parameter (under Graphics) is set to black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. right-click. 10 On the View Control Bar. select a shade of gray. 458 | Chapter 15 Viewing . under Floor Plans. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 12 If you want to save your changes. and click . under Graphics. click the button in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. including the current view. double-click Level 2. under Graphics. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. View the arced wall in fine detail 9 In the Project Browser. By default. select Solid fill. 7 In the Fill Patterns dialog box under Name. 13 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Detail Level. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK three times.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 2 Select the south arced wall. 5 In the Color dialog box. click Save As.

you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Building files. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. refer to the online Help for more information. although they may have coincident edges. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise.Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. and you cannot control their visibility. If you create more than one plan region in a file. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. Creating a View Plan Region | 459 . you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. or pattern. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Building. line color. line type.

Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 460 | Chapter 15 Viewing . In the following illustration. click Open.rvt located in the Metric folder. and click View. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. and double-click Level 1. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. the south elevation is also displayed. expand Floor Plans. Open m_Plan_Region. expand Views (all). TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Plan Region. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. right-click in the Design Bar. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.

and click Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut plane. ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Creating a View Plan Region | 461 . the top and bottom clip planes. the plan region is displayed as a red dashed rectangle. By selecting Parent View’s Level. On the Options Bar. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. view range. 7 In the View Range dialog box. that is similar to the view range for plan views. 3 In the Level 1 view. as it is displayed with hidden lines in this view. 10 On the Design Bar.Plan regions have a single property. right-click. click Lines. You use the view range property to control cut plane. under Extents. 9 Click Apply. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. The plan region is no longer visible. 8 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click . click Edit for View Range. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. As the cursor moves across it. 5 Select the red dashed line. and then click OK twice. top and bottom clip planes. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. click Modify. Press ESC to end the command. 4 Move the cursor across the area where you sketched the plan region. and enter 2800 for the Cut plane Offset. and the view depth plane.

11 If you want to save your changes. 462 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. click Save As.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Autodesk Revit Building to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Building that is used to produce rendered views.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 16 In this tutorial. billboards. and posters. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. 463 . to place and render decals to create signs.

You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. After you create the perspective view. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. 464 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. When you complete these changes. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. you select a scene that defines the model environment. and create the perspective view that you want to render. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. the floor. In this exercise. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click Edit for Structure. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Edit/New. Open m_Cohouse.Cavity Wall . click the Training Files icon. right-click in the Design Bar. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. Rendering an Exterior View | 465 . under Construction. verify that Co-house . click Open.Brick. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry .Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. click . 3 On the Options Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. click Wall.

click Edit/New. select Carib. 11 Under Name. Polished and click OK. click Edit for Structure. click Modify.200mm. and click . 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. 27 On the Design Bar. under Name. 26 Click OK twice. . press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components.Asphalt. select the curtain wall mullion again.Plain. 19 Click OK four times. under _accurender. 14 On the Options Bar. 9 Under AccuRender. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. under Name. expand Metals. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. 23 Under AccuRender.Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. 25 Under Name. select Site . 24 In the Material Library. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. 466 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under _accurender. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector.Brick. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. under Construction. 8 In the Materials dialog box. click Duplicate. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog box. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 18 In the Materials dialog box. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Aluminum. TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. select Polished. 22 In the New Material dialog box. click Materials. 21 In the Materials dialog box. for Layer 2. enter Aluminum. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. click Materials.Running. select Masonry . expand Masonry and click Brick. 12 Click OK twice. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. under Name.

click No. . and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. floor. under Name. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration.29 On the Options Bar. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. and click OK. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. verify that New is selected. 33 Click OK three times. Rendering an Exterior View | 467 . 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Materials and Finishes. select Exterior under Type. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. floor. click in the Material field. producing a photorealistic effect. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog box. select Aluminum. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Region Raytrace. click Edit/New. Polished. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. and then click 32 In the Materials dialog box. click .

Cnst. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.38 On the Design Bar. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. m_Cohouse. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe.rvt. expand Floor Plans. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. you place two different types of trees on the building site. expand Views (all). when you render an exterior view of the model. 468 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. and double-click 1st Flr. Adding Trees to the Site. In a later exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. 4 In the Type Selector. click Site Component. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed.9 Meters. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. and click Site. right-click in the Design Bar.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum .2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. Rendering an Exterior View | 469 . and click to place a tree. select M_Tree .

7 In the Type Selector. 15 Under Other.rvt. expand Trees and Shrubs. 13 Under Name. as shown in the following illustration.Create a new type of tree. 12 In the Plant Library. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. select Oak. click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Black. to . and click Site Component. under accurender. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK twice. select any of the deciduous trees. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 10 In the Name dialog box. click in the Value field for Plant Name. and then click display the Plant Library. and click OK. select Black Oak for Type Comments. under Other. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 470 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . enter Black Oak. under Identity Data. Creating a Perspective View. and place two black oak trees. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. m_Cohouse. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. and click Deciduous. 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. and click OK.

The new perspective view is displayed. view open. on the View tab of the Design Bar.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. click Camera. Cnst. Rendering an Exterior View | 471 . 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration.

view. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click 1st Flr. expand 3D Views. Cnst. Cnst. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). and click Show Camera. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. 472 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

place. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Cohouse. and click OK. enter Exterior. and environment settings that you use to render the view.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. lighting.7 In the Project Browser. Rendering an Exterior View | 473 . you select a scene and specify time. You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. double-click Exterior. 8 In the Rename View dialog box. date. under 3D Views. and click Rename. right-click 3D View 1. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View.

474 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. click the Solar Angles tab. 7 Under Date. under Scene Settings. and click Sun. Time. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. 6 Select By Date. 8 Under Time. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. click Settings. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box.

Dark. select Good for Quality. under Scene Settings. and click OK. click Image Size. and select Boston. 12 Click the Settings Tab. click . 18 Click Material. The Ground Plane tab displays. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 17 Under Advanced. USA. 21 Click OK twice. verify that Automatic Sky is selected.00 (many clouds. 20 In the Name list. 11 Scroll down. 10 Click in the Cities list. Rye. 16 In the Environment dialog box. under Background Color. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. 26 On the Design Bar. 13 Enter . and enter bo.9 Click the Place tab. click No. and click OK. click Raytrace. MA. click Environment. under Scene Settings. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. Rendering an Exterior View | 475 . The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed.) 14 Click OK. 27 On the Options Bar. click Site.20 for Cloudiness. under _accurender. 19 In the Material Library. select Ground Plane. select Grass. select Autumn for Plant Season. 23 Under Raytrace Settings.

you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. define the view and render scene settings.Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. on the File menu. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. Rendering an Interior View. 30 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. expand Renderings. 476 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. 32 If you want to save this exercise. and finally. click Save As. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. To create the rendered scene. click Capture Rendering. 33 Proceed to the next lesson.

2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. Cnst. 7 Repeat steps 4 . and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). m_Cohouse. select Rotate after placement. Rendering an Interior View | 477 . 5 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 4 In the Type Selector. and double-click 2nd Flr. click Component. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all).rvt. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Camera. 478 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . m_Cohouse. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.rvt. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

The interior perspective is displayed. double-click 2nd Flr. Cnst. Rendering an Interior View | 479 . double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.

7 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. click Modify. 480 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. under Extents. click to display the 3D view of the building model. and click OK. 9 In the Rename View dialog box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the View menu. Grips are displayed on the section box. and select the section box. click View Properties. select Section Box. and click OK. click the dimensions for Size. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. under Size.Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. enter 178 mm for Height. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. enter 229 mm for Width. right-click 3D View 1. 14 On the Design Bar. enter Interior. and click Rename. A section box is displayed around the building model. 11 On the View menu. and click OK.

m_Cohouse. This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. By limiting the geometry. under 3D Views. date. Creating a New Render Scene. place. you create a render scene to specify the time. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. Rendering an Interior View | 481 . and environment settings used to render the view. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. you reduce the rendering time.

Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 24 Under Scene Settings. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. select Ground Plane. You can select families with transparent materials. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. Time. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. 14 Click Save. Dark. as daylight sources. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. select New. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. click Site. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. select Grass. under 3D Views. such as windows and doors. under Scene Settings. and click Save. 22 Click OK twice. 20 In the Material Library. double-click {3D}. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. and click Sun. 11 Click in the Cities list. and click OK. 7 Select By Date. MA. The Ground Plane tab displays. select {3D}. Rye.rvt. 482 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 9 Under Time. select Summer for Plant Season. USA. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. under Scene Settings. click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. under Use View’s Section Box. click Environment. 12 Scroll down. 4 Under Type. 13 Click the Settings tab. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. and select Boston. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. under Background Color. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. click Settings. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. 10 Click the Place tab. 18 Under Advanced. click the Solar Angles tab. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. on the Main tab. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. and enter Interior Scene for Name. 8 Under Date. 21 In the Name list. m_Cohouse. under accurender. and click OK. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View. 19 Click Material. select Interior. and enter bo. 17 In the Environment dialog box. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM.

Rendering an Interior View | 483 . click OK. click Raytrace. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. begins. . 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Interior. 8 On the Options Bar. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. Curtain Wall 1). 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. The radiosity process. click Daylights. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog box. When radiate completes. the following rendered view is displayed. which can take several minutes. 7 On the Design Bar. click Radiate.2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.

on the File menu. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 10 Close the exercise file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Building software. or section view. The walkthrough path is a spline.9 If you want to save your changes. 484 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. you must select or define a scene. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building model in Autodesk Revit Building. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. In a plan view. click Save As. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. but you can also define it in a 3D. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. elevation. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough.

If you prefer to use Metric values. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. Open c_Townhouse. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 485 . and change unit formats as desired. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. click Open. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. or the first key frame. click Walkthrough. proceeds through the dining room. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. of the walkthrough. and click to specify the start point. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view.rvt located in the Common folder. and double-click 1st Floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 3 On the Options Bar.You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. and click the tab in the context menu. expand Views (all). TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click Settings ➤ Project Units. and ends in the far corner of the living room. click the Training Files icon.

Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). click . If it is not. and select the crop boundary. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. select the crop boundary.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. expand Walkthroughs. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 9 On the Options Bar. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. verify Field of view is selected. 11 Under Change. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 12 On the View menu. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. 486 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. on the Options Bar.

press ESC. 14 Click . and click OK. c_Townhouse. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog box.rvt. enter 1 for Frame. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position. The walkthrough plays. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.13 On the Options Bar. 17 Click . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 487 . you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). click Edit Walkthrough. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. proceed to the next exercise.

Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. 6 On the Options Bar. 488 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar.Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Edit Walkthrough. clear Far Clip Active. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). You can move any camera target or key frame position. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. select Path for Controls. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. double-click 1st Floor. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. under Extents. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. click .

and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. 2 In the Save As dialog box. double-click Walkthrough 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Export ➤ AVI. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. and click Save. under Walkthroughs. 4 Under Format. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 489 . without opening Autodesk Revit Building. select <Shading> for Display mode. and click OK. specifying the number of frames. click Edit Walkthrough. hidden line. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds.7 Click the third key frame position. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Recording the Walkthrough. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. shaded with edges. specify 10 for Frames per Second. If you are unsure of what option to use. c_Townhouse. to play the walkthrough. shaded. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. reducing the size of the image.rvt. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 8 If you want to save this exercise. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. When you export the walkthrough. 3 Under Output Length. or with AccuRender raytracing. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. click Save As. 1 On the File menu. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. The AVI is recorded. 5 In the Video Compression dialog box. on the File menu.

490 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

For the realistic approach. Advanced Model Graphics. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Building can be found under Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs. Co-house." In Revit Building. length. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. an outside reviewer. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. there are several options for expressing the architecture. Using the pre-built building model. To express texture beyond material specifics. or the client. elevations. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. and details. In this series of exercises. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. the Linework Tool. A majority of tools in Autodesk Revit Building are intended to describe number. sections. In this tutorial. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. Whether the audience is the general contractor. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. a consultant.Presentation Views 17 In this tutorial. 491 . you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. type. and Section Boxes. you explore the stylistic approach. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content.

rvt located in the Metric folder.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create a copy of the plan. right-click 2nd Flr. click the Training Files icon. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. and click Duplicate. Cnst. click Open. you create a presentation floor plan. 492 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Open m_Cohouse.

sections. click Visibility/Graphics. Using Advanced Model Graphics. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. this represents the view getting smaller. click Save As. and click Save. and so on in this view. and click Rename. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. navigate to the folder of your choice. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 7 Under Visibility. UP Text. and clear DOWN Text. and Up Arrow. 11 In the Save As directory. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. Cnst. dimensions. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. under Floor Plans. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the frame.rvt. Down Arrow. 10 On the File menu. This turns off the visibility of all tags. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. 8 Click OK. Notice that no annotations display in this view. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. click the Scale control and select 1: 100. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 493 . and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click OK.2 In the Project Browser. expand the Stairs category. click the Annotation Categories tab. elevations.

select Cast Shadows. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. specify 35 for Shadow. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Under Intensity. USA for City. select By Date. modify. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. ■ ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. double-click it in the Project Browser. click . NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe.Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. Time and Place. and click OK. you can create. MA. 7 Select Boston. click for Place. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. At that place. Under Shadows Properties.rvt. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. 5 Under Sunlight Settings. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. The higher the number. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sunlight Settings. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. click the Place tab. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 494 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. the darker the shadows. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. Within a Project. 2 On the View Control Bar.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. 10 Click OK. select Ground Plane and select 1st Flr.NOTE For this step. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. specify 10/27/2004 for Date and 1:00:00 PM for Time. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. clear Ground Plane. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet. you can enter any city you wish. click OK. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and click OK. however. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 495 . This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 16 On the File menu. click Save. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Cnst. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. for At Level. click OK. be aware that if you enter a different city. click This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. under Sunlight Settings. . This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 9 Under Sunlight Settings. Turn off the ground plane shadows 12 On the View Control Bar.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 4 In the Views dialog box. and click Add View to Sheet. and notice a view title displays. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. right-click the Design Bar. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Arch Portrait. and click to place it. Notice the blank sheet is portrait oriented. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. click Add View. 6 On the Design Bar. 496 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . TIP If the View tab is not available. and click OK. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click View. click Sheet. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.

select No for Show Title. enter Presentation. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. under Graphics. click . and click OK. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click Edit/New. To accomplish this. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. 12 In the Name dialog box.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 497 . 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. For this analytique. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. click OK.

This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. click Filled Region. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. and the boundary of the region. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. fill properties. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. and select Chain. 498 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. click . use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. click . 20 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. and click Activate View. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 17 In the Type Selector. select Invisible Lines. and draw a rectangle around the view as shown.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. If necessary. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Options Bar.

Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 499 . enter Presentation for Sheet Name. Name the sheet 31 Right-click the edge of the sheet. select the entire chain (use TAB ) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 21 On the Design Bar. click the Fill Pattern value and the arrow that displays within it. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. 33 On the File menu. 30 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. click Region Properties. 23 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Edit/New. scroll down. click Finish Sketch. click Save. you create an elevation and add it to the Presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. and click OK.TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. and click Properties. 29 On the Design Bar. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. and click OK. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique. under Identity Data. under Name. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Deactivate View. click OK. When you are finished drawing the chain. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 27 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Solid Black. select Solid Fill. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. 34 Proceed with the next lesson. 24 In the Name dialog box. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. click Duplicate. under Graphics.

right-click South. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand Elevations.Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique In this exercise. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 500 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click Duplicate. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.rvt. under Views (all). you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.

under Visibility. 8 Click OK. click . specify 35 for Shadow. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and clear Elevation Swing. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. click OK. and click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Apply advanced model graphics 9 On the View Control Bar. under Elevations.2 In the Project Browser. expand the Doors category. scroll down. click Duplicate. By changing the angle of the sun. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. under Sunlight Settings. and click OK. and click OK. and clear Surface Pattern. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 13 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. right-click Copy of South. 11 Under Shadow Properties. 12 Under Intensity. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. on the Model Categories tab. select Cast Shadows. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click Rename. specify 2:30:00 PM for Time. 15 In the Name dialog box. 6 Under Visibility. 7 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 501 . expand the Walls category. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. enter Presentation South Elevation. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. scroll up. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box.

3 In the Views dialog box.Presentation. click Add View. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 502 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. under Views (all). select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. and double-click A105 . and click Add View to Sheet.18 On the File menu.rvt. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. expand Sheets. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. click Save. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Add view to sheet 1 In the Project Browser.

select Viewport: Presentation. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 503 . Notice the view title no longer displays.Notice the viewport displays a view title. 5 In the Type Selector.

You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. click Save. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 504 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Modify. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique. 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 8 On the File menu.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 505 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 Add the section shown below. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Section. 3 On the Options Bar. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). select 1: 100 for Scale. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 1st Flr.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. Cnst.rvt. and use the flip arrows if necessary.

6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Section 2. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. 506 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . To accomplish this. expand Sections (Callout 1). Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser.Section 2 is added to the building model. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. 7 On the Options Bar. select 1: 100 for Scale. click Callout. To fit correctly in the analytique.

double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). 12 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). click Visibility/Graphics. 11 In the Rename View dialog box. 15 Under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. 10 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and clear Surface Pattern. click Modify. click the Model Categories tab.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 16 Under Visibility. and clear Elevation Swing. expand the Walls category. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. scroll down. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). scroll up. enter Presentation Section 2. expand the Doors category. and click OK. right-click Callout of Section 2. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 507 .

23 On the File menu. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View. 508 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . clear Crop Region Visible. Hide the crop boundary 20 Select the crop boundary. click Save.17 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 18 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. 19 Click OK. Notice the crop region no longer displays. click . and clear Show annotation categories in this view. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 21 On the Options Bar. under Extents. and click OK.

click Apply. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. specify 35 for Shadow. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. Click Apply.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 509 . select Cast Shadows. double-click Presentation Section 2. click Duplicate. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. In the steps that follow. In addition. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 5 In the Name dialog box. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. TIP You may need to move the dialog box off to the side in order to see the view. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. open the Project Browser and. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Under Shadows Properties. click . you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. under Sunlight Settings. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. select Relative to View. Under Intensity. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast.rvt. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Directly. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section.

11 Proceed with the next exercise. under Silhouette Edges. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. was added to this dataset for training purposes. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. click Save. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. NOTE The line style. Apply silhouette edges 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Silhouette Edges. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique. 510 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. 10 On the File menu. select Override Silhouettes.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Add View to Sheet. click Add View. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Views dialog box. 5 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Design Bar. The view title no longer displays. click Modify.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Viewport: Presentation. select Section: Presentation Section 2. double-click A105 .Presentation. under Sheets (all). and click to place the selected view. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 511 .rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.

To rotate an object. click . double-click Section 2. you click to specify the start radius.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. Using a clock as a reference. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. In the steps that follow. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. under Sections (Callout 1). 512 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 9 On the Edit toolbar. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER.

12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. double-click A105 . Notice that the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.Presentation.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. under Sheets (all). Notice the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. the callout rotates 180 degrees. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 513 .

514 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 15 On the Design Bar. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 16 On the File menu. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. After applying the view template to a new section view. click Modify. click Save. Working with a Presentation View Template.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. and drag it up and to the left as shown.

right-click Copy of Section 1. and click Duplicate. under Sections (Type 1). rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. click Apply View Template. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Rename. 4 In the View Templates dialog box. click OK. click Save as View Template. enter Presentation. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View menu. under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Type 1). you can simply apply the presentation view template. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 In the New View Template dialog box. and click OK. enter Presentation Section 1. 7 In the Rename View dialog box. Now. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu.rvt. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 515 . double-click Presentation Section 2.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

13 Place it to the left of the plan view. under Sheets (all). and click Activate View. and click OK. 15 Right-click the viewport. Notice the furniture. and click OK. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. and click Deactivate View. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 On the View menu. and click Add View to Sheet. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for View Rotation on Sheet. 14 In the Type Selector. select Section: Presentation Section 1. lighting fixtures. annotations.Presentation. 516 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select Viewport: Presentation. click View Properties. and elevation swings no longer display. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. click Add View. select Presentation. double-click A105 . 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown.9 In the Select View Template dialog box. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Views dialog box. 18 Right-click the viewport. under Graphics.

Working in a Callout Analytique. such as a tracery window or column capital.20 On the File menu. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 517 . 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save. In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique Traditional analytiques typically contain a detail.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Section 1. 5 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Rename. click Modify.rvt. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Presentation Callout. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1). 4 In the Project Browser. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. select the callout. right-click Callout of Section 1. and click OK. click Callout. After you add the callout. 518 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown.

8 Right-click. 7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Presentation Callout. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 519 .6 In the Project Browser. under Extents. and click View Properties. clear Crop Region Visible. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region.

18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. under Sheets (all). and click Add View to Sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. select Custom for View Scale. and click Deactivate View. click Add View. and click Activate View. 17 On the View menu. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. select Section: Presentation Callout. 14 In the Type Selector.Presentation. 12 In the Views dialog box. 520 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. and move it into the position shown below. click Modify. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. click View Properties. and click OK. double-click A105 . select Viewport: Presentation. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. select Solid Black for Type. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 521 . double-click Presentation Callout. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click Region Properties. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. In the steps that follow. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. When finished. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog box. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. click Filled Region. activate the viewport. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Design Bar. and make adjustments as necessary. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished.

and sketch the rectangle shown below. under Sheets (all).Presentation. 522 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 29 On the Options Bar. double-click A105 .26 On the Project Browser. and click Activate View. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. click Filled Region.

under Extents.30 On the Design Bar. 33 Select the crop region. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 523 . click Finish Sketch. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. and click OK. select Crop Region Visible. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click View Properties. 31 On the View menu. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box.

and click Deactivate View. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. click Save. click View Properties. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 35 In the Element Properties dialog box. clear Crop Region Visible. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes. and click OK. 37 On the File menu. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. 524 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .34 On the View menu. under Extents.

rvt. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. and click 1: 200. 3 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. You then add each view to the presentation sheet.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. double-click Isometric. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 525 .s and apply shadows to the views. click Orient ➤ Southwest. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click the Scale control. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaway. 2 On the View menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

7 In the Name dialog box. Select Ground Plane. enter Isometric 2. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. and click Duplicate. 13 In the Rename View dialog box. click . select Override Silhouettes. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click Rename. click Duplicate. click View Properties. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 18 On the View menu. Cnst. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. Under Intensity. 9 Click OK. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. right-click Isometric 1. and click OK. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. under Sunlight Settings. enter Isometric 1. under Silhouette Edges. 526 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 16 In the Rename View dialog box. Select Relative to View. under 3D Views. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Under Shadows Properties. select Section Box. under 3D Views. and click OK. specify 35 for Shadow. and click Rename. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Select 1st Flr.5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Cast Shadows. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. under Extents. and click OK. for At Level. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. double-click Isometric 2. right-click Isometric. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees.

20 Select the section box. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. click Modify on the Design Bar. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 527 . Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. When you are finished. You can use this to rotate the section box. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box.

22 In the Project Browser. When you are finished. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. right-click Isometric 2. click Modify on the Design Bar. clear Crop Region Visible. either adjust the plane location. 26 On the View menu. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. select Crop Region. and click Rename. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. make a copy of the view. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 31 On the View menu. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. select Crop Region. and click Duplicate. 528 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . under 3D Views. 24 In the Rename View dialog box. the stairs and railings may display. click View Properties. double-click Isometric 3. click View Properties. clear Crop Region Visible. 23 In the Project Browser. Notice the section box no longer displays. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Extents. enter Isometric 3. double-click Isometric 2. In such a case. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Extents. and click OK. 29 Select the section box. and click OK.

under Sheets (all). drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. select Viewport: Presentation. in the Type Selector. under 3D Views.Next. 35 In the Project Browser. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. double-click A105 . select Viewport: Presentation. in the Type Selector. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation.Presentation. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. under 3D Views. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 529 . 34 In the Project Browser. 36 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. in the Type Selector.

select Concrete for Type. and then click Edit/New.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. 38 Select the poche filled region. This will make it easier to draw lines. under Graphics. 42 Click OK twice. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. click Lines. and on the Options Bar. and click Activate View. 530 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Region Properties. 39 On the Design Bar. The image below shows the lines redrawn. click Edit. 41 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Transparent for Background. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 43 On the Design Bar. 44 Using the drawing tools.

and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 531 . a cutaway perspective view. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. 46 In the Element Properties dialog box. 49 On the File menu. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views. you create the final view for the analytique. you add it to the presentation sheet. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. 47 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Region Properties. click Save. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. select Solid Black for Type.45 On the Design Bar.

click Camera. under Floor Plans. 532 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Cnst. then you specify the eye direction and range. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. The view opens immediately. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. double-click 1st Flr.

select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify 35 for Shadow. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. select Cast Shadows. under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. and click OK. click . 9 Under Silhouette Edges. Under Shadows Properties. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 533 . 5 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Override Silhouettes. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box.4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Under Intensity.

534 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Add a section box 10 On the View menu. and click OK. click View Properties. Notice the controls that display on each plane. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. 12 Select the section box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. under Extents. A section box now cuts through the building model. select Section Box.

21 In the Project Browser. you must specify the actual size of the image. and click OK. under 3D Views. under Extents. click View Properties.14 Select the crop boundary. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 535 . under Sheets (all). Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. After placing it. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. enter 165 mm for Width.Presentation. under Change. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Size. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. double-click A105 . 17 Under Size. clear Crop Region Visible. 18 On the View menu. drag 3D View 2 onto the presentation sheet. 15 On the Options Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). go to the Type Selector and select Viewport: Presentation.

11 In the Element Properties dialog box. select a font. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 536 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Annotating the Analytique. under Text. click Duplicate. click OK. click Duplicate. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 In the Name dialog box. click Text. and click OK. click Edit/New. specify a text size of 6 mm. and click OK. click Save. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Description. 5 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click . select the same font as the title. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.22 On the File menu. 2 On the Options Bar. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. select Title. enter Title. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. specify a text size of 40 mm.rvt.

select Description. 15 In the Type Selector. 18 On the File menu. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 537 .14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. click Save.

538 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

539 . or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. they are still related and come from a single source. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. thus the term family. In this tutorial.About Families and the Family Editor 18 All elements in Autodesk Revit Building are “family based. material set. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. each with a different size. shape.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Building to help you manage your data and make changes easily. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Even though various types within a family can look completely different.

NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. and roofs are examples of these types of families. while many more are stored in component libraries. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Building and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. for example. 540 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . In this lesson. Walls. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. there is another type of family that allows you create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Building recognize it as a particular component type.rfa extension. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. generic. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Building is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. In addition. but you cannot create new system families. floors. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . You also learn about the Family Editor. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. foundation. Using the Family Editor. and roofs. however. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. because there is only one file to track. This makes file management much easier. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. has wall types that define interior. exterior. such as a dome roof. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. floors. and when and how to use it. The basic walls system family. Revit Building has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Building and comprise principle building components such as walls. There are. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. and partition wall styles. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. exceptions to this rule. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. For example.

The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. for example. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. You can load them into projects.Family templates are either host-based or standalone. transfer them from one project to another. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. You create in-place families only within the current project. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. and furniture. Standalone families include columns. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an .rfa extension. trees. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. custom wall treatments. and also a standalone furniture family component. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. Using Families and the Family Editor | 541 . Host-based families have components that require hosts.

you can drag it into the document window. consider checking the web library and other web resources. With Revit Building open. how to access it. In the final exercise. To start a new family. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. When the family opens. After the family has been loaded in the project. such as newsgroups. Load Family command on the File menu. you learn when to use the Family Editor. and click Open. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. In this case. navigate to a family file. 4 Select the family file name and click Open.Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. and when to use it. In this section. elevation. it is saved with the project. 3 Next. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. you learn about the Family Editor. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. 5 Finally. In this exercise. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. presume it is a bay window that you require. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. you can double-click any file with an . you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. how to access it. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. To add a family to your project. you can click File ➤ Open. such as plan. 2 On the File menu. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. and click Open. open it in the Family Editor. modify it as needed. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. and then load it into the project. you learned about the different types of Revit Building families and when to use them. if you have exhausted your external resources. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. it should be available within the Type Selector. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. If you find a close match. or 3D. Within the Windows® environment. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project.rfa extension and it will open Revit Building in the Family Editor. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. or you can load it using the Load From Library. 542 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. if you change the original family. it opens within the Family Editor. select the appropriate template. However.

4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. Using Families and the Family Editor | 543 .General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs.

544 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor .

you learn how to create a different type of component. you create it within the project file.Creating Components in the Family Editor 19 In this tutorial. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. Using the installed templates. You create a furniture family. In each lesson. a lighting fixture. 545 . you create an in-place family. In addition. and several annotation families. When you create an in-place family. not within the Family Editor. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Building families.

Creating a Door Family In this lesson. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. and thickness. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. height. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. The door type has a variable height and width. 546 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. select Doors [projection]. Level. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. click Symbolic Lines. click . 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. 9 In the Type Selector. click New ➤ Family. 6 Maximize the window. Notice the four tiled views. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Select Metric Door. 7 Enter ZF. Labelled dimensions. 4 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. and represent the door opening profile. part of the door properties. are also displayed. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. 5 On the Window menu. 10 On the Options Bar.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. Creating a Door Family | 547 . and click Open. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 2 On the File menu.rft. Floor Plan: Ref. click Tile.

13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 548 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar.

17 On the Options Bar.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. Creating a Door Family | 549 . select Width for Label. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. click Modify. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. 19 On the Options Bar. select Thickness for Label.

25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. 24 Enter SI. 23 On the Options Bar. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry. then you specify each end point. and select the command from the menu. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. 21 On the Design Bar. click the down arrow button. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. you first specify the arc center. When drawing an arc from center and end points. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. as shown. along with the witness line controls. In the image below. click . you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. select Plan Swing [cut]. 22 In the Type selector. 550 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Symbolic Lines.

double-click Exterior. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Door Family | 551 . 2 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. double-click Left. click Finish Sketch. 3 On the Design Bar. and click .1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. under Elevations. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Lines. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. enter 50 mm for Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box.

10 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the dimension. Level. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. select Thickness for Label. 552 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Ref. 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. then click to specify the dimension witness line. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Options Bar. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion.

No Gloss. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. 3 In the New Material dialog box.Red/Stained. click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. and Fine are selected. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Assigning Materials to the Door Components. under Materials and Finishes. click Modify.Dark. click . and click OK. click Duplicate. 13 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. you assign a material to the door leaf. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. under AccuRender.16 Select the door leaf extrusion. select Front/Back. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. 4 In the Materials dialog box. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. and clear Plan/RCP. 9 On the Options Bar. enter Oak Door for Name. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. click OK. for Material. under Name. Medium. click Materials. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. 6 Click OK. under View Specific Display. select Oak Door. Left/Right. Creating a Door Family | 553 . 17 On the Options Bar. and When cut in Plan/RCP. select Panel for Subcategory. It also defines its appearance when rendered. 19 Under Detail Levels. click for Texture. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. click Visibility. click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. verify that Coarse. 2 In the Materials dialog box. 7 In the Materials dialog box.

click 17 In the Materials dialog box. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion.15 On the Options Bar. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). double-click View 1. under 3D Views. 554 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Oak Door for Name. 21 On the View Control Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. click . and click OK. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. click the Model Graphics Style control. for Material. The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. and select Shading with Edges.

Enter 1000 mm for Width. Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. Under Other. enter 2500 mm for Height. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. 27 Click OK. Under Other. click Family Types. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. By flexing the new component. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. In the Family Types dialog box. 24 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. Click Apply.The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2000 mm for Height. Defining New Door Types Creating a Door Family | 555 . enter 75 mm for Frame Width. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. enter 125 mm for Frame Width.

Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. enter 2100 mm for Height.rfa. click Wall. 12 On the File menu. Click Apply. 18 In the Open dialog box. click New. 6 In the Name dialog box. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. enter 2134 mm for Height. 8 Under Family Types. verify that DefaultMetric. Under Create new. 556 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click Apply. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. Training Door. 9 In the Name dialog box. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. 17 On the Options Bar. 5 Under Family Types. select it. and click OK. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click OK. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. click New. 20 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. click Door. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. Define the third new door type. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. and click Open. Click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. select Project. Define the second new door type. under Template file. and click OK. click Load.rte is the Template file. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 750 mm for Width. Training Door. click New ➤ Project.Defining New Door Types In this exercise.rfa. under Family Types. 3 In the Name dialog box. 15 In the New Project dialog box. click Family Types. 11 Click OK. Place new door types in the project 19 On the Design Bar. click New. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. Enter 925 mm for Width. click Save. enter 2000 mm for Height. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click OK. Enter 1220 mm for Width. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name.

24 In the Type Selector. click . click the Model Graphics Style control. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 27 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. and select Shading with Edges. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. Creating a Door Family | 557 . click Door. 26 In the Type Selector. 22 On the View Control Bar. 25 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown.21 On the View toolbar.

30 You can close all files without saving. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. This completes the lesson. Finally. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. You create the window frame. and specify values for the window width. 558 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . height. and mullion offset. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. Creating a Door Family.28 In the Type Selector. glazing and mullions as extrusions. default sill height. 29 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. and create the window sash as a sweep.

and click Open. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. Labelled dimensions. click Tile. click New ➤ Family 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 2 On the File menu. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. part of the window properties. 5 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Creating a Window Family | 559 . equally spaced vertical mullions. you specify the parameters for the new window family. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. The window type has a variable height and width.rft. 4 On the Window menu. Select Metric Window. 7 Enter ZF.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. Four views are tiled on your display. are also displayed.

enter 1300 mm for Height. then sketching the sweep profile. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. This is the starting point for the new window. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. The label name.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. is one of the type parameters. This process is called “flexing the model. 12 Click OK. Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. also one of the window properties. Enter 1800 mm for Width. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. Height and Default Sill Height. When you add labels to dimensions. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. Click Apply. click Family Types. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. 560 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Change the height and width values again. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise.8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Apply. and click Apply.

Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. click Sketch Profile. and select 1:10. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 6 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. click . 9 On the View Control Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. click Finish Path. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. Snap the cursor to each corner. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. click the Scale control. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. and click Open View. click . 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 561 . click Sketch 2D Path. select Elevation: Right. click Ref Plane.

and select the reference plane. select Prefer: Wall faces. and click OK. enter Sash for the Name. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. click . click Modify. 15 On the Options Bar. 562 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. click Lines. 20 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. select Chain and click . 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. 18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 19 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. 24 Below the red dot.14 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. and select the dimension. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify.

click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. However. the exact dimensions are not critical. 25 On the Design Bar. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. 26 Select the right edge of the frame section. and drag it to the interior face of the wall.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. click Modify. When the lock displays. When the lock displays. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. Creating a Window Family | 563 . and drag it to the exterior face of the wall.

29 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. TIP After adding the dimension. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane.28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. as shown. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. and specify the dimension value. select the line you want to move. click Modify. 564 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . When the lock displays.

The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. under Views (all). click . click Finish Profile. expand 3D Views. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot.Modify each dimension if necessary. When the lock displays. click the lock to constrain the present value. If necessary. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. When the lock displays. and double-click View 1. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. Creating a Window Family | 565 . click Finish Sweep. this is the top of the window opening. zoom out until it displays. 36 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Tools toolbar. 35 On the Design Bar. 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. Next. 37 In the Project Browser. click the lock to constrain the present value. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension.

4 On the Design Bar.38 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and enter . 566 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Set Work Plane. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. 2 On the Design Bar. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. Chain of walls or lines. click . Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. and select Lock. double-click Exterior. under Elevations. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. click Lines. and select the option. under Specify a new Work Plane.45 mm for Depth.

Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. Enter . Creating a Window Family | 567 . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. and lock icons display on each line. set the following options: ■ ■ Click .50 mm for Offset. ■ Click .The entire sash outline is selected. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle.

under Elevations. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry. click Finish Sketch. The window sash extrusion is now complete. under 3D Views. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. 568 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .9 On the Design Bar. double-click View 1. double-click Right. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser.

you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. under Elevations. and enter 30 mm for Offset. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. click Ref Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. as shown. click .Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. double-click Right. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Creating a Window Family | 569 . 3 On the Options Bar.

570 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click Dimension.5 On the Design Bar.

16 On the Options Bar. click . press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. Creating a Window Family | 571 . 9 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and click to create the glass boundary. 13 On the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 11 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the reference plane. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Identity Data. click . under Elevations. click Set Work Plane. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. and select Lock. and click OK. click Modify. enter 12 mm for Depth. 15 On the Design Bar.

NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. under Elevations. 21 On the Options Bar. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.18 On the Design Bar. double-click Right. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. View the window model with frame. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. click Modify. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the glass extrusion. sash. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 24 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. under 3D Views. click . After the family is loaded into a project. 23 On the Design Bar. 572 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click View 1.

return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. For example. click Family Types. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry.Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1000 mm for Height. Creating a Window Family | 573 . Enter 1500 mm for Width. 27 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. NOTE After flexing the model. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 2000 mm for Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Click OK. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. enter 1500 mm for Height. Click Apply. Under Other. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash.

After adding the dimension. double-click Exterior. 4 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown.Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Dimension. click Ref Plane. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. the exact location is not critical. 2 On the Design Bar. 574 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. under Elevations.

as shown.. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating a Window Family | 575 .> for Label. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar.. click Modify. select <Add parameter. as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it.5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. Do not be concerned with dimension values.

576 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Family parameter. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. under Dimensions. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. click Family Types. and enter 350 mm as the new value. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. Select Instance. and click OK. enter Mullion Offset for Name. Under Parameter Data. 14 Click the dimension value. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom.10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Dimensions. Click OK. click Modify. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Under Group parameter under.

20 On the Design Bar. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. and click OK. move the dimension value as shown. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. 18 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Offset for Label. 23 On the Options Bar. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. under Specify a new Work Plane. However. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 21 In the Work Plane dialog box. After you complete the sketch. enter 14 mm for Depth. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. As you did before. and click . click Set Work Plane. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash.17 On the Options Bar. Creating a Window Family | 577 . click Modify. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click Lines.

Move the dimension values as shown. click Modify. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 30 On the Options Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step.26 On the Design Bar. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. select <Add parameter> for Label. click Dimension. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. 29 On the Design Bar. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. 578 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. select Mullion Width for Label. Select Type. select Dimensions. Click OK. This is changed in later steps. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Creating a Window Family | 579 . 33 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Under Parameter Data. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. select Family parameter. enter Mullion Width for Name. 32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. Under Group parameter under. Remember. Select the dimension.31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. and aligned with the sash edge. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. 580 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Other.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. evenly spaced. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. enter 1500 mm for Height. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. or undoing the same. NOTE After flexing the model. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. and click Apply. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Click Apply. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. click Family Types. In this case. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters.

40 In the Work Plane dialog box. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. 41 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Design Bar. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. enter 1000 mm for Height. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. 46 On the Design Bar.37 In the Family Types dialog box. 39 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. Click OK. and click OK. Creating a Window Family | 581 . click Set Work Plane. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. 42 On the Options Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Under Other. click . under Specify a new Work Plane. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. Enter 2000 mm for Width. Click Apply. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. click Dimension. as shown. click Dimension. click Lines.

■ ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. 582 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the dimension you added in the previous step. click Finish Sketch. Select the dimension. click Modify. select Mullion Width for Label.48 On the Design Bar. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Remember. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. 49 On the Options Bar. Move the dimension value as shown. and on the Options Bar. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. select Mullion Width for Label. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.

you can still see the window. 56 On the Design Bar. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. Creating a Window Family | 583 . 54 In the Project Browser. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. If necessary. click Join Geometry. under 3D Views. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. double-click View 1.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. click Family Types. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. and select the vertical mullions.

Enter 2000 mm for Width. 584 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Other. Assigning Materials to the Window Components. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. enter 1000 mm for Height. Click OK. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Other. you assign materials to the frame.57 In the Family Types dialog box. sash. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Click Apply. 58 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. enter 1500 mm for Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height.

Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. sash. double-click Exterior. 2 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. click Materials.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Creating a Window Family | 585 . enter Pine Frame for Name. and select Shading with Edges. the sash. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. click for Texture. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. 4 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. click Duplicate. Yellow/. 9 Select the window frame sweep. 6 In the Materials dialog box. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. No Gloss. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. click the Model Graphics Style control. 3 In the New Material dialog box. under AccuRender. select Stained. 8 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. Dark. and the mullions. and click OK.

select Edit for Visibility. 20 Select the glass extrusion.10 On the Options Bar. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. and click OK. click . under View Specific Display. under Identity Data. double-click View 1. 18 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. verify that Coarse. 21 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. clear the other view options. under View Specific Display. verify that Coarse. under 3D Views. select Pine Frame for Name. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. and click OK. and Fine are selected. click Modify. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). under Graphics. 16 Under Detail Levels. click Visibility. 13 In the Materials dialog box. double-click Right. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. click for Material. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 586 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Medium. and Fine are selected. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 24 In the Project Browser. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). Medium. click OK. and click OK. 23 Under Detail Levels.

The window frame. and glass display their assigned materials. sash. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.25 Zoom in on a window corner. mullions. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. Creating a Window Family | 587 . You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. Defining New Window Types.

it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. enter 2000 mm for Height. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. 588 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. 2 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and click Apply. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. 3 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. In the Family Types dialog box. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset.

Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. click New. and click OK. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. under Family Types. 9 Under Family Types. Click Apply. 10 In the Name dialog box. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1250 mm for Height. and click OK. enter 1000 mm for Height. and click Apply. Creating a Window Family | 589 .The window height is doubled. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. 7 In the Name dialog box. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name.

16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. Click Apply. click to start a new project based on your default template. 25 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 32 On the View menu. 29 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Name dialog box. 33 Zoom in on the center window. 20 In the Open dialog box. click Modify. click Load. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 15 On the File menu. clear Tag on Placement. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. Notice the detail that displays. 27 In the Type Selector. 24 On the Options Bar. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. click Thin Lines. click Wall. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. click Window. and click Open. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar.rfa. 590 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Save. Click OK. select it. Click Apply. 23 On the Design Bar. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. Enter 1300 mm for Height. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 19 On the Options Bar. click New. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. click Window. 31 On the Design Bar. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. navigate to the location of your Training Window. Training Window.11 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK.rfa file. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long.

Finally. You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype.34 On the View toolbar. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. drawer base. click . You begin by creating the desktop. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. Creating a Furniture Family | 591 . click the Model Graphics Style control. 35 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. and drawers as extrusions. rolltop. and select Shading with Edges.

click Dimension. 2 On the File menu. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 592 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 Maximize the view. 9 On the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes.rft. and click Open. Select Metric Furniture. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps.Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. Floor Plan: Ref. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. Level. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. their exact location is not critical. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. click New ➤ Family. click Ref Plane.

and ending at the right reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 13 Select the left reference plane. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added.10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. 12 On the Design Bar. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. Creating a Furniture Family | 593 . 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. click Modify. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. as shown.

add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. and ending at the lower reference plane. click Dimension.15 On the Design Bar. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. as shown. 594 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. as shown. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane.

19 Select the upper.18 On the Design Bar. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. TIP To do this. horizontal reference plane. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. Afterwards. click Modify. Creating a Furniture Family | 595 .

enter Length for Name. select Dimensions. For Group parameter under. select <Add parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.> for Label.. Click OK. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. 24 On the Options Bar. select Dimensions.23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. Click OK. For Group parameter under. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. select <Add parameter. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter Depth for Name.> for Label. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Under Parameter Data... specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select Family parameter. select Family parameter.. 596 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select Type. 27 On the Options Bar.

enter 2000 mm for Length. it will also adapt to the same changes. 30 On the Design Bar. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Click OK. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area.These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. you can still see the model. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Creating a Furniture Family | 597 . you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. Click Apply. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Therefore. enter 3000 mm for Length. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply.

and click to select all four symbolic lines. 10 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane. and enter 100 mm for Depth. 598 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Level: Ref. 2 On the Options Bar. click Symbolic Lines. click Set Work Plane. double-click Front. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Level for Name. click . NOTE In the image below.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Elevations. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. 11 In the Project Browser. Your lines may have a lighter weight. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.

19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge.The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. and select the top edge. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. click Dimension.> for Label. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. click Modify. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. Creating a Furniture Family | 599 . click Modify. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. select <Add parameter. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. 22 On the Options Bar. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar.. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. and select the bottom edge.. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. as shown.

. select Dimensions. For Group parameter under. click Family Types. Under Parameter Data. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. For Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 750 mm for Height. you can still see the model.. 25 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. enter Thickness for Name. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. select Family parameter. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. enter Height for Name. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. select Dimensions. Click Apply.23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. 27 On the Design Bar.> for Label. Under Parameter Data. and click Apply. 600 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter. Select Type. Click OK. Click OK. click Modify. 29 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. select Family parameter. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2000 mm for Length.

5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. Creating a Furniture Family | 601 . 2 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. and enter 100 mm for Offset. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. Level. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. click Ref Plane. Click the lock icon as shown. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. double-click Ref. click . 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. under Floor Plans.

14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. click Lines. as shown. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 12 On the Design Bar. select Level: Ref. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. 13 On the Options Bar. click . 602 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. Level for Name. Lock the dimension as shown.

Creating a Furniture Family | 603 . and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. two lock icons display. click Dimension.After you complete the rectangle. 16 On the Design Bar.

click . A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 22 On the Tools toolbar. using the TAB key. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. . click Modify. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. You can also highlight the entire line chain. 23 For the align-to reference. 19 Select the four sketched lines. 20 On the Tools toolbar. as shown below at the cursor.18 On the Design Bar. 604 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click the Mirror tool. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down.

24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. click Dimension. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. ■ Creating a Furniture Family | 605 . 26 On the Design Bar. A lock icon displays.

. For Group parameter under.> for Label. Click OK. select Drawer Base Width for Label. select <Add parameter.. select Dimensions. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select Family parameter.28 Add two final dimensions. 34 On the Design Bar. Select Type. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. Under Parameter Data. as shown. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 606 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. 33 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. 32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion.

37 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. click Finish Sketch.35 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. click . a lock icon displays. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. Creating a Furniture Family | 607 . 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. click it to lock the alignment. After the alignment.

42 On the View menu. notice that annotations display in this view. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. click . 45 On the View Control Bar. click the Scale control and select 1:20. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. However. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 41 On the View toolbar. 608 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 47 On the Design Bar. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. click Family Types. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply.40 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. Click OK. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. you can still see the model. click Visibility/Graphics. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry. click Modify. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Click Apply. enter 2000 mm for Length. and click OK.

Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Set Work Plane. 3 On the Design Bar. double-click Right. 6 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. as shown.Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating a Furniture Family | 609 . and click to specify the upper left corner.

8 On the Tools toolbar. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. then the lower horizontal sketch line. 9 Select the desk top. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. then select the right parallel sketch line. and lock the alignment. 610 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . and lock it. and lock it. click Dimension. 11 On the Design Bar.

click Lines. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. the upper sketch line.13 On the Design Bar. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. click Finish Sketch. The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. . 16 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 611 . 14 On the Options Bar. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. click the Fillet arc tool. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius.

double-click Front. and click the lock icon. 612 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. and click the lock icon. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. click . select the right edge of the rolltop. under Elevations. select the left edge of the rolltop. 18 On the Tools toolbar.

enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box.21 On the View toolbar. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. and click Apply. Creating a Furniture Family | 613 . The desk should adapt to all the changes. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. If not. 23 On the Design Bar. click . you can still see the model. Enter 1500 mm for Height. and click Apply. and click Apply. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. You can also use dimension constraints.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desk drawer extrusions
1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a Plane, and click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.

5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar, click .

8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

614 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.

NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions, zoom the view until you do.

11 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

12 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers, select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first, and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper drawer, click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 14 On the Tools toolbar, click set on the left. 15 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the drawer

, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.

These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 20 On the View toolbar, click .

Creating a Furniture Family | 615

Apply material to the desk
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 22 On the Options Bar, click . for Material.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click 24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate. 25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.

27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished. 28 Click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Flex the design
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box, you can still see the model. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

616 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints. 35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types.

Defining New Furniture Types
In this exercise, you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Creating a Furniture Family | 617

Define new furniture types with various widths and depths
1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New. 3 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name, and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box, verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm, and click Apply. 5 Under Family Types, click New. 6 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth, and click Apply. 8 Under Family Types, click New. 9 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name, and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth, click Apply, and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 11 On the File menu, click Save. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training Furniture.rfa.

Load the new window family into a new project

13 On the Standard toolbar, click 14 On the View toolbar, click .

to start a new project based on your default template.

15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component. 17 On the Options Bar, click Load. 18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 100mm. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.

21 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk, and add the second desk.

618 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

23 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks, and click to add the third desk.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

Creating a Baluster Family
In this lesson, you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 Expand the left elevation view. 2 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

Creating a Baluster Family | 619

The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.

Draw the baluster plan profile
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Ref. Level for Name, and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Front.

620 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

By default, the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 11 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 14 Click the lock icon.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa. The new custom baluster is now complete.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
In this exercise, you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.

Load the new baluster family into a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rtefile, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a straight stair run
3 On the Design Bar, click the Modelling tab. 4 On the Design Bar, click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

Creating a Baluster Family | 621

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar, click .

10 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest. 11 On the View menu, click Shading with Edges.

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing. 13 On the Options Bar, click .

14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

622 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.

Creating Profile Families
A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings, balusters, soffits, cornices, and other sweep-defined objects. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. In this lesson, you create five different profiles: a sweep, a railing, a stair nosing, a reveal, and a host sweep. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Drawing a Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you draw a sweep profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.

3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa. The new sweep profile is now complete.

Creating Profile Families | 623

Drawing a Rail Profile
In this exercise, you create a rail profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default rail profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.

Draw the rail profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa. The new rail profile is now complete.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
In this exercise, you create a stair nosing profile.

624 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.

Draw the stair nosing profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

Drawing a Reveal Profile
In this exercise, you create a reveal profile. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.

Creating Profile Families | 625

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face, and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.

Draw the reveal profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa. The new reveal profile is now complete.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface, which may be any vertical surface.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.

626 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Draw the host sweep profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa. The new host sweep profile is now complete.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
In this exercise, you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Creating Profile Families | 627

Specify the family category
3 On the Modelling menu, click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.

Sketch the 2D sweep path
6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Sweep. 7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path
10 On the Options Bar, click Load Profiles. 11 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 12 In the Type Selector, beside Load Profiles, select Profile - Sweep. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family. 15 On the View toolbar, click .

Modify the sweep profile configuration
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.

18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.

20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit. 21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

.

Under Constraints, enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Under Other, select Profile Is Flipped.

23 Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

25 On the View toolbar, click

.

The sweep profile application is now complete.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
In this exercise, you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.

Creating Profile Families | 629

2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a wall group
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical. 4 Draw four walls as shown.

5 On the View toolbar, click

.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

630 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Profile - Host Sweep : Profile - Host Sweep for Profile, and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 17 On the View toolbar, click . .

18 In the Dynamic View dialog box, click Spin [Shift]. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.

Creating a Room Tag
In this lesson, you create a room tag which displays room name, floor and ceiling finish, and area with labels added to extract project data.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters
In this exercise, you specify the room tag parameters.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.

Creating a Room Tag | 631

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template
1 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

Edit the 3mm label
2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Label. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box, select Underline, and click OK.

Add a 2mm label
6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter 2mm for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 2 for the Text Size parameter, clear Underline, and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

Combine labels into a room tag
11 On the Design Bar, click Label. 12 In the Type Selector, verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 13 On the Options Bar, verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label.

The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 17 In the Type Selector, select Label : 2mm. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Floor Finish, and click OK.

632 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 633 .20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. select Area. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag.rft. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and click OK. In the left pane of the New dialog box. and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Ceiling Finish. and click OK. Select Generic Annotation. select Training Files. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. The new room tag is now ready for use. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. and click Open. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. notice that there is only one view available.rfa. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box.

click Lines. 5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. click .Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. click . 6 On the Options Bar. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point.

16 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Modify. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. select North Line. and click OK. under Modify Subcategories. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. click New. enter North Line for Name. in the North Line row. click Modify. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. 10 On the Design Bar. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 635 . 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Modify.9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. and select the upper vertical line. 17 On the Design Bar. click Object Styles. select 3 for Line Weight.

Select the DefaultMetric. 12 On the Design Bar. Training North Arrow. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. and click Open. click Modify. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 7 On the File menu.rfa. and in the left pane of the New dialog box.18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. click Browse. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 5 Click OK. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rte file. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. select it. click New ➤ Project.rfa. click Sheet. In the New Project Dialog box. select A1 metric. click Symbol. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. select Training North Arrow. select Training Files. and click Open. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. click OK. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 8 In the Open dialog box. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson.

rft. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. In the left pane of the New dialog box.The titleblock has linework. Select A0 metric. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. text. and labels. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. click Lines. graphics. Creating a Titleblock Family | 637 . Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. and click Open. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. and your project data. click New ➤ Titleblock. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. and enter -25 for Offset. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click . and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle.

11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. and click .Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. . and enter 140 for Offset. and click to draw a new vertical line. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. click .

23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line.12 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 17 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. enter 30 for Offset. click . and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 21 On the Options Bar. Creating a Titleblock Family | 639 . select Title Blocks. 13 In the Type Selector. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. press CTRL. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. and enter 20 for Offset. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. select Wide Lines. click Modify. click Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 16 In the Type Selector.

640 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and labels to your titleblock. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. click Import/Link ➤ Image.25 On the Design Bar. select Company Logo. navigate to Training Files/Common. text notes. you add a company logo. 2 In the Open dialog box. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown.jpg. and click Open. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. click Modify. The titleblock linework is now complete.

in the text box. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. under Text. and click OK.4 Zoom in on the logo. click Duplicate. and select Bold. 11 Click OK twice. 9 In the Name dialog box. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . enter 10 for Text Size. Creating a Titleblock Family | 641 . click Edit/New. 6 On the Options Bar. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 10mm Bold for Name. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Text.

21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. Add consultant name.Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. address. select Text : 8mm. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. and add an address and phone number as shown. 18 Select the drag handle. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Text. and drag the text note down as shown. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. and select the last text note. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. click Modify.

23 On the Edit toolbar. 24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Titleblock Family | 643 .22 On the Design Bar. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. and select the consultant text note. click Modify. select Constrain and Multiple. 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. click .

27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location. 644 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

select Text : 5mm. and enter Date:. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Drawn By:. click Text. and enter Checked By:. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click . and click OK. enter 5 for Text Size. Creating a Titleblock Family | 645 . Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. click Label. and click OK. 32 In the Name dialog box. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. select Project Issue Date. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click to specify the label location. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 34 Click OK twice. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. and enter Sheet Number:. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. click Duplicate. 41 On the Options Bar. enter 5mm for Name. 29 On the Options Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Text.

and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click to specify the label location. select Drawn By. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click to specify the label location. select Checked By and click OK. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .44 Select the left drag handle on the label. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click OK. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field.

53 In the Name dialog box. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. and click OK. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. click . select Project Number. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 15 for Text Size. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click OK. select Label : 15mm Label. 55 Click OK twice. select Sheet Number.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. 59 On the Options Bar. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. and click OK. 50 On the Options Bar. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. under Text. and click to specify the label location. click Duplicate. and click to specify the label location. click Label. enter 15mm Label for Name. click Center and Middle. Creating a Titleblock Family | 647 .

74 In the Type Properties dialog box. 648 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. and click to specify the label location. enter 4mm Label. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. select Client Name. click . and click OK. and click OK. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. enter 4 for Text Size. click Edit/New. select Project Name. 70 On the Options Bar. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. under Text. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 75 Click OK twice. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. 73 In the Name dialog box. and click to specify the label location. click Label. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.

Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 5 In the Open dialog box. click Browse. click New ➤ Project. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and labels are now complete.rfa. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.rfa file. click Modify.rte file. 80 On the Design Bar. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. text. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. click Load. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. and click Open. Creating a Titleblock Family | 649 . and click OK. 7 Click OK. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. click Sheet. select File Path. click OK. and click to specify the label location. select it. The titleblock graphics. Select the DefaultMetric. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 77 On the Options Bar. In the New Project Dialog box. click Left and Middle. select Training Files. select 4mm Label. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click Open.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. 14 Click OK. and click OK. click Modify and select the titleblock. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. 650 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Name for Drawn By. 9 On the Options Bar. Enter In Progress for Project Status. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. 2005 for Project Issue Date. under Other. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. 12 On the Settings menu. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. Enter Office Building for Project Name. click Project Information. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Views (all). and click Open. on the Settings menu. Select c_Pantheon. expand Elevations. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. select Training Files and navigate to the Common folder. Set the Length units to millimeters. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu.NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. To change the units of measurement to meters.rvt. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. Next. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. and set the suffix to None. set the Area to Square meters. 2 In the Project Browser. click Orient ➤ Southeast. click Project Units. and double-click South. Creating In-Place Families | 651 . click Open.

select Pick a Plane. 7 On the Design Bar. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. click Create. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. and click Open View.Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. and click OK. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar.Center. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 5 In the Name dialog box. click . and click OK. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. enter Dome for Name. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. select Roofs for Family Category. The center wall section view is displayed. click Axis. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. select Section: Wall Section . and click OK. 652 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Creating In-Place Families | 653 . 17 Move the cursor out.Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. click . 15 On the Options Bar. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane.

and select Chain. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. 19 On the Options Bar. click . 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. 654 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line.

Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. 23 On the Options Bar. Creating In-Place Families | 655 . select Delete Inner Segment. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. click . Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. click . 27 On the Options Bar. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point.

30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Options Bar. 656 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. click and select Chain. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. click Lines.

The dome roof closed profile is now complete. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. 41 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. and click OK. Creating In-Place Families | 657 . click Finish Family. 38 In the Materials dialog box. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. click . click Revolution Properties. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. click for Material. 42 On the View toolbar. select Concrete .Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. click OK. click .Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar.

enter Concave Floor for Name. 6 On the Design Bar. click Axis. click Create. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. select Pick a Plane. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. and click OK. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. and click OK.Center. double-click South. and click Open View. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. click . 9 In the Go To View dialog box.Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. select Floors for Family Category. select Section: Wall Section . 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. 5 On the Design Bar. 658 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. click Set Work Plane. 11 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box.

click . 15 Specify the intersection of the T. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. click Lines. 14 On the Options Bar.O. Creating In-Place Families | 659 .12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. Footing level line and the axis. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. and select Chain. Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis.

O. and click OK. click for Material. select Cobblestone for Name. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. 25 On the Design Bar. click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. 660 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. The concave floor closed profile is now complete.18 Specify the intersection of the T. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. click Revolution Properties. click Finish Family. 22 In the Materials dialog box.O. double-click 3D Section View. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. 24 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box.

methodology. The truss also has multiple types. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Autodesk Revit Building. 661 . At the end of this tutorial. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. formula-based parameters. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open-joist wood floor truss. you will understand the process. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. and detail level controls. During this tutorial. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. In this case. not specifically how to make a floor truss. In exercises that become increasingly complex.Parametric Component Design Techniques 20 In this tutorial. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. assigned subcatecories.

A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. the design spec requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. it is not the best solution. Two types should be created. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. In the next exercise. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. you should avoid over-designing the component. and structural walls. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 662 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . In this case. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. Although this solution is possible. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. NOTE When creating a new family. and also works intuitively with them. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. In addition. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. Take this into consideration during your design planning. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. you determine the requirements of the new component. this must be a structural beam component. For training purposes. In this lesson. a generic floor-based component might work. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. beams. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. In this case. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. It should also be an available option within a beam system. For every complexity added to a family.

These materiails can be applied using Object Styles. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options.■ What materials need the most control? These materials. would require Instance or Type parameters. Selecting the Family Template. What types are most commonly used? In this training case. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. In addition. such as wood type. 4 Continue with the next exercise. Depending on the family you are designing. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. Planning a Parametric Component Family | 663 . especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. the means in which to gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. In the previous exercise. the planning stage and questions may differ. ■ ■ ■ You have completed the planning stage for the new family. How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family.

Like most generic family templates.rft and notice the preview. for example: wall based or floor based. There are two structural framing templates provided. 664 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .rft. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. On the right side of the New dialog box. navigate to it. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). 5 In the New dialog box. ■ Metric Structural Framing . notice the preview. scroll to the structural framing templates.rft This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. select Metric Generic Model floor based. Select it so that the preview displays. In addition. For training purposes. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. NOTE Although this is the template you use to start the tutorial. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion.Beams and Braces. 6 Select Metric Structural Framing . These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. Notice this template offers three horizontal planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . it is not the best starting point for the beam family. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). ■ Metric Structural Framing . do not open this template.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. spacing.Beams and Braces. and display functions required by structural beams. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. Notice that most of the template names include the component type.rft. 3 In the New dialog box. Because of its simplicity. This template is the best starting point for the new family. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box.Complex and Trusses. scroll through the various template options. and notice the preview. If you are not in this folder.Complex and Trusses. 4 In the New dialog box. this template resides within the training folders and should be opened from there.

Level.rft located in the Metric  ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates ➤  folder. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. Like many templates.Open the family template 8 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. Floor Plan: Ref. however. 10 Maximize the view. double-click Front. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Therefore. click the Training Files icon. Creating the Component Skeleton. you add the reference planes. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. under 3D Views. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. 9 Open Metric Structural Framing . 11 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. 12 In the Project Browser. Floor Plan: Ref. Level In this view. lines.Beams and Braces. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. Creating the Component Skeleton | 665 . you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. double-click View 1.

NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. In the image below. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. 666 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component.Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. under Floor Plans. notice the location of the beam extents. In the project plan view image below. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. double-click Ref. you add reference planes to the beam design. 3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. Level. Reference Plane: Left. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project.

Before adding new reference planes. click Ref Plane. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. Creating the Component Skeleton | 667 . it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. In a later exercise. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. click . Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line.■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse.

11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. select the lower horizontal reference plane. double-click Front. Level. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Design Bar. Add ref. 668 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). click on the Edit toolbar. To do this. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. under Elevations. click Ref Plane. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). and select the Level: Ref. Level. Level as the mirror axis.

click Ref Plane. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. click to place it as shown. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. click to place it as shown. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. Creating the Component Skeleton | 669 . 16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. click to place it. 13 On the Design Bar. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. click to place it as shown. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. 14 On the Options Bar. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click . When a copy of the reference plane displays below it.These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it.

under Floor Plans. specify an Offset of 200 mm. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. Before you move on to the next exercise.You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 24 In the Project Browser. which you do in the next exercise. click to place it as shown. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. 20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 19 On the Options Bar. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. 22 On the Options Bar. 670 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. specify an Offset of 238 mm. double-click Ref. Level.

After adding the dimension. 28 In the Save As dialog box. click Dimension. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. Creating the Component Skeleton | 671 . separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. Adding Dimensions and Constraints. 2 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Make sure you remember where you saved it.25 On the Design Bar. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise.rfa. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. and click Save. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . click Modify. Wood Floor Truss. navigate to the folder of your choice. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines.

and the lower horizontal reference plane. 6 On the Design Bar.4 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. Place the dimension as shown. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. under Elevations. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. click Modify. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. click Dimension. the Center reference plane. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. Level. 672 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . place the dimension to the left as shown.

Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model.11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. Creating the Component Skeleton | 673 . place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. add two dimensions as shown. and place it below the dimension you added previously.

consider making it an instance parameter. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. In the next exercise. under Floor Plans. Throughout the tutorial. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. Creating New Length Parameters. 674 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . If the component has material that varies per component. When you design a new family. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. Wood Floor Truss. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.15 Add four dimensions as shown. consider making it a type parameter. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. consider making it a type parameter. ■ ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. it becomes a parameter. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. and constraints as needed.rfa. double-click Ref. you will add additional reference planes. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Level. dimensions. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. In this exercise. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. In addition.

enter Chord Width for Name. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. ■ Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. enter Depth for Name. select Family parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Add parameter for Label. Under Parameter Data. under Elevations. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Type. Click OK. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. select Add parameter for Label. 3 On the Options Bar. Select Type. Under Parameter Data.2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. Creating the Component Skeleton | 675 . Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Family parameter. double-click Front. 7 On the Options Bar.

Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under.Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. Click OK. Under Parameter Data. Select Type. select Add parameter for Label. 13 On the Options Bar. enter Chord Thickness for Name. Under Parameter Data. 10 On the Options Bar. enter Center Chase Width for Name. Click OK. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Family parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Family parameter. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. 676 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. select Add parameter for Label. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type.

select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. select Chord Thickness for Label.TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. 17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. Creating the Component Skeleton | 677 . Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model.

Wood Floor Truss. When you load this family into a project. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. In the Family Types dialog box. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. click Save. After you verify this. Nesting a component. ■ 678 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element.rfa. When you open the Family Types dialog. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. If you add a new material parameter. When you flex a family. This is not limited to length parameters. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected.18 On the Design Bar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. or Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. Flexing the Component Model. 20 On the File menu. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. When you open the Family Types dialog box. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. click Family Types. In this exercise. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. Adding a new constraint. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. Dimensions. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. 19 Click Cancel. Adding or modifying a parameter. you can drag it to the opposing corner.

notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. and click Apply. under Dimensions. click Family Types. enter 600 mm for Depth. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box.Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. 80 mm for Chord Thickness. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. Level. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. and click Apply. In addition. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. Creating the Component Skeleton | 679 . 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth.

After adding the chords. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. you align and lock their position. After creating the extrusions. Click OK. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. Adding Solid Geometry. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. 6 On the File menu. click Save.rfa. under Elevations. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. After flexing the design. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. Click Apply. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. When working within the Family Editor.Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. 680 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. Wood Floor Truss. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. double-click Left.

11 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. 5 On the Design Bar. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. click Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. click .3 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. Adding Solid Geometry | 681 . When using the Trim tool. the lines will no longer overlap. and select Lock. and verify that Lock is selected. select Reference Plane: Member Left. and click OK. click . click Lines. click the part of the line you want to keep. click Name. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. click . Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. 8 On the Tools toolbar.

2 Enter SD. 17 On the File menu. double-click View 1. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. under 3D Views. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. click . you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. under Elevations. 3 Select the chord extrusions. this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges.13 On the Tools toolbar. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. 682 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Wood Floor Truss. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. click Save. click Finish Sketch. Constrain the extrusion ends 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry.rfa. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry. 16 In the Project Browser. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry In this exercise.

you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. Therefore. enter 3000 for Length. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. On the Design Bar. as shown. as shown. Add a new dimension and constraint 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. not the member right or member left reference planes. 5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open. and click Apply. 8 In the Family Types dialog box.4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right. enter 6000 for Length. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. click Dimension. Adding Solid Geometry | 683 . click Family Types. click Apply. Flex the design 6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length.

684 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. depth. you add the web members. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. click Family Types. In this particular case. 14 Click OK.11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working. adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value. you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment. Flex the chord width. In a later exercise. Flex the length 12 On the Design Bar. Afterwards. and click Apply. 13 In the Family Types dialog box. double-click View 1. under 3D Views. enter 6000 for Length. Therefore. and thickness 15 In the Project Browser. use the Align tool and add the constraint. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected. Later in this lesson.

20 On the File menu. click Save. such as doubling. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Therefore. Enter 200mm for Chord Width.16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges. click Family Types. Creating Additional Solid Geometry In this exercise. 18 In the Family Types dialog box. Wood Floor Truss. Adding Solid Geometry | 685 . Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Click Apply. ■ The chords should adjust to each of the new values. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 600mm for Depth. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 Specify the beam values shown below: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. TIP When flexing. it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Creating Additional Solid Geometry. that allows you to easily return to the original values. try picking a method.rfa. and click OK. Click Apply. Enter 89mm for Chord Width.

686 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 4 On the Design Bar. and verify that Lock is selected. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the left. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 11 On the Options Bar. double-click Ref. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Lines. vertical member of the center chase as shown.Add the center chase extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. Level. click the Hide/Isolate control. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. under Floor Plans. click . 12 Select the four reference planes that border the right. 10 On the Design Bar. and verify that Lock is selected. vertical member of the center chase as shown. click . 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown. and click Hide Object. click . 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left. the lines will no longer overlap. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. click . vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown. click Lines.

Adding Solid Geometry | 687 . This next process is very important. and after the alignment. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options. 16 In the Project Browser. select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. 21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord. double-click Front. under Elevations. click Align. and lock the alignment as shown. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.15 On the Design Bar. it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion. Align and lock the new extrusions 18 On the Tools menu. 20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions. 17 Zoom in on the center chase. click Finish Sketch. 19 For the align-to reference.

select Add Parameter for Label. Add the truss end extrusions 28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown. Click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. and click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the center chase 23 On the Design Bar. Clean up the view 26 Zoom to Fit. This will make subsequent work much easier. The truss should adapt to all the changes. redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 29 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. If it does not. 688 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Family Types.22 On the Design Bar. 27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown.

38 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Trimmable End Length for Label. enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. 33 On the Design Bar. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar. Sketch the right end extrusion 35 In the Project Browser. select the lower horizontal reference plane. click Family Types. on the lower chord. Select Instance. 31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 39 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. click Lines. 41 On the upper chord. click Apply. and click OK. 40 On the Options Bar. Click OK. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. select the upper horizontal reference plane. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. 32 On the Options Bar. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. and click OK. Adding Solid Geometry | 689 . under Elevations. enter19mm for Offset. double-click Right. 37 On the Design Bar. under Parameter Data.30 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and verify that Lock is selected. click .

690 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click . 48 On the Design Bar. 54 On the Options Bar. Sketch the left end extrusion 49 In the Project Browser. 53 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. double-click Left. select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name. under Constraints. under Elevations. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 51 On the Design Bar.44 On the Tools toolbar. verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value. 47 In the Element Properties dialog box. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 56 On the Options Bar. 52 In the Work Plane dialog box. and verify that Lock is selected. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 46 On the Design Bar. enter 19mm for Offset. on the lower chord. 55 On the upper chord. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Extrusion Properties. and click OK. click . 45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. select the upper horizontal reference plane. click Lines.

double-click Front. 61 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. Add alignment constraints 63 In the Project Browser. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 60 On the Design Bar. click . under Constraints. specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point. click Align. Adding Solid Geometry | 691 . 65 On the Tools menu. 62 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. click Extrusion Properties. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test.58 On the Tools toolbar. and click OK. 59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends.

a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. click Family Types. 74 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. 71 On the Design Bar. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. The truss should adapt to all the changes. under 3D Views. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. Click Apply. and lock the alignment. Click Apply. and lock the alignment. Flex the design 72 On the Design Bar. if you select the end extrusion.67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion. 692 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . double-click View 1. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. TIP When you finish the alignments. Make adjustments to account for the right side. If it does not. 75 In the Project Browser. this is the align-to point. click Modify. and click OK. 68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion. 73 In the Family Types dialog box.

it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. Testing the Family in a Project In this lesson. Testing the Family in a Project. Loading a Family into a Project In this exercise. NOTE Close any open families or projects. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1. click Open. you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. click the Training Files icon. you can continue using it in the next lesson. you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt. Testing the Family in a Project | 693 . After you load it into the project. 77 Proceed to the next lesson. If you are comfortable with your design. Although you could continue using the previous family. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way. Datasets Open the truss family ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and a rim joist.76 Save the Family. you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls. you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. a sill.

click the Training Files icon. Load the truss family into the project 1 On the Window menu. click Open. and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Testing a Family Instance in a Project. 2 On the Design Bar. a dialog box would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Open the m_WWF1. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you add several instances of the truss family to the project. click Load into Projects. click m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Notice that the project file is now active. expand Families. and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 3 In the Project Browser. If you had multiple projects or families open. Testing a Family Instance in a Project In this exercise. 694 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 4 Proceed to the next exercise.Open the project file ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Structural Framing.rfa. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

4 In the Type Selector.Southeast Isometric. a slab. Testing the Family in a Project | 695 . This project consists of foundation walls. and a wood rim joist. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. 5 Using point-to-point insertion. therefore. under 3D Views. expand Views. expand 3D Views. NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. The rim joist was added as a beam. 2 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D . click Beam. under Floor Plans. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. a wood sill. double-click 3D . 6 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. double-click Level 1.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser.

you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. 9 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.Southeast Isometric.Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. 696 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . double-click Level 1. 8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. not the wall or rim joist. under Floor Plans. double-click 3D . 7 In the Project Browser. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. You do not need to be precise.

IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. 10 On the Edit menu. click Yes.Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. 11 On the File menu. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. click Save as. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. 14 On the Options Bar. This should return the project to its original dimension. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. click Undo Drag. In the next lesson. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 697 . 12 In the Save as dialog box. Working with Nested Subcomponents. 15 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. click Edit Family. Because the family is already open. Edit a family from within a project 13 Select one of the wooden truss components.

Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. 698 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Level. 2 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. This family is a single extrusion as shown. click Hide/Isolate.rfa is the active file. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. ■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. Open the m_Wood_Web. click the Training Files icon. This will make aligning the wood web easier. double-click Ref. click Component. 5 On the File menu. 4 On the View Control Bar.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. and click Hide Object.

this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. Align the nested web components 12 Enter . click Modify. 13 For the align-to point. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. 10 In the Project Browser. In the following steps. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. under Elevations. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. double-click Front. You will align the left web component first.9 On the Design Bar. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. 14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 699 . you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. Do not select it. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter.

NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. In the steps that follow.Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. 700 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. click Modify. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. click Align. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. In addition. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. 19 On the Tools menu. click Ref Plane. 16 On the Design Bar.

Place the dimension as shown.23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. Place the dimension as shown. click Dimension. ■ Working with Nested Subcomponents | 701 . Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. 25 Add the following two dimensions: ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. ■ ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. click Save As. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. Select Length for Type. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. enter Depth . Select Type. you add new parameters to control the web components. and click OK. click Modify. select WebDepth. under Parameters. click Edit/New. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. length. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. Click OK. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. 12 On the Design Bar. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. under Other. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 27 On the File menu. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. 28 In the Save As dialog box. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. In the Type Parameter dialog box. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. under Parameter Data. click OK. you label these dimensions. and click Properties. click Family Types. or the width of the center chase. 702 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field. click OK. Select Common for Discipline. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. click Add. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. under Constraints. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 26 On the Design Bar. 29 Proceed to the next exercise.In the next exercise. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. 5 Click OK.

which must remain at least 150mm long. After you enter the formula. enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. Select Length for Type. Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter 17 In the Family Types dialog box. enter (Length .Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. do the following: ■ Enter CC for Name. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.(CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayLength for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. Click OK. click Family Types. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends. Select Length for Type. under Parameter Data. Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter 20 In the Family Types dialog box. 16 Under Other. In addition. Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase 13 On the Design Bar. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 703 . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field. under Parameter Data. Select Instance. under Parameters. 19 Under Constraints. click Add. Click OK. Select Instance. under Parameters. Select Common for Discipline. under Parameters. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. click Add.

Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula. 22 Under Constraints. 32 Click OK.21 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Add formula for Webhalflength 30 On the Design Bar. select Add parameter for Label. 29 On the Design Bar. under Parameter Data. 23 Click OK. select Webhalflength for Label. Select Instance. 28 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 25 On the Options Bar. Select Instance. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Webhalflength for Name. Click OK. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. Click OK. 31 Under Constraints. 704 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Select Integer for Type. click Family Types. click Modify. Add parameter to anchor web array 24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown. Select Common for Discipline. under Parameter Data. enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. 34 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. double-click View 1. Flex the design 41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box.Associate web component parameters 33 Right-click the left web component. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. 42 On the Design Bar. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. click Edit/New. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. Because you have added and constrained new components. the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. select WebArrayLength. 39 On the Design Bar. under Other. If it does not. and click Properties. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 705 . click Modify. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Family Types. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. Click Apply. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. under 3D Views. it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. click OK. In the Type Properties dialog box. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems. and click OK. 40 In the Project Browser. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box.

706 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .44 In the Family Types dialog box. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. then you specify the move end point. Click Apply. click Save. Array the left web component 1 In the Project Browser. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Creating an array requires two basic steps. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. you array the nested web components. 45 On the File menu. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. 5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. Select 2nd for Move to. 4 On the Options Bar. add alignment constraints. click Array. Enter 3 for Number. you specify the move start point. and click OK. When picking the corner. under Elevations. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. Arraying Nested Subcomponents. First. and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Arraying Nested Subcomponents In this exercise. double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase. 3 On the Edit menu. Select Constrain.

click Modify. click Modify. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. Select 2nd for Move to. When picking the corner. Align and lock the arrays 17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 18 On the Tools menu. click Array. When picking the corner. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. then select the line twice. click Align. 15 On the Design Bar. When picking the corner. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. Array the right nested web component 9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 8 On the Design Bar. Enter 3 for Number. 12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. 19 In the left array. 11 On the Options Bar. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 707 . place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights. 10 On the Edit menu. 14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 16 Zoom out to view the truss. 7 Press ENTER to complete the array. Select Constrain.6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point.

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. 22 Within the right array. NOTE This step is very important. Label the arrays 23 Select the middle web component of the left array. click Modify. select WebArrayNum for Label.Because there are two overlapping lines at this location. align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. align and lock the two right web components. 25 On the Options Bar. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. 29 On the Design Bar. select WebArrayNum for Label. 708 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 28 On the Options Bar. 21 Within the left array. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it. If you do not lock the edges of the array. NOTE Do not select the array value. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges. the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

click Align. Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. This is because earlier in the tutorial. Left.Notice the arrays appear to be too long. 33 Delete the dimension. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown. Member Left. 35 Select the reference plane. 36 Select the reference plane. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value. as the align-to point. 34 On the Tools menu. and lock the alignment as shown. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 709 .

click Family Types. 41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. Click Apply. Flex the design 45 In the Project Browser. 710 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 46 On the Design Bar. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. 47 In the Family Types dialog box. however. and prepare the view for flexing. in this case. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends. If it does not. if any. 44 Click Apply. the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Enter 12000mm for Length. click Family Types. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. and click OK. enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right. this solution has little. click Modify. significant impact. Change trimmable end length value 42 On the Design Bar. double-click View 1. The truss should adapt to all the changes.NOTE With most beam families. under 3D Views. 37 On the Design Bar. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. Therefore. you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes. under Dimensions.

View 1. 2 On the Design Bar. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Yes. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. the project. Reload the truss into the project. Enter 6000mm for Length. and click OK. you reload the truss family into the project. Reloading a Family into a Project In this exercise. click Load into Projects. these steps have been reduced. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. should be open. displays. 3 In the Reload Family dialog box.rvt. You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. Click Apply. Reloading a Family into a Project. for training and time purposes. you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly. 1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. however. click Save. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes. In addition to the truss family. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 711 . m_WWF1. select Override parameter values of existing types.TIP When flexing a complex model such as this. 49 On the File menu.

7 On the Edit menu. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes. under 3D Views.Southeast Isometric. Materials. Applying Subcategories. In the next lesson.4 In the Project Browser. Applying Subcategories. under Floor Plans. Materials. you create and apply subcategories and materials. double-click 3D . 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. and Parameters. 6 In the Project Browser. click Undo Drag. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application. and Parameters In this lesson. double-click Level 1. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. 712 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files.

Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Apply Object Styles 1 Zoom in around beam system. click the Training Files icon. Applying Subcategories. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. the material values were set to By Category by default.rvt file located in the Metric folder. four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. you create new subcategories within the truss family. In addition.Creating and Applying Subcategories In this exercise. In this dataset. Open the m_WWF2. and Parameters | 713 . Within the family. the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Materials.

If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor. When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category. notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. and click OK. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. enter Wood Floor Truss for Name. 5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. 12 On the Settings menu. click New. click Object Styles. 10 On the Options Bar.Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components. verify that the Model Objects tab is selected. Notice the Wood . 3 In the Object Styles dialog box.2 On the Settings menu. it would also have the wood material applied to it. 4 On the Structural Framing category line.Timber for Name. click Edit Family. click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog box. 13 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog box. click Object Styles. 714 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 6 In the Materials dialog box. under Modify Subcategories. Create subcategories within the truss family 9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. click in the material field until the button displays as shown. you have more control over component visibility within a project. If there was a metal beam in this building model. and expand the category Structural Framing. click Wood . In addition. click Undo Object Styles. 8 On the Edit menu.

and click OK. click Edit Family. 19 In the Material Library dialog box. click Check None. press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. under Identity Data. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. click . click . click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog box. select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory. select Other. 29 On the Options Bar. click . Apply a subcategory to the nested web components 28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components. click Modify. and click OK. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 20 In the Materials dialog box. and Parameters | 715 . 26 In the Element Properties dialog box.No Gloss for Name. 27 On the Design Bar. The web component family opens in a 3D view. 25 On the Options Bar. enter Wood Floor Truss. and click OK. Applying Subcategories. under AccuRender.Apply material to subcategory 15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory. click OK. Materials. 23 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Materials dialog box. select Natural. and click OK. Apply the subcategory to the truss components 22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. 24 In the Filter dialog box. Yellow. 16 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. 21 In the Object Styles dialog box.

By creating a separate subcategory for the web components. 716 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 32 In the Object Styles dialog box. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click New. 41 Select the web extrusion.Webs for Name. click Load into Projects.rfa. click OK. 34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss . you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project. 38 In the Material Library dialog box. and click OK. enter Wood Floor Truss . 37 In the Materials dialog box. and click Yes. and click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog box. under Identity Data. Yellow.rvt. 46 In the Reload Family dialog box. select Wood Floor Truss . click Load into Projects. click Duplicate. under Modify Subcategories. click OK. click . and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. and click OK. 35 In the Materials dialog box. 42 On the Options Bar. Reload web component into truss family 44 On the Design Bar. 36 In the New Material dialog box. 43 In the Element Properties dialog box. select m_WWF2. and click OK. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. click Object Styles. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog box.No Gloss for Name. Reload truss into project 47 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Webs. select Override parameter values of existing types. 39 In the Materials dialog box. select Natural. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.Webs for Subcategory. under AccuRender. click . 48 In the Load into Projects dialog box. and click OK.31 On the Settings menu. enter Wood Floor Truss .Webs subcategory.

Creating Material Parameters. select Override parameter values of existing types. Materials. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. clear Wood Floor Truss Webs. you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. expand Structural Framing. the stick symbols continue to display. Applying Subcategories. Notice the two new subcategories are listed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise. expand Structural Framing. 55 On the Edit menu. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components. navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 2 On the Options Bar. 52 Click OK. Creating Material Parameters In this exercise. 50 On the Settings menu.49 In the Reload Family dialog box. click Object Styles. 56 On the File menu. 53 On the View menu. 57 In the Save as dialog box. and click OK. under Visibility. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box. and Parameters | 717 . click Visibility/Graphics. click Edit Family. under Categories. and click Yes. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. 51 In the Object Styles dialog box. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click Undo Visibility/Graphics. Notice the web extrusions not longer display. Open truss family for editing 1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. click Save As. however.

15 In the Element Properties dialog box. do not assign a material to the parameter. click . under Parameters. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.Create material parameter 4 On the Design Bar. this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. click . select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss). In this case. under Materials and Finishes. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. and click OK. click . click .Steel for Name. Select Material for Type. click the button to the right of the Material value field. click Modify. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under.rvt. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Other. 12 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. 718 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . press TAB. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. and select the component. 21 Click OK twice. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 11 In the Filter dialog box. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. Click OK. and click OK. and click Yes. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. notice the default material is By Category. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Metal . 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components. select Floor Truss Material. When reloaded into a project. click OK. under Parameter Data. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. click Add. 29 In the Materials dialog box. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 10 On the Options Bar. click Check None. and click OK. 22 On the Design Bar. Select Instance. click Edit/New. click OK. click Family Types. select Override parameter values of existing types. select m_WWF2. 17 On the Options Bar. select Floor Truss Material. 27 On the Options Bar. 8 Click OK. click Load into Projects. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Common for Discipline. under Materials and Finishes. Link truss extrusions to material parameter 9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss.

and click Coarse. Open the m_WWF3. because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. 35 Proceed to the next lesson. click Save. you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels. Controlling Component Visibility In this lesson. Controlling Component Visibility | 719 . In the next lesson. You can save the open files if you wish. click Modify. Assigning Detail Level and View Controls In this exercise. 32 On the File menu. Currently within the truss. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Close. notice the floor truss has not changed appearance. click the Training Files icon. Controlling Component Visibility. you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level. 34 Close any open files. 33 On the File menu. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.31 On the Design Bar. click Open. Change detail levels 1 On the View Control Bar. However. Notice the rim joist no longer displays. all elements display at all times in all views.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click Detail Level. a new dataset is supplied.

Clear Left/Right. click Visibility. clear Coarse. clear Plan/RCP. 9 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog box.2 Select a floor truss. Clear Left/Right. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Apply detail level controls to web components 5 Select a web component. 18 On the Options Bar. Under Detail Levels. and click Yes. Assign detail level to center chase extrusions 14 Select the center chase extrusions. clear Plan/RCP. select Override parameter values of existing types. 3 On the Options Bar. click Visibility. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Edit Family. clear Plan/RCP. Assign detail level to truss ends 17 Select the end extrusions. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 720 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 13 In the Reload Family dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Under Detail Levels. and click OK. Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. 6 On the Options Bar. Click OK.rfa. click Visibility. Click OK. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. clear Coarse. clear Coarse. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click Load into Projects. Under Detail Levels. 8 Select the web extrusion.

select m_WWF3.rvt. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click Visibility. and click OK. clear Coarse. 28 On the View Control Bar. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. click Load into Projects. and click Medium. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 27 In the Project Browser. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. and click Coarse. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. 26 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level. click Detail Level. Notice the symbolic representation of the beams. select Override parameter values of existing types. and click Yes.Assign detail level to truss chords 20 Select the truss chords. under Floor Plans. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Detail Levels. Controlling Component Visibility | 721 . Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed. 21 On the Options Bar. Click OK. double-click Level 1.

Creating Multiple Component Types In this exercise. and click OK. click New. NOTE When creating new components. Create new types 4 On the Design Bar. you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project. 31 Proceed to the next lesson. click Save As. you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length. 8 In the New dialog box. Creating Component Types. Notice the chord changes width. enter 89x38 for Name. creating predefined types can speed up the design process. under Dimensions. 2 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. under Family Types. Creating Component Types In this lesson. you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. enter 64mm for Chord Width. click New. create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK. click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. under Family Types. 6 In the New dialog box. In the final exercise. and click OK. enter 64x38 for Name. click Family Types. 9 In the Family Types dialog box. Open the truss family for editing 1 Select a floor truss.29 On the File menu. and click Apply. 30 In the Save As dialog box. 722 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 5 In the Family Types dialog box. navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 10 Select 89x38 for Name. TIP You can also use new types to flex the model.

400))) 6 Click Apply. Creating Component Types | 723 . 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. 8 In the Family Types dialog box.rvt. click Save. if(Length < 9000. enter 8000 for length. Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog box. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. click Beam. under Dimensions. Notice the two beam types. and click OK. if(Length < 7500. 18 In the Type Selector. 16 In the Type Selector. <result-if-true>. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. 21 In the Project Browser. select Override parameter values of existing types.Southeast Isometric. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. click Family Types. and click Apply. enter 6000 for length. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. select m_WWF3. Creating Conditional Formulas. 350. click Modify. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 286. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select 89x38. click Load into Projects. click Edit Family. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 400. Notice the truss depth increases. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. and click OK. 20 On the Design Bar. select 64x38. click Apply. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar.Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. double-click 3D . 22 On the File menu. 14 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click Yes. under 3D Views.

You have completed this tutorial. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1.Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. click Load into Projects. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog box. and click OK. 16 On the File menu. double-click 3D . 14 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. under Floor Plans. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. and click Yes. select m_WWF3. select Override parameter values of existing types. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. 11 In the Reload Family dialog box. 724 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. 17 Close any open files. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families.rvt. click Save. double-click Level 1.

you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes.Area Analysis 21 In this tutorial. Finally. 725 . You then create area plans for each scheme as needed.

In the Area Settings dialog box. select m2 Click OK. click Area Settings. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click Area Analysis. Click OK. select mm.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Open the c_Area. 3 Under Area. If you are using metric units. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. These schemes define spatial relationships. expand Views (all). click OK. For Rounding. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. right-click in the Design Bar. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. select Millimeters. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. under Length. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. For Unit Suffix. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. your values will be different.rvt file located in the Common folder. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. click Project Units. select 2 decimal places. expand Floor Plans. 726 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . 2 In the Project Units dialog box. select Square meters. For Unit Suffix. it is not necessary in this exercise. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. click Open. TIP If the Area Settings tab is not visible. there are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. In the final exercise. click the Training Files icon. 6 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu.

click Area Tag. If you select No. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. At Specified Height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. When you select Yes in this dialog box. Click OK. ■ At System Computed Height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level.7 In the Area Setting dialog box. you must manually add these boundary lines. the system-computed height defaults to the level. forming a closed loop. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. click the Room Calculations tab. 10 In the New Area Plan dialog box. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). 14 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. ■ 8 Click Cancel. Using Area Analysis Tools | 727 . notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). 13 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. ■ 11 When the informational dialog box displays. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. click Area Plan. Create a gross building area plan 9 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. or 0. 12 In the Project Browser. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. under Views (all).

A room tag measures the area enclosed within the exterior face of room-defining walls. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Add area boundary lines 19 On the Design Bar. click Area Boundary. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Click OK. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. 17 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Next. click Area Plan. and store area. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. 728 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . Expand Area Plans (Rentable). you create a new area plan for rentable space. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 18 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 15 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). common areas. 16 In the New Area Plan dialog box.

22 On the Design Bar. click . When you add area boundary lines. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected.20 On the Options Bar. If you do not select this option. 26 On the Options Bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 23 In the upper left corner of the building model. Using Area Analysis Tools | 729 . the area boundary lines do not update automatically. click Area Tag. When you pick the walls. you can either draw them or pick them. click Modify. 25 Select the area tag you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 21 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 24 On the Design Bar. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type.

31 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. click Modify and select the tag. 29 Add the tag to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 33 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 730 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . click . In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Office area for Area Type. Click OK. Select Building Common Area for Area Type.27 In the Element Properties dialog box. Click OK. click Area Tag. add a tag in the common area to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name.

enter Core for Name. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. Using Area Analysis Tools | 731 . 35 Add the last two area tags to the two areas on the right side of the building model. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Notice that within the two store areas.34 Add an area tag to the building model core. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.

you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. and click Save. 732 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . click to place it. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Create a color fill plan 1 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 37 Navigate to your preferred directory. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.36 On the File menu. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. In this exercise. name the project Area-in progress. and when the color legend displays. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. In the next exercise. click Color Fill.rvt. click Save.

6 In the Schedules Properties dialog box. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. under Category. 7 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities.3 When the dialog box displays. Using Area Analysis Tools | 733 . 8 Add the fields Area and Name. select Area Type and click Add. click the Fields tab. select Areas (Rentable). and click OK. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the New Schedule dialog box.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog box are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 734 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis .9 Click OK.

735 . you then need to update the building face. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. and roofs. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. After you make building elements. At any time. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. If you modify a massing face. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. floors.Massing 22 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. you can specify the view to display massing elements. or both. curtain systems. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. building elements. In this tutorial.

you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. click Create Mass. roofs. under Views (all). you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. on the Options Bar. and click 6 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. and cutting geometry. You assign the default wall.rvt file located in the Metric folder. the building model uses those element types to define the walls.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. click Lines. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 5 On the Sketch Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 Click OK in the Name dialog box to accept the default name Mass 1. click Open. and click Massing. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. sweeps. 736 | Chapter 22 Massing . floor. double-click Level 1. and floors. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Open the m_Massing_Start. click the Training Files icon.

on the Options Bar. and click OK. and click 16 On the Options Bar. click the Value for Material. click Finish Sketch. Create next extrusion form 13 In the Project Browser.7 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. 17 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. click Extrusion Properties. 19 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. click Lines. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. click . double-click Level 1. under Materials and Finishes. click the Value for Material. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Reference. 15 On the Sketch Design Bar. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. under Constraints. under Constraints. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. and click OK. 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. and then click . 18 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Extrusion Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the View toolbar. 11 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog box. Using Massing Tools | 737 . under Views (all). 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then click . click Finish Sketch. 14 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Materials dialog box.

highlight the larger form. Continue creation of next massing form 25 In the Project Browser. Sketch the blend base 31 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 28 In the drawing area. and click on the Options Bar. 27 In the Work Plane dialog box. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click West. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. The second form is on top of the first form. double-click {3D} to see the results. 738 | Chapter 22 Massing . TIP If necessary. 26 On the Design Bar. 30 On the Sketch Design Bar. select Pick a plane. under Views (all). and click OK. press TAB to highlight the entire face. click Lines. under Views (all). 29 Click to select the face.24 In the Project Browser.

TIP If you do not see this option. and click to select the line start point. Next. 39 On the Edit toolbar. 37 On the Design Bar. click . 33 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. click . The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. Using Massing Tools | 739 . click the arrow next to the drawing options. click Modify. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click . and delete the vertical construction line. 38 Select the arc and the horizontal line. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 36 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line.32 On the Options Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. 34 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown.

46 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 41 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. click Edit Top. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 49 In the Element Properties dialog box. 51 On the View toolbar. on the Options Bar. click 47 Create an arc as shown. 740 | Chapter 22 Massing . click .40 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. . 44 On the Design Bar. click 45 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click Finish Sketch. 50 On the Design Bar. double-click East. under Views (all). 48 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 43 In the Project Browser. Sketching the blend top 42 On the Design Bar. click Lines and. . click Blend Properties.

you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. under Views (all). In this exercise. under Floor Plans. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click and enter 15000 for Offset. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options bar.52 Proceed to the next exercise. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. Using Massing Tools | 741 . as shown. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. m_Massing_Start. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. In the next exercise. select the mass. 7 Using the same technique. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. click Ref Plane. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right.

15 Click OK. In this exercise. click Extrusion Properties. click and select Chain. click Save As. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. 742 | Chapter 22 Massing . and then click Hidden Line. on the View Control Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Mass. and 0 for Extrusion Start. 18 On the Mass Design Bar. snap the corners to the intersections. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box.When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click Void Form ➤  Void Extrusion. 17 On the View toolbar. on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. specify Mass (Transparent) for Material. When sketching each extrusion. 16 On the Design Bar. 20 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. 19 On the File menu. click Lines and. under Materials and Finishes.rvt. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 14 Under Constraints. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. click . 12 On the Design Bar. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. enter 12000 for Extrusion End.

you create new family types from a mass family file. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. under Other. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. and 18000 mm for Depth. enter 15000 mm for Width. click Family Types. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 743 . 10 On the File menu. and click Apply. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. Dataset ■ ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 9 Click OK. 12000 mm for Height.rfa.Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. 18000 mm for Height. 5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name.rfa. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. and 6000 mm for Depth. and click Apply. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. click the Training Files icon. Finally. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and click OK. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. 3 In the Name dialog box. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. click Save As. click New. and 9000 mm for Depth. and click Apply. In this exercise. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. click Open. 11000 mm for Height. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. Open Box. and click OK.

744 | Chapter 22 Massing .Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. You also load other existing mass families and place them. click Open. Open the m_Massing_In-place. 4 On the File menu.rfa.rfa family files. double-click Site. 6 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. 3 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). click Place Mass. 2 In the Project Browser.rfa. click the Training Files icon. 7 Open the Box-Training. under Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click the Training Files icon. Semi Barrel Vault. 9 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and Triangle. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Arc Dome. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 10 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown.rfa. 1 If not already selected. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

21 In the Type Selector. 15 In the Type Selector. click Modify. enter 90 for Angle. 26 In the drawing area. 24 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. and click OK twice. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. select the triangle. 12 Select the box. and click . and click OK twice. click Modify. click Modify. click Place Mass. 25 On the Design Bar. 19 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 22 On the Options Bar.11 On the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement. 18 Press CTRL. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 745 . and click . select the 3 boxes. 16 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. 13 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 23 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and click to place the mass. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 14 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK twice. In this exercise. 746 | Chapter 22 Massing . you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. click Place Mass. 34 On the View toolbar. you join these mass elements. 31 Place the box mass family as shown. In the next exercise. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 35 On the View menu. 30 In the Type Selector. click Orient ➤ Northeast. and click OK twice. 28 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 33 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter.27 Select the triangle. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. 29 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click . 32 Select the box and click . and click .

Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. click . 4 Select the triangle. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. . 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 747 . Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. NOTE When you join geometry. and then press ESC to see the result. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element.rvt file.

10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. 748 | Chapter 22 Massing . and snap to the midpoint of the edge. under Views (all). click for Axis. on the Edit toolbar. enter SM. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. click 8 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally.

17 Press ESC to see the result. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. click . Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 749 . and then select the triangle. In this exercise. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. . click 14 On the Tools toolbar.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. you joined mass elements together. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element.

4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. click Place Mass. under Views (all). 7 In the Type Selector. double-click Site. 10 On the Options Bar. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 5 In the Project Browser. click . and then click OK.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options.rvt. clear Curved. under Floor Plans. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. select Sloped (primary). select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. 750 | Chapter 22 Massing . 8 On the Options Bar. enter 90 degrees for Angle. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. click Modify. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 1 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Options toolbar. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. and select the triangle mass element. select Rotate after placement. 2 On the Window menu.

click . click Modify. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. 20 On the Design Bar. and click Wireframe. and click . under Views (all). and click OK twice. double-click North. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. and click Wireframe. 14 In the drawing area.13 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Project Browser. 24 On the View Control Bar. Using Mass Elements with Design Options | 751 . click Modify. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 21 In the drawing area. click . 18 In the Type Selector. under Elevations. select the three arc domes. and click . 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. 16 On the View Control Bar. and click OK twice.

select Curved from the Design Option menu. select Curved. under Option. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 29 In the Project Browser. 30 On the View menu. 36 On the File menu. clear Sloped.Create a Design Option set 26 Select the three arc domes and the two semi barrel vaults. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. 752 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Visibility/Graphics. click . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 35 Click Close and close the warning that displays. click the Design Options tab. you placed mass elements into Design Options. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. you can make it the primary option. double-click {3D}. click Make Primary. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options.rvt. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. under Views (all). select Curved and. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. click . and click OK. In this exercise. and click OK. 32 Click the value for Design Option. 27 On the Design Options toolbar.

click Open.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 2 On the View toolbar. 5 In the Type Selector. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). click . click Orient ➤ Southeast. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown.rvt file located in the Metric folder. select Basic Wall: Exterior . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 753 . double-click {3D}.Brick on CMU. you pick massing faces to create walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 3 On the View menu. Open the m_Massing_Building_Components. click Wall by Face. click to show the massing model. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU.

under Floor Plans. NOTE If a Warning dialog box is displayed. 754 | Chapter 22 Massing . 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 3. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. under Views (all). 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. under Views (all). 9 On the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 16 In the Type Selector. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. double-click Level 5. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. click Wall by Face.8 In the Project Browser. Click Wall by Face. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

you pick massing faces to create floors. In this exercise. 21 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 755 . and click Wireframe. 19 In the Project Browser. click . 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 9. under Views (all).18 Select all the faces shown in red. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. click Wall by Face. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. If desired. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping.

double-click {3D}. and Walls. select all levels. Curtain Systems. 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 6 On the Options Bar.rvt. and click OK. under Views (all). click Visibility/Graphics. 756 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Floor Area Faces. 2 On the View menu. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. 4 Click OK. clear Curtain Panels. 3 On the Model Categories tab.

and click OK. 9 Press CTRL. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 757 . select Levels 1-4. click Orient ➤ Northeast. click Floor Area Faces. 10 On the Options Bar.8 On the View menu. clear Exclude Options. 11 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown.

click Create Floors. 19 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. 15 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. double-click Level 1. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass.13 Press CTRL. 22 In the Project Browser. click . 18 On the Options Bar. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 21 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. under Views (all). double-click Mass Schedule. click Floor by Face. click Floor Area Faces. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Project Browser. 758 | Chapter 22 Massing . select Level 1. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. under Floor Plans.

rvt. you pick massing faces to create roofs. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. under Views (all). you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. double-click {3D}. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 759 . 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. click Roof by Face.

NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 11 On the View menu.4 In the Type Selector. select Basic Roof : Generic . and then click OK. Your model should now look as shown. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. click Create Roof. Curtain Systems. 760 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Visibility/Graphics. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 9 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof.400mm. select Curtain Panels. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. click Create Roof. and Walls.

click Curtain System by Face. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 761 . you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 3 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces.In this exercise. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. under Views (all). 5 Press CTRL. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

6 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. 762 | Chapter 22 Massing .

you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces.8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 763 . click Create System. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. 9 On the Options Bar. In this exercise. select the blended form on the in-place mass.

click Visibility/Graphics. Next. and click OK. and Walls. Curtain Systems. Floors. double-click Site. click OK. 764 | Chapter 22 Massing . 7 Enter Larger Size for Name.rvt. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. clear Curtain Panels. 3 On the Model Categories tab. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . and click OK. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Views (all). click Edit/New. 2 On the View menu. and then click OK.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Duplicate. enter 30000 for Width. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. Roofs.

11 On the Options Bar. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown.10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 765 . clear Exclude Options.

double-click Level 1. 19 On the View toolbar. TIP To select the curtain wall. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 15 In the Project Browser. 766 | Chapter 22 Massing . Also. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. under Floor Plans. click Remake. 17 On the Options Bar. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. you want to select the smaller one. under Views (all).The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. click . 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog box. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. click OK. In the next steps.

21 On the Options Bar. click Remake. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 767 . 20 Select the roof as shown.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. you will notice that Revit Building resized the floors.

Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. you changed the size of an existing mass family. 1 Open the 3D view. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. The 3D view now shows only the building shell.rvt. and click Remake. 768 | Chapter 22 Massing .22 Select the arc dome curtain system. In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.

3 In the Project Browser. If desired. You might create the model shown.Massing only. such as columns and an extruded roof. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 769 . 5 On the View menu. 9 Select Mass. and click OK. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. 8 Click None to clear the selection. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. This concludes the massing tutorial. 6 On the Model Categories tab.Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. click Visibility/Graphics. to the building shell. and click Duplicate. click All to select all categories. 4 Rename the view 3D . In this exercise. right-click on the 3D view. 7 Clear one of the check boxes.

770 | Chapter 22 Massing .

you use the site tools in Autodesk Revit Building to add and modify site components within a project.Site 23 In this tutorial. 771 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. In the second part of this exercise.Using Site Tools In this lesson. In the final exercises. This project file was created using the default metric template. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. 772 | Chapter 23 Site . 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you add a building pad to the site. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. convert the data to a table. Using the first method. and click Site. click the Training Files icon. you create a toposurface using two different methods. You add property lines manually. and double-click Site. 3 On the Design Bar. click Open. Open the m_First_Project. and then modify the data. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. islands. right-click in the Design Bar. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. 4 On the Options Bar. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. click Point. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. and walkways. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. click Toposurface.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point.

8 On the Options Bar. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Using Site Tools | 773 . TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm.6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. Use the following illustration as a reference. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.

14 On the View toolbar. click . This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 12 On the Settings menu. under Increment. enter 1500 mm. under Additional Contours. click Finish Surface. 15 On the View Control Bar.10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. 12000 mm. 11 On the Design Bar. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. click Site Settings. 15000 mm. click Model Graphics Style. 13 In the Site Settings dialog box. 774 | Chapter 23 Site . Use the following illustration as a reference. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. and click Shading with Edges. and click OK.

select Current view only and choose Select for Layers.16 On the View toolbar. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 18 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. DXF. 25 On the File menu. select Preserve colors. click Modify. 24 In the Project Browser. Until it is exploded. click Yes. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click the elevation value. modify the level names and elevations. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. and double-click South. click Modify. Under Import or Link. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER. 29 Select the imported topography. it is considered an import symbol. under Views (all). Using Site Tools | 775 . and click OK. enter 1000 mm. click to delete it. Click Open. 21 Click the Level 2 text. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog box. on the Standard toolbar. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. double-click Site. 26 In the Import/Link dialog box: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 28 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 23 Click the Level 1 text. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. under Views (all). SAT. rename the level Base Site Elevation. click the Training Files icon. Before importing the contour data. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. DGN. rename the level Basement. 19 On the Design Bar. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. Under Layer/Level Colors.

776 | Chapter 23 Site . 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. clear C_INDX. 36 On the Design Bar. click Toposurface. 32 On the View menu. 31 On the Design Bar. select it. click Pin Position. when the edges highlight. click Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 34 Under Visibility. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. and click OK. and then click OK. clear Elevations. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points.30 On the Edit menu. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click the Annotations Categories tab. When you select the import symbol. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog box.

42 On the View toolbar. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 43 On the File menu. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Property Lines In this exercise.rvt. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 40 On the View toolbar. this project file is required in its current state. you add property lines using two methods. click . click Finish Surface. and click Save. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. name the project Site-in progress. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Using Site Tools | 777 . Using the first method. Using the second method. click Save As. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. Adding Property Lines. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings.39 On the Design Bar.

sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. Site-in progress. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Property Line. and click OK. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. add an arc line on the right. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. On the Design Bar. If you have not completed the previous exercise.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. under Floor Plans. Click Modify. Although you can use your preferred sketching method.rvt. click Lines. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. Using the 3-point Arc tool. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 778 | Chapter 23 Site . select Create property lines by sketching. double-click Site. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. do so before continuing. Select and delete the right vertical line.

informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. when they highlight. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. A warning dialog box is displayed. select Edit Table. on the Standard toolbar. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. 8 On the Options Bar. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog box depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. to delete them.7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 14 In the Property Lines dialog box. click OK. select the lines. click 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 15 Starting in Row #1. click Property Line. 10 In the Property Lines dialog box. 9 In the warning dialog box. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Using Site Tools | 779 . click OK.

29 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 27 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 19 In the Tags dialog box. open the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Annotations folder. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 23 In the Tags dialog box. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 780 | Chapter 23 Site . 31 On the View Control Bar.rfa and click Open. 20 Click Load. click to place it. 22 Select M_Property Line Tag. right-click in the Design Bar. This means there is no gap in the property lines.Notice that after you complete the last line. 30 Tag the three remaining property lines. Before adding property line segment tags. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. clear Leader. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 24 On the View menu. click Tag. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. click the Imported Categories tab. click Training Files. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. If the gap is not closed. and open the folder. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 28 On the Options Bar. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. click to place the property lines. and click Drafting. 26 Under Visibility. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments.dwg and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Shading with Edges. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. click Model Graphics Style. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. and click OK. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. The tags display more prominently in this view. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 16 Click OK.

you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In this exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog box. Using Site Tools | 781 . In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK.rvt. this project file is required in its current state. click Save. click New. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings. click Object Styles. Site-in progress. In the final step. 2 On the Settings menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. and click Wireframe. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog box. you created two sets of property lines. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. enter the name Working Contour. verify that it is a subcategory of Topography. click Model Graphics Style. In the next exercise.32 On the File menu. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography.

782 | Chapter 23 Site . You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. select Working Contour. select a shade of Brown. 9 In the Site Settings dialog box. click Site Settings. Working Contour.6 In the Object Styles dialog box. 10 Under Additional Contours. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. The object style subcategory. 11 Click OK. Under Range Type. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. In this exercise. Under Line Pattern. Under Subcategory. enter 1000. 7 Click OK. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. click Close. select Single Value. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. select Dash dot. Under Line Color.0 mm. Creating Topographic Subregions. The next exercise requires a new dataset. under Contour Line Display. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. 12 On the File menu.

3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. NOTE In the Metric dataset. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. you create subregions in order to define roads. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. click Lines. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt file located in the Metric folder.In the next exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. click Open. and islands. you create topographic subregions to define roads. Open the m_Site. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. Using Site Tools | 783 . parking areas. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and islands. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. Although the exact dimensions are not important. click Subregion. try to replicate the location and proportion. parking areas. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. such as material.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Parking for Name. under Identity Data. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. 9 On the View menu. click the Value for Material. and click OK. click Shading with Edges. and click OK. and double-click Topography Schedule. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. click Properties. expand Schedules/Quantities. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. 784 | Chapter 23 Site . You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. When you finish the sketch in a later step.Tarmacadam. click Finish Sketch. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. 6 In the Materials dialog box. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. under Materials and Finishes. select Site . 8 On the Design Bar.Tarmacadam for Name.

NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click Lines. under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style. Within each subregion. Using Site Tools | 785 . 18 In the Project Browser. and click Shading with Edges. under Floor Plans. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. 16 On the Design Bar. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. click Edit Boundary. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Site. As you create new subregions. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. Notice that the project area has increased. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. double-click Topography Schedule. they display within this schedule. Delete overlapping lines. In this training project. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. 20 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. 22 In the upper-right parking area. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. and click Hidden Line. 17 On the View Control Bar. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. under Floor Plans. 21 On the Design Bar. click Subregion.

Grass for Name.Grass.23 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. and apply the material Site . and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. 29 In the Project Browser.Grass. 25 In the Materials dialog box. You must sketch each region separately. double-click Topography Schedule. double-click Site. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box.Grass for Name. 786 | Chapter 23 Site . click Properties. under Materials and Finishes. enter Island . 28 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Identity Data. and click OK. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. click Finish Sketch. Name each region Island . select Site . 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. click the Value for Material. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar.

double-click Topography Schedule. WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. and apply the material Concrete . double-click Site. click Subregion.30 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Name the subregion Walkway.walkway. 33 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Using Site Tools | 787 . so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. 35 On the Design Bar.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . Notice that the schedule has been updated. 32 On the Design Bar. Add the concrete walkway 31 In the Project Browser. 34 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. under Schedules/Quantities. click Lines.

rvt. Notice that the schedule has been updated. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area.NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. double-click Topography Schedule. 36 In the Project Browser. there is still only one toposurface. Site tutorial-in progress. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. this project file is required in its current state. Grading the Toposurface. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 38 Navigate to your preferred folder.rvt. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 788 | Chapter 23 Site . 37 On the File menu. under Schedules/Quantities. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. When you use the grading tool. click Save As. and click Save.

under Floor Plans. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Graded Region. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. and click OK. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. and click Select and Edit. Using Phasing. click Modify. see the tutorial. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 6 On the Design Bar. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. select Copy Internal Points. under Phasing. 5 On the Design Bar. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. select Existing for Phase Created. 8 Select the topographic surface. 3 On the Options Bar. A warning dialog box is displayed. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface.Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. click . double-click Site. 7 In the Graded Region dialog box. Using Site Tools | 789 . 2 Select the toposurface.

Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. and new. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 10 Press DELETE. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 790 | Chapter 23 Site . demolished.

specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. Using Site Tools | 791 . 15 On the Options Bar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. and click Hidden Line. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. click Point. 13 Press DELETE.11 On the View Control Bar. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration.

The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. 18 On the View toolbar. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. click View Properties. click Finish Surface. click . 20 On the View toolbar. 792 | Chapter 23 Site . Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. and click Shading with Edges. click . The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat.

A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. 3 On the Design Bar. When you add a building pad. specify Existing for Phase. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. double-click Site. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. click View Properties. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.22 In the Element Properties dialog box. Using Site Tools | 793 . The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. Only the graded topography displays. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view.rvt. and delete it. Therefore. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. under Phasing. this project file is required in its current state. click Pad. 24 On the View menu. you create a building pad. Site tutorial-in progress. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. If you have an existing building model. click Save. only the original toposurface displays. Adding a Building Pad. under Floor Plans. specify New Construction for Phase. 23 Select the toposurface. and click OK. 4 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Lines. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click OK. NOTE By default. under Phasing. 26 On the File menu. you can delete it. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. the Pick Walls command is active.

click Model Graphics Style. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 6 On the View Control Bar. 7 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. and click Shading with Edges. . . click pad.5 On the Design Bar. Notice the new building 794 | Chapter 23 Site . click 8 On the View toolbar.

click Modify. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. under Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Adding Site Components In this exercise.9 On the File menu. click Save. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Using Site Tools | 795 . Site tutorial-in progress. double-click Site. Adding Site Components. 5 On the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. you add parking and planting components to the site surface.rvt. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.90 deg. click Parking Component. and select the parking space.

double-click Site. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. under Floor Plans. click 9 On the View toolbar.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. choose any tree type. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the View toolbar. click Site Component. Notice the new parking Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. 796 | Chapter 23 Site . . TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. click spaces. . 12 In the Type Selector.

14 On the View toolbar. click . Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click . Using Site Tools | 797 .13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 15 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components. In the following illustration. In the following exercise. double-click Site. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 798 | Chapter 23 Site . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. 16 On the File menu. 5 On the View menu. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. click Apply. and click Apply.rvt. Site tutorial-in progress. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. and click OK. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. click Save. click Hidden Line.NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. this project file is required in its current state. click Tag All Not Tagged.

5 Under Available fields.NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. select Mark. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. The parking schedule is displayed. and under Heading. select Type. 6 Click the Formatting tab. enter Size. click Save. Using Site Tools | 799 . 8 Under Fields. and click OK. and click Add. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. If necessary. click the Fields tab. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. enter Space. 7 Under Fields. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Under Available fields. and click OK. select Type. 7 On the File menu. Creating Parking Space Schedules. you create a parking schedule.rvt. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. Site tutorial-in progress. select Mark. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and under Heading. this project file is required in its current state. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Parking for Category.

13 In the Parking Schedule. 10 In the Project Browser. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. 14 In the Parking Schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 11 On the Window menu. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically.9 On the Window menu. double-click Site. under Space. 800 | Chapter 23 Site . number the first three spaces consecutively. click Save. under Space. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 12 In the Site plan. under Views (all). 15 On the File menu. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. click Tile. click Close Hidden Windows. under Floor Plans.

By grouping objects. you also simplify the modification process. and then you create a group for a typical toilet room that is nested within the guest room group.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Autodesk Revit Building. you create a model group for a typical hotel guest room. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. For example. you not only simplify their placement. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. 801 . Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. place. In this tutorial. and modify repetitive units. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. You can also nest groups within other groups. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. or with those working on a different project. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. all instances in the building model are updated. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications.

you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. and two nightstands. expand Groups. 7 Right-click Group 1. Open the m_Grouping. click Save As. 8 Enter Typical guest room. Placing a Group. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes.rvt. chair. you create a model group for a typical hotel room. 2 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. name the file Grouping-in progress. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity.Creating Groups In this lesson. 3 Draw a rectangle around the populated room. expand Floor Plans. 802 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and expand Model. 9 On the File menu. The view is zoomed in to the selected room. click Open. Creating a Group In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. You zoom in so that you can select objects in the room accurately. Specify a view 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 2. classrooms. Create a group from drawing objects 4 Press and hold CTRL. and typical office layouts. After you create a model group. and press ENTER. 5 On the Edit toolbar.rvt file located in the Metric folder. desk. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include hotel rooms. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. and click Rename. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Views (all). and click Save. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click . and select the bed. 10 Navigate to your preferred directory.

using an adjacent wall as the axis of reflection. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 Drag the group origin to the wall intersection directly below the entry door. select Typical guest room and drag it to the room below the original instance of the group. 4 Snap the origin to the wall intersection below the entry door. 5 On the Options Bar. as shown. You also mirror an existing instance of a group. Mirror a group 6 In the drawing area. select the original instance of the group.rvt. Drag a group into position 3 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Edit toolbar. you use drag and drop functionality to place a new instance of a group in the floor plan. A second instance of the group is added to the drawing. Creating Groups | 803 . Modify the origin of a group 1 In the drawing area. 8 Select the wall abutted by the desk and tub of the original instance as the axis of reflection. click Finish. select the group.Placing a Group In this exercise. click . Grouping-in progress.

select the mirrored instance of the Typical guest room group. Modifying a Group In this exercise. you make changes to a single instance of a group. 9 On the File menu. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. 1 In the drawing area. click Save. When you finish the editing routine. click Edit Group. Grouping-in progress. as shown. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.You should now have three instances of the Typical guest room group in your model: two with the original orientation and one mirrored. Modifying a Group.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. 804 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

The edge of the desk is aligned with the exterior wall. This ensures that the modifications are propagated when each new instance of the host group is added to the building model and also when each stand-alone instance of the nested group is added. Creating Nested Groups | 805 . click Save. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click Finish Group. 3 Press and hold CTRL. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. click . and select the desk and chair. When you make changes to a nested group. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Creating Nested Groups In this lesson. and is contained in every new instance of the host group that you place in the building model. 7 On the Design Bar. All instances of the Typical guest room are updated to reflect the change. Creating Nested Groups. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 6 Click the exterior wall as the move end point. 5 Click near the left edge of the desk as the move start point. the host group is also updated. 8 On the File menu.The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. you create a group that you add to a previously created group.

which acts as the host. 2 On the Edit toolbar. The new group is then nested within the original group. When you nest the toilet room in the guest room. Create a group 1 In the original instance of the Typical guest room group. and the wall separating the bathroom and closet. and press ENTER. 3 In the Project Browser. 4 Enter Typical toilet room. 6 Drag the origin of the group to the intersection of the corridor wall and the guest room wall nearest the tub. right-click Group 1. select all the elements that make up the toilet room and closet. and click Rename. Grouping-in progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson.Creating a Nested Group In this exercise. Change the origin of a group 5 Select the original instance of Typical guest room. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. click . 806 | Chapter 24 Grouping . you create a group for a toilet room that you add to the guest room group. expand Model.rvt. In the selection. expand Groups. make sure you also include both doors and their host walls.

Modifying a Nested Group. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. click Component. The elements of the group are grayed out in every instance. 11 On the Design Bar. everything else is available for selection. and all instances are updated to include the nested group. Add a component to the model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying a Nested Group In this exercise. 3 In the drawing area.Create a nested group 7 On the Options Bar.rvt. When you edit the group to add the component. Because the modified group is nested. you add a component to a single instance of the nested toilet room group. 12 On the File menu. click Save. 10 In the drawing area. verify that Multiple is clear. click Edit Group. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. all instances of the nested group are updated in the building model. click Add To Group. the host group is also updated so that new instances of either group contain the new component. select m_Pedestal_Sink-3D. place the cursor over one of the toilet rooms and press the spacebar three times to rotate the sink to the orientation shown. The Typical toilet room group is nested in the Typical guest room group. Creating Nested Groups | 807 . Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Finish Group. Grouping-in progress. select the Typical toilet room group.

7 Press TAB. 10 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Edit Group. select the sink. click Add To Group. 808 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and select the nested toilet room group.4 Place the sink on the wall with the toilet in any instance of the Typical toilet room. 11 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. Edit a nested group 6 Move the cursor over the same instance of the toilet room group in which you placed the sink. 9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Group.

When you load the group from the library into a new project. You then customize the new group for use in the current building model. and click Duplicate. After you finish the modified group. and click Rename. because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. 12 On the File menu. 2 Right-click Typical guest room 2. Working with Groups | 809 . Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. You create a group based on an existing group by using the Duplicate command. 13 Proceed to the next lesson.rvt. and press ENTER. you use the Duplicate command to create a group based on an existing group. You use functionality that allows you to not only fix inconsistencies among instances of a group. Lastly. under Groups. You also create a detail group in the level 2 floor plan that you add to the building model in a different floor plan view. you draw an axis of reflection at the midpoint of the building model so that the group is mirrored from its location at the top of the building model to a location at the bottom. Use Project Browser to duplicate a group 1 In the Project Browser. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. You then place the new group in the building model. you add door tags to a group. In subsequent exercises. you save it to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. click Save. and then save the tags as an attached detail group. Working with Groups. 3 Enter Corner guest room. and customize it so that it fits in the available space and has the correct group nested within it. but automatically create a new group as part of the process to fix the group. Working with Groups In this lesson. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. having created a group that represents a typical layout. Grouping-in progress. right-click Typical guest room. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups.All instances of the nested group are updated with the change. Duplicating a Group In this exercise. A new group definition (Typical guest room 2) is displayed in the Project Browser.

5 Click at the upper-right corner of the room. 12 Move the desk and chair so that they are within the room. click OK. This is because the corner room is smaller than the interior rooms. Notice that the desk overlaps the exterior wall. Edit a duplicated group 8 In the drawing area. select Corner toilet room. 15 On the Design Bar. click . Nest a group 17 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and select the desk and chair. 10 Press and hold CTRL. to specify the group origin. click Finish. click Finish Group. select the Corner guest room group.Place a duplicated group 4 Drag Corner guest room from the Project Browser to the vacant room in the northwest corner of the building. and press DELETE. click Remove From Group. and drag it into the corner guest room. 14 Select the toilet room. 7 After a warning message displays. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. where the corridor wall and the exterior wall intersect. 6 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the same toilet room group. 810 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

staying perpendicular to the corridor wall. click Finish to finish placing the group. 27 Click the midpoint of the corridor wall as the start point of the axis of reflection as shown. 19 In the drawing area. 25 On the Edit toolbar.Use the inside corner of the exterior wall and the corridor wall as the origin of the group. 20 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. for Axis. 23 On the Design Bar. TIP To help find the midpoint of the wall. Mirror along a drawn axis of reflection 24 In the drawing area. click . select the Corner toilet room group. Creating a Detail Group. click Add To Group. past the exterior wall. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 In the drawing area. select the Corner guest room group. 28 Drag the cursor to the left. click Finish Group. select the Corner guest room group. TIP If a warning appears indicating that there are errors that cannot be ignored. A new instance of the Corner guest room group is added to the southwest corner of the building model. 18 On the Options Bar. click Save. 29 On the File menu. and click to specify the end point. 21 On the Design Bar. enter SM on your keyboard to limit snaps to midpoints. click 26 On the Options Bar. click Unjoin Elements to resolve the errors. Working with Groups | 811 .

Grouping-in progress. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. 2 On the Options Bar. and select a point on the interior of the vertical wall. 10 Enter Tile. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click Filled Region.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. click to add an arc leader. 3 Click the lower-left endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Text. click Finish Sketch. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. and click Modify on the Design Bar. Add a text note 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 7 On the Options Bar. click to draw a rectangular region. 812 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 9 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 8 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Draw a filled region 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor down and to the right.

14 Right-click Group 1. Modify a group origin 16 In the drawing area. 13 In the Project Browser.Create a detail group 11 Press and hold CTRL. click Save. double-click Level 2. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 3 On the Options Bar. 19 Drag an instance of the Elevator lobby tile group from the Project Browser into the level 3 view. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Because the detail group contains variables. 15 Enter Elevator lobby tile. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 20 On the File menu. and click Rename. double-click Level 3. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Using Attached Detail Groups. as shown. you add door tags to the Typical toilet room group. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. as shown. Working with Groups | 813 . Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. clear Leader. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER. Grouping-in progress. 12 On the Edit toolbar. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 18 In the Project Browser. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. you must manually attach it to each instance of the Typical toilet room group. expand Groups. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. and expand Detail. under Floor Plans. and select the note and the filled region. 4 Place two door tags in the original instance of the Typical toilet room. click . click Tag.rvt.

9 Right-click Group 1.5 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 12 On the Options Bar. A warning dialog box is displayed. click . informing you that an attached detail group has been created for the Typical toilet room group. 13 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog box. and click OK. The new instance of the attached detail group is added at the same relative position and orientation as in the original instance of the model group. and select the two door tags. (this group is just below the original instance of the Typical guest room group). press and hold CTRL. Place a detail group in another group instance 11 Move the cursor over the Typical toilet room group. 7 On the Edit toolbar. press TAB. and expand Typical toilet room. expand Groups. 814 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and click Rename. click Place Detail. 8 In the Project Browser. expand Attached Detail. 10 Enter Door tags. click Modify. select Door tags. and select the nested Typical toilet room group.

Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 10 On the Options Bar. and click Open. drag it into the drawing area. Saving and Loading Groups. navigate to the directory where you saved the group. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 In the drawing area. click OK. click OK. 5 In the New Project dialog box. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog box. click Save to Library ➤ Save Group. click Browse. 2 In the Save Group dialog box. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. click the Training Files icon. click New ➤ Project. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. click to specify the start point of the square. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. expand Groups. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. click Wall. 6 On the File menu. select Typical toilet room for Group To Save. ■ ■ ■ In the New Project dialog box. Select the m_Tutorial_Default. 13 Select Typical toilet room. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. 3 Click Save. as shown. Working with Groups | 815 . and place it in the upper-right corner of the square. Grouping-in progress. click to draw a square.rte file located in the Metric folder. select Typical toilet room.rvg. 14 On the File menu. Sketch walls 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. click Save. and then drag the cursor so that all the walls in the square are 6000 mm long.rvt. NOTE Groups containing nested groups cannot be saved. under Template file. Save a group to a library 1 On the File menu. and click Open. click Load from Library ➤ Load Group. and expand Model. therefore. 7 In the Load Group dialog box. Place an instance of the loaded group 12 In the Project Browser.

you mirror the instance of the Typical toilet room group you added to the new project in the previous exercise. The toilet and the tub are wall-hosted components whose hosts are not part of the group. the software gives you the option of fixing the inconsistency by creating a new group. 1 In the drawing area. Because one of the wall-hosted components in the group does not have a wall in the mirrored group. 2 On the Edit toolbar. select the instance of Typical toilet room. 14 On the Options Bar. click Finish. click . so it is important to place the group accurately in order to use the walls you sketched. except for the wall-hosted component for which there is no wall. 816 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 On the File menu. The Typical toilet room model group is added to the new project. 16 Enter Loaded_Group for File name. The new group is created automatically and contains the same components as the existing group. 3 Select the wall shared by the toilet and the sink as the axis of reflection. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Save. Loaded_Group. Automatically Creating a Group In this exercise. Automatically Creating a Group.IMPORTANT Be sure to line up the outline of the group with the exterior surface of the walls. click Save.

click Close. and a new group (Typical toilet room 2) is created. Working with Groups | 817 . Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. a warning dialog box is displayed. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the warning dialog box. click Fix Groups. 5 In the Fix Inconsistent Groups dialog box. and click OK.Because there is no wall to host the tub in the mirrored instance. click Modify. The tub component is not included in the new group because there is no wall to host it. click Create new group types. 7 On the File menu. The Typical toilet room model group is mirrored.

818 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

In the final lesson. After completing level 1. You begin by adding the structural walls.Structural 25 In this tutorial. you use the structural tools in Autodesk Revit Building to create a building model skeleton. columns. and beams to Level 1. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. 819 .

you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 820 | Chapter 25 Structural . click the Training Files icon. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. Open the m_Structural. click Open.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan.

and double-click Level 2. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. Select All for Layers. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. to trace the initial set of structural walls. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. and select Origin to origin. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Link (instead of import). 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. select Automatically place.dwg from the Metric folder. DXF. 2 On the File menu. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. Select Current view only. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. In this exercise. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. under Import or Link. Sketching Structural Walls. DGN. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (all). 8 On the File menu. you imported a DWG file. 7 Click Open. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog box. This file is used in the next exercise. 6 Under Positioning. click Save As. Adding Structural Walls | 821 . If necessary.rvt. expand Floor Plans. select Invert colors. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. 4 In the Import/Link dialog box.Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. After you trace the walls. SAT. go to the Project Browser. and select m_wall-import.

4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. and click Structural. rather than the height. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. click Structural Wall. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the Structural tab already displays on the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. proceed to Step 2. First. select Basic Wall: Generic . 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. In addition. you can add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 822 | Chapter 25 Structural . Right-click the Design Bar.200mm.

you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. and click to specify the wall endpoint. In the steps that follow. Specify Level 1. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Depth. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. and click the next line intersection. 9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. Click . Adding Structural Walls | 823 .6 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain.

in the View toolbar. and double-click Level 2.11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. expand Views (all). you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking the 3D view. 13 On the View toolbar. and click to complete the chain of walls. click Modify to finish the sketch. 12 On the Design Bar. Use the tools to modify 14 In the Project Browser. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. click . TIP If necessary. 824 | Chapter 25 Structural . expand Floor Plans.

click Modify to end the wall chain. 19 On the View toolbar. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. Adding Structural Walls | 825 . Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. you may want to zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C.16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. click . ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. click Structural Wall. ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar.

28 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Click to create a three-point arc. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. 23 Under Visibility. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. This is the left extent of the arc. ■ 27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. 26 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain.200mm. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. click Visibility/Graphics. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. click .Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click the Imported Categories tab. 21 On the View menu. and click OK. This is the right extent of the arc.dwg. 826 | Chapter 25 Structural . double-click Level 2. 25 In the Type Selector. click Structural Wall. clear m_wall-import. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall.

click the value. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. 32 On the Design Bar. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. and press ENTER. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. enter 1500.29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. If it is not. Adding Structural Walls | 827 . click Modify.

34 Select the lower horizontal wall. enter 1500. In the steps that follow. 35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. clear Chain. Both walls are 1200 mm long. you create the final structural walls for the project. 36 On the Design Bar. 828 | Chapter 25 Structural . click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. and press ENTER. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint shown in the illustration below. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C.

click Modify. 39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown.38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. Adding Structural Walls | 829 . click . 40 On the Design Bar. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. 41 On the View toolbar.

You then make minor modifications to their position. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. In this exercise. double-click Level 2. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. in its current state. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 830 | Chapter 25 Structural .rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls.42 On the File menu. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. This project file is required. click Dimension. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. click Save. In the next exercise. Structural_tutorial.

and click to place the dimension as shown. click Modify. Select Entire Walls for Pick.4 On the Options Bar. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. select it. click Options to specify the wall pick options. On the Options Bar. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. Adding Structural Walls | 831 . 8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. select Intersecting Walls. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. the Options button becomes available. 6 Move the cursor to the left. and when it highlights. ■ ■ 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. After you select Entire Walls.

Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. 11 Click the temporary dimension value. 832 | Chapter 25 Structural .

to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. In the next lesson. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant.Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. joists. 13 On the File menu. This project file is required. 12 On the Edit menu. several different beam types. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. Adding Structural Columns and Beams. click Undo Edit dimension length. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 833 . in its current state. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. click Save. In this exercise. you add structural columns.

select Height. 2 On the View menu. and Level 2. 4 In the Type Selector. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. zoom in to place the column. 5 On the Options Bar. Structural_tutorial. you use the grid intersection tool. under Floor Plans. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. and you place a column outside of the grids.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. double-click Level 1. 834 | Chapter 25 Structural . click Structural Column. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. TIP When adding the column. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. If necessary. In addition.

specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. and C5. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. and select grids 1-5. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 835 . and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. and A. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids.7 Add similar columns to C2. 9 Use a crossing selection. TIP To create the crossing selection. click Grid Intersection. C3.

Columns A3-5 are shown below. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. 836 | Chapter 25 Structural . 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. click Finish. zoom out until you can see all the grids. 15 On the Options Bar. This completes this set of columns.10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. 14 If necessary. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A.

the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. click Finish. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. B3-5 are shown below. 19 On the Options Bar. click Modify. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. click Modify. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. 24 On the Design Bar. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. 20 On the Design Bar. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. click Grid Intersection. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 837 . Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. click Structural Column.Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar.

In the next exercise. click Save. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. 26 On the File menu. expand Floor Plans. click Beam. double-click Level 2. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Structural Beams and Girders. you learn how to work with these varied conditions.25 On the View toolbar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. you used various methods to add structural columns. This project file is required. As you use the beam tool. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. expand Views (all). Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. in its current state. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. you add beams manually. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 838 | Chapter 25 Structural . In this exercise. click . 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Start the beam at the column and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you add structural beams to the building model. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. Structural_tutorial. 2 On the View menu. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR.

Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 839 .7 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.7. and then move the cursor up to grid A. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. click Modify. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. select Girder for Usage. 11 On the Options Bar. click Beam. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 10 In the Type Selector.

840 | Chapter 25 Structural . 14 On the Options Bar. click Grid. Use the following table for other conditions. For example. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder.Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. if a beam is joined column-to-column. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. Column Brace Ho o tal riz n Bracing Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. When you use the grid tool to place beams. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2.

click the temporary dimension value. 23 On the Options Bar.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. 22 In the Type Selector. and select grid C. click Beam. 24 Select grid 3. 17 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. click Grid. click Modify. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 841 . click Finish. press and hold CTRL. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. enter 8200. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 21 On the Design Bar. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4.

Press ESC to end the chain. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids.Notice beams are added between columns. Click column B5 to add the first beam. and for Usage. 842 | Chapter 25 Structural . ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. select Girder for Usage. select Chain. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. In addition. select Girder. 25 On the Options Bar. click Finish.

click Grid. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. SI. to snap only to intersections. 30 On the Options Bar. Press ESC to end the chain. 34 On the Options Bar. You can also use the shortcut key. select Girder for Usage.29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. click Finish. Press ESC to end the chain. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 843 . Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. 33 Select grid A. connecting the column at B4.

7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly.7 beam had crossed grid A. 38 On the Options Bar. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. 844 | Chapter 25 Structural . 39 On the View toolbar.The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. If the W310x32. click . 37 Select grid B. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. click Grid. 36 On the Options Bar. click Finish.

Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 845 . 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm.Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. 43 In the Type Selector. click Beam. 46 Move the cursor to the right. 48 On the View toolbar. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. In the steps that follow. select Girder for Usage. 47 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . 44 On the Options Bar. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). 45 Specify the beam start point at the centerline and endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grids 4 and 5.

846 | Chapter 25 Structural . double-click Level 2. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall and grid A. 52 In the Type Selector. for Usage. click Beam. select Girder. and click when it intersects grid 2. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. and select Chain. In the steps that follow.Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. 53 On the Options Bar. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall centerline and grid 3.

and click when it intersects grid 1.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. 57 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 847 . click . Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode.

Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. Adding Joists and Purlins. you add joists. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. You then create a joist array. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Structural_tutorial. under Families. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.B3 quadrants. M_W-Wide Flange. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. 2 Zoom around the A1 . In this exercise.7. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists.58 On the File menu. you replace some of the existing girders with trusses. 848 | Chapter 25 Structural . to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 4 In the Project Browser. and purlins to the building model. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid 1. In the next exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. For example. click Save. 5 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. double-click Level 2. You also add joists and purlins to the building model. in its current state. click W310x32. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. Structural Framing. This project file is required. click Beam.

7 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. click Array.6 On the Design Bar. according to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. Create a joist array 11 On the Edit menu. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. notice that the Structural Usage parameter value is Joist. 10 Click OK. the Automatic option was selected by default in the Options Bar. click on the Options Bar. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. 8 With the beam selected. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. click Modify. In addition. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 849 .

Clear Group and Associate. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. enter 1250 and press ENTER. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A.12 On the Options Bar. Once the direction is set. Select 2nd for Move to. 13 Enter SI to snap only to intersections. Enter 14 for Number. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 850 | Chapter 25 Structural . This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A.

Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 17 Add a W310x32. click Beam. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 851 . 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin.7 beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown.

22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown. and color within the Object Styles dialog box. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. click Array. 20 On the Edit menu. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. Clear Group and Associate. 21 On the Options Bar. joists. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . style. and purlins. Enter 7 for Number. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage value. Select 2nd for Move to. 852 | Chapter 25 Structural . 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. and click. This is the array start point.

and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. click . 25 On the Options Bar. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. 27 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 853 .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. and click OK. clear all options except Structural Framing. 26 In the Filter dialog box. click .

click Modify. 30 On the View toolbar. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. click . click Save. and notice the connection symbols display. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels.28 In the Element Properties dialog box. in its current state. 29 On the Design Bar. 31 On the File menu. you create new levels. In this exercise. This project file is required. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 854 | Chapter 25 Structural . In the next lesson. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select Moment Connection Last Select Moment Connection First Click OK. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions.

3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. select Make Plan View. 2 Select grid 1.Defining New Levels In this exercise. click Level. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Structural_tutorial. and double-click Building Elevation. You need at least 3 meters of space. under Views (all). 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Elevations. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. Click to add Level 3. you create several new levels. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 855 .

in its current state. 8 On the File menu. click Save. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. Structural_tutorial. you created three new levels. click . These levels that are required in the next exercise. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. 856 | Chapter 25 Structural . In this exercise. This project file is required. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels.In the Project Browser. Each level is 3000 mm high. Duplicating the Existing Design.

and select Levels 3 and 4. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 857 . click Modify. Make sure the entire building model is included. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Design Bar. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. 7 In the Select Levels dialog box. click Modify. 6 In the Select Levels dialog box. click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. press and hold CTRL.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Copy to Clipboard. 3 On the Edit menu. select Level 2. 5 On the Edit menu.

click Save. you create a framing elevation. in its current state. double-click Building Elevation. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. This project file is required. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. 10 On the File menu. In the next lesson. In this exercise. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. 858 | Chapter 25 Structural . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson.9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. You copied the Level 1 structure elements and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.

2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. You can now view the new elevation. and click.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. make sure Attach to Grid is selected. double-click Level 2. in the Project Browser. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Elevation 1-a. 6 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. 5 On the Design Bar. click Framing Elevation. click Modify. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 859 . 3 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 4 Place the cursor over grid C. Structural_tutorial. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. You are ready to add the structural braces. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. Structural_tutorial. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. In this exercise. click Save.Notice the stick framing representation. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. Adding Structural Braces. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. In the next exercise. in its current state. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. 860 | Chapter 25 Structural . This project file is required. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you add structural braces to the building model.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 7 On the File menu.

5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. click Brace. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. NOTE If necessary. and using the shape grips. select the grids and drag the grid heads above level 5. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects.4. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. select M_C-Channel: C75x7. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. select the view crop box. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 861 . When adding the braces. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. you use point-to-point insertion. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. click Array. 10 On the Edit menu. Select 2nd for Move to. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar.The brace displays. Select Constrain. 862 | Chapter 25 Structural . 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. Clear Group and Associate. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. 7 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. Enter 4 for Number. The second brace is displayed. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point.

14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Structural Framing Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 863 . 16 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. click .

click Save.17 On the File menu. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. In this exercise. 864 | Chapter 25 Structural .

called Worksharing. You can enable Worksharing for any project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. and so on. they cannot make changes to it. however. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. 865 . floors. A workset is a collection of building elements. such as walls. Using Worksharing. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Autodesk Revit Building®. All other team members can view this workset. doors. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. stairs. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published.Sharing Projects 26 When working with large building projects. In this tutorial.

Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Building by opening only those worksets required for your work. a dialog box displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog box for that element. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Elements specific to a view. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. use Element Borrowing. such as annotations and dimensions. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. such as a tenant interior. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you can select which worksets are open or closed. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. go to the Worksets dialog box. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. In the next exercise. and click Editable. After learning the fundamentals. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. In a multi-story structure. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. select the desired workset. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. The first time you activate worksets within a project. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog box. After the project is shared. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. you specify an active workset. 866 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. Working in a shared project In a shared project. ■ Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. To make a workset editable. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you must first enable Worksharing. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Instead. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. When you are working on a shared project. When setting up Worksharing. In the lessons and exercises that follow. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files.

Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. In most projects. Step 2: Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. if a workset named Interior was created.■ Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. When you create a new workset. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. As new members create worksets for their own use. not including the Project Standards. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. ■ Team member roles Typically. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. the file is saved as the central file. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. Therefore. each team member has control over a portion of the design. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. designers work in teams. Experience has shown that. When creating the new worksets. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. For example. for a typical project. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. and View worksets. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. You should have at least one workset for each person. Regardless of the default setting. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. This allows Revit Building to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. ■ Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Shared Levels and Grids. Using Worksharing in a Project | 867 . Generally. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. with each assigned a specific functional task. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. On this tab. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view.

your changes are saved. you make that workset editable by you. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. When you save to the central file. When working remotely. When you save to the central file. When you save locally (to your local file). On the Options Bar. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you can select which workset is active. After saving to the central file. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. your changes propagate to the entire team. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets.Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. This is called “Selective Open. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. This makes them available to other team members. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. or 868 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. make any required worksets editable. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. In this instance. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. however. When finished or at regular intervals. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you work no differently then you would in the office. within the local file. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. Step 9: Work on the project Work on the project.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. save to the central file. In this situation. you should use it only when: ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. proceeds as usual. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. and then save the local file. However. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. you should then save to your local file. As you work.

In the next exercise. click Worksets. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. To do this. reload the latest changes from the central file. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Building. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. In this conceptual exercise. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. using VPN. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. Using Worksharing in a Project | 869 . Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. Open the c_Worksets. Alternatively. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. The Worksets dialog box is displayed." Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.rvt file located in the Common folder. for instance. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. click Open. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to default worksets. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. click the Training Files icon. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. A dialog box displays suggesting that any user new to Worksharing should complete this training. and make that workset editable.■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user.

and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. you can rename the default workset. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. In this simple training project. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. clear Visible by default in all views. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. it is better to make them visible by default. select Workset1. 4 In the Worksets dialog box. and click OK. currently named Workset1. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. a small number of team members are working on the building model. 12 In the Worksets dialog box. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. turn off Families. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model.3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. 6 Under Show. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. 9 Click OK. another is assigned the interior layout. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Project Standards. Therefore. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 13 Click Rename. In this case. Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog box. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. 10 Click New. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. For training purposes. click New. imagine four users including yourself. Only User-Created worksets should display. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. and Views. Your username displays as the present owner. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. 870 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and notice all are editable by you. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. under Show.

under Identity Data. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. 22 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click OK. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. however. You do. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. 15 In the Worksets dialog box. expand Floor Plans. 24 Select all of the interior elements. click . stairs. Using Worksharing in a Project | 871 . Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. 21 Select one of the interior walls. under Identity Data. and double-click Level 1. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. When you initially activate Worksharing. select Interior Layout for Workset. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. 17 In the drawing area. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. In this training file. expand Views (all). including the interior doors. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default.14 In the Rename dialog box. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 18 On the Options Bar. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. click . and walls. 20 Click OK. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. type the name Exterior Shell.

and click OK. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. 30 Click OK. If any interior elements remain. under Floor Plans. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 33 Select Interior Layout. click the Worksets tab. click . under Identity Data. under Identity Data. click . and click OK. select all of the interior elements of the building model. and click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. 31 On the View menu. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 36 On the Options Bar. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 35 In the drawing area. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. select Interior Layout for Workset. under Views (all). 27 On the View menu. double-click Level 2.25 On the Options Bar. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 34 In the Project Browser. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click Visibility/Graphics. 872 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Save As. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click the Worksets tab. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible.

verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial.Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. select Specify. select the central file and. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 45 On the File menu. 2 In the Open dialog box. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 39 In the Save As dialog box. click Worksets. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. and click Save. click Close. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. make sure you remember the location of this central file. check out worksets. click Non Editable. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 5 On the File menu. click Open. under Open Worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets. In this exercise. 40 Click Save. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. 7 In the File Save Options dialog box. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. you create your local file. 4 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. make modifications to the building model. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. click Worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 3 Click Open. You have created a local file which is for your use only. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. please do so before continuing. 44 Click OK. 42 In the Worksets dialog box. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 6 In the Save As dialog box. In addition. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. select all the User-Created worksets. Next. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. 43 On the right side of the dialog box. and click OK. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. click Options. click Save As. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. Now that you have created the central file. and click OK. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. Using Worksharing in a Project | 873 . you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. you enabled Worksharing on a project.

notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. expand Floor Plans. 12 On the Window menu. Before working on the model. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. and select Yes for Editable. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 20 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 19 Under Constraints. Verify that it is cleared. On the Options Bar. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. and double-click Level 1. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. 22 On the File menu. 14 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). click . Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. click Worksets. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. notice the Editable Only option. however. Because this element is not owned by another user. 23 Click OK. If it was owned by another user. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 11 Click OK. click Modify. click . If this is selected. In this case. 21 Click OK. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 874 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . In this case. select Interior Layout for Name. 10 In the Worksets dialog box. under Identity Data. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. In the Worksets dialog box. select Interior Layout. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 17 On the Options Bar.The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. you can still edit this wall. Revit Building borrows it for you and applies your changes.

27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Selector. Using Worksharing in a Project | 875 . 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. select Basic Wall: Interior . and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 30 On the Design Bar. The precise location is not important. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. click Wall.Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Door. click Modify. 33 In the Type Selector.126mm Partition (2-hr). 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 25 Delete the door.

At the end of a work session. skip the following section. 36 In the Save to Central dialog box. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. If you have not yet completed these exercises. By default. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. leave this file open in its current state. When working in your local file. you should relinquish all worksets. and proceed to Creating a local copy. and save locally immediately afterward. each user must check out worksets. you created your local file. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. You modified the building model. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. and reload the latest changes. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. In addition. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. a tooltip. save to central. In this particular case. 876 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . displays the workset as well as the element type. Borrowed Elements is selected. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. which matches the information in the Status Bar. two users access the central file through a network connection. make elements editable.34 Using the following illustration as a guide. checked out worksets. For training purposes. you should perform regular saves. it is recommended. Whenever you save. The Save to Central dialog box is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 37 Click OK. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. please do so before continuing. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. In this exercise. In the following section of this exercise. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. Throughout the process. click Save to Central.

name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. You are now the owner of that workset. click Options. User 2: Create a local file. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. Using Worksharing in a Project | 877 . 3 On the Settings menu. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. under Open Worksets. and click OK. click Open. 11 In the Save As dialog box. one user has already created a local file. 16 Click OK. select Specify. consider that person to be User 1. and click Save. 10 On the File menu. 14 On the File menu. return to the Settings dialog box. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. click Worksets. 12 In the File Save Options dialog box. enter User 2. click Options. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. select the central file and. and select Yes for Editable. and click OK. under Username. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive.rvt. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. This file is for your use only. 2 Start a new Revit Building session by double-clicking the Revit Building icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. select all the User-Created worksets. instructions are staggered. click Save As. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 7 In the Open dialog box. In addition. and click OK. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. This is a system setting. specifically sequenced. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 4 Click the General Tab and.Using a second Revit Building session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Building window. You now have a local copy of the project. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. For training purposes. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. 8 Click Open.

If it is not open. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists.User 1: Check out worksets. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 27 In the Save to Central dialog box. 26 On the File menu. expand Views (all). expand Views (all). 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. click Save to Central. and double-click Level 1. select the lower exterior wall. 28 Click OK. 22 Click OK. If you only have one workset checked out. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. it becomes the active workset. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog box. modify the building model. expand Floor Plans. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. click Worksets. 23 In the Project Browser. 878 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. open it now. 18 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide.

right-click Copy of Level 1. under Floor Plans. 48 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Project Browser. click Modify. select Yes for Editable. 43 On the Project Browser. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. click Component. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. and click OK. under Views (all). you should create a furniture plan view. Therefore. When you save to central. the Visible by default option was not selected. and click inside any room. Click Yes. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. Using Worksharing in a Project | 879 . the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 47 In the Type Selector. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. However. 41 Select Furniture Layout. click Save to Central. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. click Worksets. User 1: Reload latest worksets. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. and click OK. click Save to Central. 36 On the File menu. click the Worksets tab. and click Duplicate. right-click Level 1. 49 On the View menu.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 34 Click OK. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and click Rename. 33 In the Save to Central dialog box. Before adding any furniture. 32 On the File menu. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. choose any desk. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 40 On the File menu. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 42 On the Project Browser. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. 37 In the Save to Central dialog box. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. 44 In the Rename View dialog box. under Floor Plans. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 38 Click OK. click Reload Latest. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. under Floor Plans.

and click OK. leave this file open in its current state. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 67 Click OK. 57 In the Element Properties dialog box. leave this file open in its current state. 65 On the File menu. click Worksets. 69 On the File menu. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. click Reload Latest. 62 In the Worksets dialog box. In the final exercise of this tutorial. click Edit/New. Checking out worksets. select the following. and click OK. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. 61 On the File menu. click Save to Central. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 880 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users. select Reload Latest.52 On the File menu. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. click Save to Central. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. click Rename. 60 Click OK twice. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 54 Click OK. select Save to Central. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box. 70 In the Save to Central dialog box. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. and save 68 On the File menu. select Project Standards. and click Properties. modified the building model. 53 In the Save to Central dialog box. 66 In the Save to Central dialog box. enter Exterior Wall .200mm. Each user checked out worksets. User 1: Reload latest. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully In this exercise. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. under Show. 64 Click OK. and published their changes back to the central file. 59 In the Rename dialog box.

NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. select Make this the Central location after save.rvt file located in the Common folder. you need to set up your central and local files. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. 7 On the File menu. and these problems are rectified. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. click Open. 5 Click Save. click Options. This is the local file for User 1. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. click Save As. This exercise requires two users and. and click OK. At the appropriate point in this exercise. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. Set the Username to User 2. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Open the c_Worksets Project-Central. 4 In the File Save Options dialog box. User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. click Save As. finished the previous workset exercises. On the Settings menu. throughout this training. 3 In the Save As dialog box. Click the General tab of the Options dialog box. Each user must have network access to the central file. 9 In the Save As dialog box. and click OK. As each of you work. click the Training Files icon. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. and click Save. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. 10 In the File Save Options dialog box. ■ ■ ■ Using Worksharing in a Project | 881 . There are specific instructions for each user. click Options. and still have your local files open. and click OK. In subsequent steps. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Building by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you save the dataset as a central file. click Options. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to.Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. The central file should still be open.

This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. select Specify. 30 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. and then click OK. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. 27 In the Worksets dialog box. under Floor Plans. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence.This Revit Building session is now set up for User 2. 13 On the File menu. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. click Worksets. 882 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and then click OK. select Interior Layout. select Exterior Shell. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select the Interior Layout workset. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 15 Click Open. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. You have created a local file which is for your use only. and select Yes for Editable. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. return to the Settings dialog box. and click OK. 23 In the Worksets dialog box. if any User-Created worksets are not open. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. You are now the owner of that workset. 17 On the File menu. Afterwards. 28 Under Active Workset. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. click Save As. click Open. and click Open. 14 In the Open dialog box. select the second window from the top. 25 Under Active Workset. click Worksets. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. click Options. 18 In the Save As dialog box. In addition. 31 On the left exterior wall. and click Save. You are now the owner of that workset. and select Yes for Editable. select them. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. and click OK. Next. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and reset the Username to your computer login name. select the central file and under Open Worksets. 19 In the File Save Options dialog box. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. This is a system setting.

A message informs you that your request has been granted. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 36 Click Grant. and click Editing Requests. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 35 In the Editing Requests dialog box. select the request submitted by User 2. click the File menu. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 37 Click Close. and notice the window is in the new location. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. After you submit the request. At this point. click Check Now. Using Worksharing in a Project | 883 . Leave this dialog box open until User 1 grants permission.A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 39 Click OK. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. User 2: Check for editability grant 38 In the Check Editability Grants dialog box.

and close 40 On the File menu. select the following. 884 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 41 In the Save to Central dialog box. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 42 On the File menu. In this multi-user exercise. and click OK. In this case. select Save to Central. click Close.User 1 and 2: Save to Central. you requested permission to edit the element. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and the other user granted it. to Local.

you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). 885 . Using design options. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. In this tutorial. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops.Creating Multiple Design Options 27 When working with a building model.

you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. the only available command is to create a new option set. In this particular case. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. For example. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Open the m_Urban_House. you set up multiple design option sets. At any time in the design process. each with multiple design options. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. After you create a design option. With the second option. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. After you and the client agree on the final design. click the Training Files icon. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 886 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Open. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. make your final design decision.Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. The client has asked you to create various options. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. In addition. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you can edit it. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. you design each of the structural options. click New. In the first exercise in this lesson. and delete the unwanted options from the project. 2 In the Design Options dialog box. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. under Option Set. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The first time you open the Design Options dialog box within a project. In the final exercise of this lesson. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you can have multiple sets of design options. In the second exercise.

3 Select Option 1 (primary). and the third column centered between the two. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. expand Floor Plans. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. click 12 On the Options Bar. select: ■ ■ ■ . click Column. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. click Edit Selected. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. 4 In the Project Browser. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). TIP To center the middle column. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. In this case. 9 On the Design Bar. or add a dimension string between the columns. 5 On the View menu. and click Close. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. click Modify. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. add three columns. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. 11 On the Edit toolbar. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected.TIP In this exercise. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. In the following illustration. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. therefore. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. By selecting Multiple. each is constructed for interchangeability. expand Views (all). the roof and structure systems must work together. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 887 . and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 7 In the Type Selector.

A copy of the three selected columns is added.15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. 888 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. using the same technique. Because of the size of the columns. Notice the 12 columns that you added. When you are finished. 17 Zoom out and. they are difficult to see in this view. 18 On the View toolbar. click .

click Beam. click . under Floor Plans. select Round Bar : 50mm. In it. click Modify. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Use the following illustration as a guide. The first click specifies the beam start point. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Zoom in on the upper right column. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. 23 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. and click at its center to set the beam start point. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 889 . double-click TOP OF CORE. The second click specifies the end of the beam. you add the beams that span the columns. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 19 In the Project Browser. Adding a beam is a two-click process.Next. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 25 On the Edit toolbar. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column.

click . select: ■ ■ ■ Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 890 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . 28 Zoom out. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. and select the center of the column to add a copy.26 On the Options Bar. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. move down to the next set of columns. zoom into the left column. and click the center point. Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 30 On the View toolbar.

notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). and click OK. enter Brackets for New. under Option. 32 In the Design Options dialog box. 38 In the Rename dialog box. 37 Select Option 2 and.Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click New. and click OK. 36 In the Rename dialog box. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. and click OK. enter Beam for New. under Option Set. not a new option set. under Option. enter Structure for New. click Rename. 33 Click Finish Editing. click Rename. 40 In the Rename dialog box. click Rename. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. under Option. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 891 .

under Option. click Rename. 892 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . 44 Select the option set Roofing and. enter Roofing for New. under Structure. 47 Under Roofing. 48 Under Option. 43 In the Rename dialog box. click New. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. click Rename. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. click Rename. select Option 1 (primary). You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. There should now be two roofing design options. name the option Louvers. you create the second design option. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. and click OK. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. When finished. 52 Click Close.Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 51 Under Edit. select Option 2. select Beam. select Edit Selected. 50 In the Design Options dialog box. under Option Set. 41 Under Option Set. it will resemble the following illustration. This allows you to more easily manage the project. Under Now Editing. and click OK. click New. and click OK. 46 Under Option. 45 Under Roofing. name the option Sunscreen.

double-click ROOF TERRACE. Refer to the following illustration. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.53 In the Project Browser. select M_Roof Beam. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 893 . click Align. 55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 56 In the Type Selector. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. under Floor Plans. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 58 On the Tools menu. click Component. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam.

61 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 62 Select the beam and. The second click represents the move end point. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. The first click sets the move start point. on the Edit toolbar. 894 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.60 After aligning the beam. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.

click Save As. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. 70 On the File menu. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. the other for beams. and click Save. you set up multiple design option sets. Creating Multiple Design Options in a